Home

TS 102 527-3 - V1.1.1 - Digital Enhanced Cordless

1. Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier FP IP address value 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 Editable IPv4 6 X x x X X 3 1 byte 4 2 byte 3 byte IPv4 6 if set to 0 the format is IPv4 4 bytes long if set to 1 the format is IPv6 16 bytes long An IPv4 address shall always have a length of 4 bytes EXAMPLE 1 A value of 192 168 213 1 is translated into an IP address value field with the following bytes COA8D501 H An IPv6 address shall always have a length of 16 bytes ETSI 119 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 EXAMPLE 2 A value of fd11 2233 4455 1 a b c d is translated into an IP address value field with the following bytes FD11223344550001000A000B000CO00D H The length of the field shall be set to zero when the value of the field is not defined by the user 7 4 11 3 6 Field FP IP address subnet mask The IP address value field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier FP IP address subnet mask 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 Editable IPv4 6 X x x X X 3 1 byte 4 2 byte 3 byte IPv4 6 if set to 0 the format is IPv4 4 bytes long if set to 1 the format is IPv6 16 bytes long A subnet mask for IPv4 shall always have a length of 4 bytes EXAMPLE 1 A value of 255 255 255 0 is translated into an IP address subnet mask field with the following bytes FFFFFFO H A
2. Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier base reset 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 Editable x X x x x X 3 Value 4 Value shall be 30Hor 31H 30H stands for No 31H stands for Yes The Base reset field shall respect the following rules If at least one DECT system setting or line setting has been set to a non default value the Base reset field shall be equal to No when a PP performs a read command If a registered PP sets the value to Yes all DECT system and line settings shall be reset to their default value The setting remains set to Yes until any DECT system or line setting is changed Any attempt from a PP to set this parameter to No shall result in a negative acknowledgement with reject reason procedure not allowed from the FP see clause 7 4 10 4 9 Default value 31H Yes 7 4 11 3 4 Field FP IP address type The IP address type field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier IP address type 1 0 1 Length L 2 Editable DHCP Static X X x xX X 3 The IP address of the FP may be assigned dynamically using DHCP or manually using a static address entered by the user The length of the field shall be set to zero when the value of the field is not defined by the user 7 4 11 3 5 Field FP IP address value The IP address value field shall be coded as follows
3. NOTE The data content is distributed over several data packet messages One entry field might be distributed over more than one data packet For entry field contents see clause 7 4 10 5 1 7 4 10 5 Lists and entry fields In the following the entry field identifiers for various lists are defined Proprietary list fields shall have entry field identifiers with the most significant bit set to 1 7 4 10 5 1 Fields description 7 4 10 5 1 1 Field List identifiers Bits 8 7 6s ay 8 lee 1 Octet Field identifier List identifiers 1 2 X 3 1 supported list identifier 4 2 supported list identifier 5 For octet 3 x indicates the value is reserved for future use The list identifiers shall be ordered in ascending numerical order The list identifiers are defined in clause 7 4 10 3 ETSI 109 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 10 5 1 2 Field Number Bits 8 7 6 So i 4a 3J 2 1 Octet Field identifier Number 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 editable internal own x x x x 3 1 digit 4 2 digit Each digit shall be out of 30H 39H 23H 2AH 05H 15H For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x the value is reserved for future use 7 4 10 5 1 2 1 Field number for terminal identity numbers This field is also used for terminal identity numbers if needed In that case the digits
4. lt lt SIGNAL value negative ack tone 09 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type Line identifier subtype external call value waiting call line id gt Ignored if the PP does not implement lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value waiting call id gt Line of the call to be released if external see note 4 Figure 8 Call release request from the PP NOTE 4 Unlike the call identifier which is a kind a session id for a call and is always present the line identifier is only repeated here as a result of the CALL INFORMATION completeness principle see clause 3 1 It is however ignored on PP side if the PP does not implement the Line identification feature In some cases when the request is sent by the PP the FP might not be able to fulfil it for instance when the call to be released is external In that case the FP shall warn the user by sending the lt lt SIGNAL gt gt information element with the value 09H indicating negative acknowledgement tone The FP may change the codec using the service change procedure see clause 7 4 3 3 Codec change for parallel calls The release by the PP of a parallel call shall not be possible in a conference However the FP could send a call release according to procedure Call release and call release rejection of clause 7 4 3 5 4 or clause 7 4 3 5 5 if the PP does not implement the Ca
5. Implementation of the Parallel calls feature is a pre requisite on PP and FP sides for implementation of the Common parallel call procedures external or internal feature ETSI 49 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Implementation of the Call Identification feature and the Line Identification feature on the FP side is a prerequisite for implementation of the Common parallel call procedures external or internal feature on a DECT system Conversely for the PP the following procedures contain some requirements that are conditional to the implementation of these features When implementing the Common parallel call procedures feature the PP shall set the corresponding terminal capability bit The FP shall set bit a34 of the Extended higher layer capabilities part 2 see EN 300 175 5 5 clause F 3 NOTE Implementation of the Common parallel call procedures feature is mandatory for NG DECT Part 3 PPs This capability bit is therefore primarily meant for non NG DECT Part 3 PPs or FPs that would implement the feature Implementation of the Common parallel call procedures feature is itself a prerequisite for the implementation of the Multiple calls feature or of the Multiple lines feature on a DECT system 7 4 3 5 1 Outgoing parallel call initiation external or internal This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in a call on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call
6. 7 4 10 5 1 11 Field Contact number Bits 8 7 ee ee ee ee ee ee 2 1 Field identifier Contact number 0 1 Length L 0 1 editable default own Fixed mobile work x 1 digit 2 digit For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x for future use Field contact number can be contained several times in one entry A digit is out of 30H 39H 23H 2AH 05H 15H ETSI Octet kOND the value is reserved Octet AON the value is reserved 112 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 10 5 1 12 Field Associated melody Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier Associated melod RON Value For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x the value is reserved for future use 7 4 10 5 2 List of supported lists entry fields This list contains the identifiers of the lists which are supported by the FP as some lists are optional on FP side Table 51 List of supported lists entry fields Field identifier Normative action comment 0x01 List identifiers Single variable length field with 7 4 10 5 1 1 identifiers of all supported lists The list identifiers are defined in clause 7 4 10 3 The List of supported lists refers to a list with only one entry NOTE The list identifiers are ordered in ascending numerical ord
7. gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value id for call 2 H gt Ignored if the PP does not implement the Call identification feature gt gt Ring back tone CC INFO lt lt SIGNAL value 01 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value id for call 2 H gt gt gt Ignored if the PP does not implement the Call identification feature Call transfer request CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 34 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype external call gt Line of the transferred call if external lt Identifier value transferred call line id u gt If the PP implements the Call identification feature lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value id for call 1 H gt gt gt CC RELEASE CC RELEASE COM FP PP2 CC SETUP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value id for call 2 H gt gt gt CC SETUP ACK Example of CC CONNECT position in unannounced call transfer Gail al CC CONNECT pick up CC INFO lt
8. lt lt IWU TO IWU lt Command end session confirm gt lt session identifier gt gt gt Resume call 1 mandatory only if Cf channel used for list access optional otherwise Seo EER ENEE E ak co oe ele Be Soe ee So aoe Se moe Soe oe ees E E tae fen SS CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 42 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line ld call id 1 gt Back to ongoing call 1 external or internal Figure C 32 List access use case consult a list during a voice call ETSI 177 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 6 2 2 Use case call transfer using internal names list first call explicitly put on hold Use case Ongoing call is put on hold before establishing a parallel internal call using the internal names list The first call is then transferred It shows in particular that a call can optional be put on hold before an outgoing second call is made In this case it is proposed that an additional call id is attached to the list access NOTE The list access re uses call idl PP FP Ongoing call 1 external or internal with call id 1 Put call 1 on hold ESNEA re E E E ESE E EEE S ee CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 41 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line ld call id 1 gt Access internal names list to find call transfer target within call 1 IWU INFO lt lt IWU TO IWU lt Command start session gt lt List identifier internal names list gt gt gt IWU INFO lt lt
9. In multiple call mode when the PP rejects the waiting call the Call waiting indication procedure shall be terminated for this PP but this shall not affect the handling of this call on other handsets ongoing procedures for handling the call on other PPs using the present clause or EN 300 444 12 GAP clause 8 12 Incoming call request if it is a first call for the concerned PP shall not stop In particular idle PPs shall not stop ringing NOTE 6 To reject the call for the whole DECT system a call release may be used instead of the present procedure using the Call release and call release rejection of clause 7 4 3 5 4 for the waiting call if the PP implements the Call identification feature or using On hold call release of clause 7 4 3 5 5 otherwise ETSI 58 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 If the remote party hangs up before the waiting call has been accepted or rejected the FP shall send a call release to the PP using Call release and call release rejection of clause 7 4 3 5 4 if the PP implements the Call identification feature or using On hold call release of clause 7 4 3 5 5 otherwise 7 4 3 5 8 Putting a call on hold This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in a call on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal NOTE 1 Implementation of the Multiple call feature or of the Multiple line feature implies implementation o
10. NOTE 1 In any case Line identification must be used on FP side and should be used on PP side NOTE 2 The new call on line A may be a first call or a parallel call If the line A is a multiple call line please refer to clause 7 4 8 2 Incoming and outgoing external calls on a multiple call line otherwise usual procedures defined in the present DECT standard apply NOTE 3 In this case the PP is necessarily attached to several lines at least A and B The PP is busy with line B but not A which means that with regards to line A it is not involved in any call However as it is not idle parallel call procedures apply feature Common parallel call procedures of clause 7 4 3 5 7 4 7 4 Internal calls in multiple line context This procedure applies to the FP and a PP attached to one or more line s Internal calls in multiple line context shall be possible between any two PPs even if there is no line to which both PPs are attached ETSI 84 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 It should be possible to forbid internal calls between PPs that do not share a common line by configuration of the DECT system 7 4 7 5 Compatibility with non multiple line PP or FP This procedure applies to a non multiple line DECT equipement PP or FP in front of a DECT NG PART3 PP or FP implementing the Multiple lines feature Non multiple line DECT equipment include NG DECT Part 3 PP or FP not implementing the Multiple lines fea
11. 7 4 5 2 1 General line identification requirements for external outgoing calls For outgoing calls the Line identification feature enables a PP to select the line on which the call has to be placed If the PP does not send any line identifier the Line identification feature enables the FP to notify back the PP of the line identifier for the selected line This procedure applies to all external outgoing calls first or parallel In the case of a parallel call it only applies if the feature entitled Common multiple call procedures is also implemented In that case relevant procedures are described there The line identifier information shall be sent with one of the following methods Included in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element sent in the CC SETUP message Included in a lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt information element sent either in the CC SETUP message or in a CC INFO message This method shall only be used if the line identifier is in the interval 0 9 If this method is used the line identifier information shall consist in the pound key character 23 H followed by the line identifier digit IA5 coded on a single octet 7 4 5 2 2 Line identification for a first external outgoing call using lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt This procedures applies to the FP and a PP effectively sending a line identifier for a first external outgoing call using a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information elem
12. This means the same field may be included in several list but with a different field id This shall be taken into consideration when using field id in a command List index The list index determines the position of an entry in a sorted list and is used for navigation within a list The list index may change after modification of the list In order to indicate list changes to the PPs a notification procedure is defined This enables the PP to read list contents in advance before using them caching enabling the PP both to hold local copies of lists and to anticipate operations around the current entry in order to save time and so increase interactivity faster MMIs on PP side List entry fields with characters shall in the FP be stored in UTF 8 format PP shall be able to support at least IA5 Guarantee of service When the FP supports a list it shall manage and process all mandatory commands Negative answers are allowed only for real faulty cases and shall not be used systematically Especially the FP shall not declare it supports a list and respond with negative answers to all commands When the FP supports a list it shall support as many fields as possible When the FP supports a field of an entry it shall support as many values as possible for the field and process this field correctly For example if the FP uses a name entry field it shall fill it correctly and not always leave it empty When the DECT NG PART3 system supports a
13. lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt CC RELEASE CC RELEASE COM Figure C 14 Second incoming call on the line or system NOTE When PP1 does not implement Call identification the procedure used by the FP to release the call towards PP when PP2 answers depends on the context if PP1 also tried to answer the call and sent 1C35H but answered second the FP uses the call release and call release rejection procedure i e sends 1C 33H as here if PP1 did not answer at all the FP uses the On hold call release procedure instead i e sends 1C 37H In both cases a such PP ignores the call id sent along with the message call id 2 and only relies on the message itself ETSI 160 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 3 3 First outgoing call on the line or system Use case the PP is attached to a multi call line An outgoing call is initiated PP FP Network attached to a multiple call line u CC SETUP CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt Use of line u for calling called number lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Figure C 15 First outgoing call on the line or system NOTE Figure C 15 does not show the exchange of line ide
14. lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld gt gt CC RELEASE J a CC RELEASE COM A _ umum hi Figure C 42 Changing the settings of a line use case 2 ETSI 187 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 8 3 Changing the name of a line Use case The user edit directly the line name of the line number 3 ETSI 188 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP CC SETUP lt lt Basic Service xxH gt gt CC CALL PROC IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session lines settings list Number of sorting fields 0 gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session confirm session identifier Total number N IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU search entries session id matching options 00H search string 83H counter 1 list of field identifiers Line Id id Line name id IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU search entries confirm session id start index IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part entry identifier line Id Line name for line 3 gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry session id entry identifier list of field identifiers Line Id id Line name id gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry confirm session id start index gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part content part entry identifier line Id Line name for line 3 gt gt user updates the Line name field f
15. lt id type Line identifier subtype external call value waiting call line id gt lt id type subtype Call identifier value call id 2 gt Call established with call id 1 continues Figure C 22 Incoming parallel calls FP release of waiting call when remote party hangs up CW context deleted C 4 2 3 Two incoming calls before user answers Use case Two calls are arriving before the user anwsers any of them Both calls are presented to the user on the MMI and the user selects one of them Use of CC CONNECT with no identified call automatically means that the first call presented with CC SETUP is picked up If the user selects the second call the PP must send a call waiting acceptation before the CC CONNECT is sent to the FP ETSI 168 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP1 attached to lines u and v FP Network v possibly equal to u CC SETUP First incoming lt lt CALL INFORMATION call call id 1 Line on which waiting call lt id type Line identifier subtype external call occurred if external value u gt lt id type subtype Call identifier value waiting call id call id 1 gt CC INFO CW tone Call waiting eared by user lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER indication lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt call id 2 lt lt SIGNAL value call waiting tone 07 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line on whic
16. 00001111 delete list confirm yes 00010000 search entries yes 00010001 search entries confirm yes 00010010 negative acknowledgement yes 00010011 data packet yes yes 00010100 data packet last yes yes 1xxxxxxx reserved for proprietary list access commands all other values reserved Proprietary list access commands shall have list access command codings with most significant bit set to 1 ETSI 95 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 The read entries read entries confirm and search entries confirm commands use a start index as these command 5 may apply to a range of entries within a list The save entry and save entry confirm commands use a position index as these commands apply to one entry Possible error codes are specified for each command from PP to FP They use negative acknowledgement command with exception of negative start session confirm 7 4 10 4 1 Start and end session 7 4 10 4 1 1 Start session command This command from PP requests to start a session to access the specified list in the FP Table 30 Values used within IWU to IWU information element to request the starting of a list change session Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt lt Length of content gt lt Protocol Discriminator gt lt Command start session gt O listaccesscommand _ lt List identifier gt the
17. 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 In order to allow the display of information in idle mode on PP side notifications shall be sent by the FP for Line settings list Internal names list However a change in this list shall only be notified when a PP modifies the name of another PP if the FP allows it and the list change notification shall only be sent to that other PP concerned by the change For all other lists sending of notifications is left free to the implementor However the possibly important extra processing on FP and PP sides necessary for sending and handling notifications e g if sent for each call shall be carefully taken into account NOTE Ifthe corresponding feature is implemented the notification includes the CALL INFORMATION IE with line identifier This might be useful when notifying a change in the line settings list ETSI 94 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 10 3 List identifier codings The following list identifier codings are defined Bits 87654321 Meaning 00000000 List of supported lists 00000001 Missed calls list 00000010 Outgoing calls list 00000011 Incoming accepted calls list 00000100 All calls list 00000101 Contact list 00000110 Internal names list 00000111 DECT system settings list 00001000 Line settings list 1xXxxxxxx Reserved for proprietary lists all other values reserved The lists shall be sorted on the FP using default criteria for each of them The default sorting criteria
18. C 4 1 4 FP managed line selection Manual dialling of called number Use case The PP initiates a parallel call with 15 17H e g the user pressed the R INT key before manually dialling the called number The FP replies with the call id as soon as it received the first message and before dialling of the called number When sending the call id the FP cannot send the line id together with it because FP does not know at this stage if PP will use FP managed line selection NOTE This use case is listed here as a reminder as it is already presented as a mainstream use case in the Outgoing parallel call initiation procedure see clause 7 4 3 5 1 figure 5 C 4 1 5 Unsupported new outgoing parallel call Use case The PP initiated an outgoing parallel call external or internal at a point in time where the FP and or the line cannot support the additional call A busy system or line notification see clause 7 4 8 3 is sent to the PP If a call id was assigned to the new call a call context was created on FP side and the call id was notified to the PP a call release must be also sent ETSI 165 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP Ongoing call external or internal Outgoing call initiation including line selection by the PP not FP managed CC INFO lt Keypad info 15 17 H gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type Line identifier subtype external call Outgoing parallel call initi
19. LU1 Transparent UnProtected service TRUP Class 0 minimum_delay NG1 D 1 transparent unprotected service introducing minimum delay transmission Class 0 min_delay as defined by EN 300 175 4 4 clause 11 2 LU1 Transparent UnProtected service TRUP Class 0 NG1 D 2 transparent unprotected service introducing minimum delay transmission Class 0 as defined by EN 300 175 4 4 clause 11 2 LU7 64 kbit s protected bearer service NG1 D 3 protected service providing reliable 64 kbit s transmission over packet type P80 incorporating FEC and ARQ protection mechanisms Defined by EN 300 175 4 4 clause 11 9 ETSI 190 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 LU12 UNProtected Framed service UNF Class 0 NG1 D4 unprotected service introducing normal delay transmission Class 0 as defined by EN 300 175 4 4 clause 11 14 FU1 DLC frame NG1 D 5 bidirectional frame used in LU1 service Defined in EN 300 175 4 4 clause 12 2 Frame length depends on slot type and is defined in table 12 2 1 1 of EN 300 175 4 4 clause 12 2 1 FU7 DLC frame NG1 D 6 bidirectional frame used in LU7 service Defined in EN 300 175 4 4 clause 11 9 FU12 DLC frame with adaptation for codec G 729 1 NG1 D 7 bidirectional frame used in LU12 service as defined in EN 300 175 4 4 clause 12 12 frame size specified for full slot 2 level modulation and with the adaptation for codec G 729 1 defined in EN 300 175 4 4 clause E 1 D 1 4 New Generation D
20. Procedures in clause 7 4 3 apply to DECT systems allowing to handle several simultaneous calls and offer a common handling of them in various situations PSTN double calls VoIP multiple calls on a single line as well as parallel call situations occurring in a multiple line DECT system Clause 7 4 3 also includes related procedures for Call transfer Call intrusion and 3 party conference with established internal and or external calls The Parallel call feature is a prerequisite feature including high level procedures and requirements Clauses Common parallel call procedures Call transfer Call intrusion and 3 party conference with established internal and or external calls are all handled here because they imply implementation of the Parallel call feature but are however handled as separate features In all parallel call scenarios there shall always be only one link between FP and PP with one U Plane and one call control instance ETSI 7 4 3 2 47 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Control messages The following control codes shall be transmitted as keypad information in CC INFO messages and shall trigger the corresponding actions in the FP Table 17 Control messages for control of parallel calls Procedure Control message Direction PP Status Initiating a second call internal 17H number PP to FP M 17H 17H see note 1 Initiating a second
21. Query supported entry field is ise s0 secsscsiseseepoastssspeist sen capesscesovebebbbensapesads EE ETE Erenet pisia 97 Read Ontries siseisxccis os shsveheasiss ep cayesa sists te capes se E eed capeshen oE EE casa N cape EE A er TEE EE TORES 98 Edit entry ae eea ra erri a E r E T TEE AA EE S ETO Tr EEEE E 100 Save CDr e earr aa a r a or a E EE EE E SEE E EE AM ape eae 101 Delete OM try ese eei ra eria E E or ae EE E E E a e EET E 102 Delete Uist E EET EE 103 Search Entries enca a rT r i e saps E r EE AE EE E EE Sr E 104 Negative Acknowledgements 52 c sisoe ovesscosssasnegsieasscesasestes casuseteeese sees SEE EE EA TEE TEES EE Er iei 106 Data packet Data packet last sc cscissses csscsescesss suse cspesscovsstsces copesscgebsguees sipubssbysiepespesssceuee sues onbedees 107 Lists a d entry Telds lt f scents thsi ie ae sees es i elas hhh Nae EIRE S 108 Fields descriptions Asicisin Asdeachaeslek adie dio EREE nde die ae ante ae e i 108 List of supported lists entry fields cee eescecsseceeececeseeeeneeceseeesaeecaeeseneeceseeesaeeceseeseneeceeeeeeees 112 Missed call list entry flelds c c sc ccsevssccsestes dicteaatventegechevnievenaeuetacgonectenageececessiasguenbessanennenguageestas 112 Outgoing call list entry fields oo eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeesecesecsecsaecsaecsaecsaeeneseaeseaeeeeeesneenaes 113 Incoming accepted call list entry fields 0 eee eeeesecesecesecsecseecacesaecsaecaeeeneseaeeeaeeneeeseeesaes 11
22. ability to generate or indicate a dialling pause e g to await further dial tone incoming call N 8 call received at a DECT PP authentication of PP N 9 process by which the identity of a DECT PP is checked by the FP authentication of user N 10 process by which the identity of a user of a DECT PP is checked by the FP The User Personal Identification UPI a personal identification of 0 to 8 digits manually entered by the user is used for user authentication location registration N 11 facility whereby a PP can be registered with a FP or a cluster of FPs such that incoming calls radio pages or messages may be routed to it on air key allocation N 12 capability to transform Authentication Code AC into User Authentication Key UAK using the key allocation procedure identification of PP N 13 ability for the FP to request and PP to provide specific identification parameters service class indication assignment N 14 assignment by the FP to PP of the service class and indication to the FP by the PP of the contents of its service class alerting N 15 activates or deactivates alerting at the PP using any appropriate indication ZAP N 16 ability first to assign and then to re program the account data held in the PP so that access rights may be suspended subject to the conditions set by the service provider being met coupled with the ability to re program the account data again to reinstate access rights once these
23. as defined by EN 300 175 2 2 clause 4 4 3 with j 672 Physical Packet P80 NG1 P 5 physical packet P80 double slot as defined by EN 300 175 2 2 clause 4 4 4 D 1 6 New Generation DECT part 1 Speech coding and audio features clause 5 6 of TS 102 527 1 G 726 32 kbit s ADPCM NG1 SC 1 ITU T Recommendation G 726 15 narrow band codec as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 5 1 ITU T Recommendation G 726 15 codec is mandatory for New Generation DECT in order to ensure interoperability with existing DECT systems G 711 64 kbit s log PCM NG1 SC 2 ITU T Recommendation G 711 narrow band codec 16 as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 5 2 ITU T Recommendation G 711 16 codec is optional for New Generation DECT in order to improve the quality of narrow band communications and fax modem transmissions ITU T Recommendation G 711 16 provides a slightly higher intrinsic voice quality and no transcoding for PSTN calls Both A Law and u Law are supported ETSI 191 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 G 722 64 kbit s wideband NG1 SC 3 ITU T Recommendation G 722 wideband SB ADPCM 7 kHz codec 17 as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 5 3 ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 is chosen as mandatory wideband codec for New Generation DECT in order to greatly increase the voice quality by extending the bandwidth from narrow band to wideband ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 provides a high wideband quality at a bit rate of 64 kbit
24. but not both at the same time At least one should be provided IF feature NG1 SC 28 FP type 4 OR NG1 SC 29 FP type 5 THEN O ELSE I Either NG1 SC 30 or NG1 SC 31 may be provided but not both at the same time ETSI 32 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Feature NG1 SC 11 type 1b shall become I for PP instead of C702 after 31 December 2009 Feature NG1 SC 14 type 2a shall become I for PP instead of C703 after 31 December 2009 The transition dates given in notes 1 and 2 are linked to the product development and test dates based on corresponding ETSI test specification EN 300 176 2 10 Example for note 1 For PPs developed and tested before 31 December 2009 the feature NG1 SC 11 is C702 For PPs developed and tested after 31 December 2009 this feature is NOTE 1 Testing specification for audio features including handsfree is provided in EN 300 176 2 10 NOTE 2 PP types Ic 1d 2b and 2c are based on HATS methodology This methodology provides objective test results more consistent with subjective tests compared to artificial ear methodology NOTE 3 PP type 2a may produce echo issues in combination with VoIP or long delay networks Types 2b or 2c are recommended for this scenario 6 9 Application features New Generation DECT part 3 Extended wideband speech services devices shall support the following Application features Table 8 Application features status Feature supported E O SA NG
25. gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry session id entry identifier list of field identifiers Base reset gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry confirm session id start index gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part entry identifier Base reset gt i User confirms system and line settings reset IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry session id entry identifier gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part Base reset YES gt f IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry confirm session id entry identifier start index gt gt DECT system settings end session Figure C 40 Reseting the base ETSI 184 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 8 Line settings diagrams C 8 1 General In the following flowcharts we assume that N lines are defined i e Total number of entries N in the line settings list before starting lines settings session Only one data packet command is necessary to read one entry content i e data packet last command received directly In the following flowcharts the read entries or search entries might be done prior to the sequence in a previous session for example But this is not the most usual behaviour as the PP may probably show the curren
26. lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype external call gt lt Identifier value transferred call line id u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value id for call 2 H gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Updated call id gt lt Identifier value id for call 1 H gt gt gt Example 2 of CC CONNECT position in unannounced call transfer Call CC CONNECT pick up Example 3 of CC CONNECT position in unannounced call transfer Call CC CONNECT pick up Figure 16 Unannounced call transfer example with internal target PP2 call transfer request before CC CONNECT NOTE 1 The Call Control message sequence in figure 16 should be understood as an example The real sequences may also contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents NOTE 2 On a single call mode line PP2 is always idle On a multiple call mode line PP2 may be idle or busy If busy PP2 would receive a call waiting indication instead of a CC SETUP and would send a Call waiting acceptation instead of a CC CONNECT ETSI 63 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NOTE 3 A multiple call line may not support the additional internal call In that case PP1 will receive back
27. lt Profile indicator_1 gt XXXXX1x B GAP and or PAP supported ETSI 88 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Information Field within the Standard values within the Normative action comment element information element field information element lt Profile indicator_6 gt 4 XXxXxXxxX B OXxxxx B Support or not support of no emision mode optional feature lt Profile indicator_7 gt Xxxx11x B New Generation DECT Wideband speech supported and Part 3 supported xxx1xXxx B or xxx0xxx B Support of the Call identification feature NG1 N 13 xxX1Xxxx B or xx0xxxx B Support of the Common parallel call rocedures feature NG1 N 7 X1Xxxxx or XOxxxxx B Support of the Multiple lines feature NG1 N 14 lt Control codes gt All If PT supports feature GAP N 25 it shall indicate in this field value which is equal to or higher than 2 NOTE 1 Echo parameters values 01 and 10 may only be set by type 2a PPs See clause 6 8 table 7 note 2 for restrictions on PPs type 2a GAP compliant or NG DECT part compliant PPs may also set these values NOTE 2 This capability is assumed as the default value see table 26 if the lt lt TERMINAL CAPABILITY gt gt information element is omitted The capabilities in table 26 shall be assumed as default if the following fields in the lt lt TERMINAL CAPABILITY gt gt information element are not present Table 26 Values assumed as terminal capabilities Informa
28. possibly new index of the entry in the list Entry fields which were not indicated as editable shall not be sent back with changes within the data packet messages belonging to the save entry procedure In case changes in non editable fields or a change of a not previously requested edit entry the FP should send negative acknowledge with reject reason procedure not allowed 7 4 10 4 6 Delete entry 7 4 10 4 6 1 Delete entry command This command from PP requests to delete one entry in a list ETSI 103 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Table 42 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Delete entry command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWUs gt lt Length of content gt Length of content lt Protocol Discriminator gt CH I lt Command deleteentry gt CH _ Listaccess command _ _ _ lt Entry identifier gt Entry identifier see note NOTE _ Session identifier and entry identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 Delete entry is not allowed for List of supported lists nor for DECT system settings list Possible error cases If session identifier is wrong the FP shall answer with negative acknowled
29. 13 Values used within FACILITY message to convey Lineld in notification Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment meme ____ _ _ the field IE lt lt Call information gt gt lt identifier type gt i 7 lt Identifier subtype gt Relating to line identifier lt Identifier value gt All The line identifier value itself Notification of an event shall be sent only to relevant PPs If notification is related to a line the notification shall be sent to registered PPs that are attached to this line The FP shall use the Attached handsets line setting to determine these PPs For example this is the case for the voice message waiting notification the missed calls notification and the internal names list change notification NOTE 1 A PP may be attached to several lines NOTE 2 Exception case the current procedure is still valid in case the notification concerns several lines of the DECT system In this case Call information IE may include several line ids or may be set to All lines ETSI 44 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 1 2 Voice Message waiting notification Upon reception of a voice message waiting indication MWI from the network on a dedicated line the FP shall send to any PP attached to this line a voice message waiting notification using the generic events notification NOTE The FP is aware of the attached handsets to a line thanks to the l
30. 255 Requested field element type lt List entry field identifier n gt 0 255 Requested field element type NOTE _ Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 In the list access command search entries the submitted searched value contents together with the matching option define the search criterion FP answers with list entries beginning with the first matching entry but it does not generate a new list for the result A matching entry shall be understood with the matching option taken into account The Search entries command shall be considered successful if at least one entry is found that matches the search criterion and even if there are less than lt counter gt 1 entries after the matching entry in the list See Search entries confirm command particular cases for the case the search does not succeed no entry found at all The command search entries is in principle similar to read entries with the exception that instead of start index the searched value is used Matching option Bits 87654321 Meaning 00000000 exact match with whole target field required 00000001 exact match as with OOH option tried current start index returned if exact match fails 00000010 exact match as with OOH option tried previous star
31. 4 21 symmetric MAC service type 7 9 1 21 i i i 5 6 3 5 6 1 1 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6 2 1 3 ingle subfield protected format 6 2 1 3 4 3 M M M M 5 4 21 M 7 9 1 21 M 5 6 3 _ M 5 6 1 1 3 M aes 5 4 21 O 7 9 1 21 M 5 63 M 5 6 1 1 3 M 5 6 1 2 3 M 5 4 21 O 7 9 1 21 M 5 6 3 _ M_ 5 6 1 1 3 M 5 6 1 2 3 M ETSI 39 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Service Procedure mapping M E ee NG1 M 4 Advanced connections n 54121 M M M Fey le ee ee a setup A field ala Ga advanced Slot type modification 7 6 7 21 M M_ M_ NG1 M 5 no emision mode CT KT CO CO Cf COO CT Tail identification for no emission mode capabilities part 2 bit a23 multiframe countdown no emission mode sync information no emission mode procedures Management procedures for no emission 11 11 8 M M M mode GAP M 2 Continuous broadcast _ M OM OM _ GAP M 3 Paging broadcast TH M OM OM _ es T ee ee ney GAP M 9 Bearer handover me n ee ol 5 2 12 C502 C502 cell Bearer handover request 7 6 11 21 GAP M 10 Bearer handover 5 2 12 M inter cell Bearer handover request 7 6 11 21 GAP M 11 Connection handover 5 2 12 M C503 C503 intra cell Connection handover request 7 6 12 21 GAP M 12 Connection handover 5 2 12 M inter cell GAP M 13 SARI support Oooo Sa
32. 5 2 Non multiple line FP in front of a multiple line PP In front of a non multiple line FP hence connected to at most one line a PP implementing the Multiple lines feature is however attached to a single line In front of a non GAP FP it should send the corresponding line id for each call as specified in clause 7 4 5 2 2 or alternatively clause 7 4 5 2 3 and not use FP managed line selection following the recommendation included in clause 7 4 5 2 4 that FP managed line selection is not meant for PPs attached to a single line In front of a GAP FP it shall not send any line identifier 7 4 8 Multiple call line handling 7 4 8 1 Multiple calls general requirements The Multiple calls feature represents the ability for a FP and PP to support several fully parallel calls outgoing or incoming to and from a single line supporting the Multiple call mode ETSI 85 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 call incoming FP a line Callz outgoing a single external number Calls incoming Figure 37 A multiple call line with three simultaneous calls This feature is especially useful when several calls are placed or received on different handsets at the same time However a multiple call enabled DECT system is compatible and can be connected to a non multiple call line like a PSTN line From the DECT system point of view a multiple call line may be configured in single call mode To configure
33. Call identifiers shall be sent within the lt lt CALL INFORMATIONS gt gt information element with lt Identifier type gt and lt Identifier subtype gt fields both equal to Call identifier It shall be sent in case the sending party PP or FP implements the Call identification feature NOTE The Call transfer 3 party conference with established internal and or external calls and Call intrusion features also make use of call identifiers with a different lt Identifier subtype gt Updated call identifier for the purpose of updating the identifier of an existing call This subtype is not used within the Call identification feature itself Several procedures outside of the Call identification feature itself also use call identifiers conditionally to implementation of this feature This includes some procedures of the Common parallel calls procedures feature When implementing the feature the PP shall set the corresponding terminal capability bit 7 4 6 2 Call identifier assignment on outgoing call FP to PP The purpose of this procedure is to have the FP assign a unique call identifier for the call external or internal and notify it back to the calling PP In case of internal call the FP shall assign a single call identifier for both PPs The assigned call identifier shall be notified back to the PP by including a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element in a CC INFO message with lt Call identifier
34. Class 5 3 21 M M M 0 min_delay NG1 D 5 DLC frame FU1 5 3 21 NG1 SC 3 ITU T Recommendation 5 6 21 M M M G 722 17 64 kbit s 7 kHz wideband ee codec NG1 SC 7 Packet loss Concealment Pee eel PLC for ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 NG1 SC 9 Codec selection and 5 6 21 M M M Sthing E cc a NG1 SC 14 PP Audio type 2a ITU T Recommendation P 311 i 5 note 2 7 kHz handset NG1 SC 15 PP Audio type 2b HATS 5 6 21 C703 N A N A Pits handset eae eed NG1 SC 16 PP Audio type 2c HATS 7 kHz improved handset NG1 SC 19 PP Audio type 4a HATS ERA 7 kHz handsfree NG1 SC 20 PP Audio type 4b HATS AREE E A 7 kHz improved handsfree NG1 SC 28 FP Audio type 4 ISDN EIRA C708 wideband NG1 SC 29 FP Audio type 5 VoIP eee re pee fore wideband i am lM canceller for FP wideband fupressorforFP wideband supressor for FP wideband NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal call O O O O N A N A N A N A A NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal 5 6 21 N A conference NG1 SC 34 Adaptive volume control 5 6 21 N A ETSI 25 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Service DECT Feature mapping FT DECT f O ET ee ee NG1 4 Wideband 7 kHz G 729 1 32 kbit s voice service WTS ae P 1 2 level GFSK modulation 5 5 21 ee NG1 P 3 Physical Packet P32 5 5 21 NG1 M 2 In_normal_delay symmetric 5 4 21 NG1 M 4 Advanced Connections 5 4 21 M Mf Mm NG1 D 4 DLC service LU12 UNF Class 0 NG1 D 7 DLC frame FU12 with
35. ER E E E vss E EE EER e 72 Handling of single call Services eccirni oiea e EEE E eirian EE EE EEE KERA eE 72 Control Messages ien ain ceed ese atte aed ia ede al ae eee etek es teed ae eet eaten 72 Call deflection control Messages 0 cece eee ssecseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeceseesecaecnaecsaecsaecaeecseseaeseaeeeeeeeeeaees 72 Call deflecttonissic 2 ceh testes a e A ed a a a este Ge tele 72 Line identi cation 2isi 5 cetie Scie Sealed ce din E ae edna eed ne diecast 74 Line identification general reqUuireMEeNts eeeeeseeceseeeeeeceeeeeenceceseeeeseeceeeeeaeeceseereneeceeeeeneecetresenaees 74 Line identification for external outgoing calls eee eeeceeeeceteceeneeceseceeeeecsaceeeaeecsueceeaeecaeeeeaeeereseneees 74 General line identification requirements for external outgoing Calls ee ee eeeeteceseceteeneeenees 74 Line identification for a first external outgoing call using lt lt CALL INFORMATIONS 74 Line identification for a first external outgoing call using lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt 75 FP managed line selection for a first external outgoing call sssessseeesseeseeersrrerrsreerrsreressesrreresrese 76 Line identification for external incoming call ssesssesseesessesesesessressetsstsseretssesrseerseessressressreseeseeessee 77 General line identification requirements for external incoming Calls eee eee eeteeteeeteeeeees 77 Line identification for a first external incoming call ele eeeeeesee
36. ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 The preferred carrier number is selected and broadcasted by the FT PT broadcast info FT if a 1 then DummyPointer wakeups on all carriers should be done after reset if a 0 then DummyPointer wakeup only on the known preferred carrier should be done after reset PT check capability no emission mode preferred carrier number mode if a 1 then DummyRequest wakeups on all carriers should be done after reset or asynchronous mode if a 0 then DummyRequest wakeup only on the known preferred carrier should be done after reset or asynchronous mode Higher layer information The management entity in the FP supplies the MAC layer with a 24 bit SDU via the Management Entity ME SAP The content of that SDU is placed in bits lt a24 gt to lt a47 gt of the Qr message At the PT the MAC layer passes the 24 bits out through the ME SAP to the management entity For the setting of the higher layer information bits see clause 7 4 9 2 2 7 6 3 6 Q7 SARI list contents The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 6 3 6 shall apply 7 6 4 Paging broadcast The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 6 4 shall apply 7 6 5 no emision mode The requirements of EN 300 175 3 3 clauses 7 1 2 7 2 3 11 7 2 4 3 7 3 5 3 9 4 and 11 11 shall apply 7 7 Physical layer PHL requirements 7 7 1 Modulation The FT and PT shall support 2 level Gaussian Frequency Shif
37. FP does not know that there will be a call intrusion attempt and assigns a call identifier to this new call independently of the intruded call This is in contrast to the Implicit call intrusion procedure PP2 then sends a call intrusion request consisting in the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 40H and optionally followed by the terminal id number of the handset owning the targeted call As a result of this request If a terminal id number is specified and there is a call active on this terminal this call shall be intruded If no terminal id number is specified but there is only one active call on the line this only call shall be intruded In all other cases a CC INFO message shall be returned back to the requesting PP with a lt lt SIGNAL gt gt information element with lt Signal value gt field equal to 09H for negative acknowledgement The FP shall notify PP1 with a CC INFO message containing the information element lt lt SIGNAL gt gt with the value 02H indicating Intercept tone on The FP shall generate automatically a conference call audio stream between the three parties NOTE 3 In addition to the Intercept tone on Call waiting with the same call id warns PP1 of a call intrusion attempt NOTE 4 In multiple call mode simply initiating a call setup would lead to the setup of an additional call if the line can accept an additional call or to a failure bu
38. MAC MAC NWK LCE REQUEST PAGE access_request bearer_confirm lt lt CALL INFORMA Facility lt lt Events notification gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld gt gt Figure B 1 Event notification when there is no existing connection NOTE Line identifier may be equal to all lines value ETSI 139 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 B 1 2 Event notification during existing connection Use case FP wants to send an event notification when the PP is on communication use the existing connection lt lt CALL Facility lt lt Events notification gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld gt gt Figure B 2 Event notification during existing connection NOTE Line identifier may be equal to all lines value B 1 3 Event notification when the PP is switched on Use case FP has wanted to send an event notification when PP was switched off PP is switched on use the location registration connection LOCATE REQUEST LOCATE ACCEPT Yt Facility lt lt Events notification gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld gt gt Figure B 3 Event notification when the PP is switched on NOTE Line identifier may be equal to all lines value ETSI 140 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 B 1 4 Event notification using call connection Use case FP has wanted to send an event notification when PP was not in range PP sends a CC SETUP use the call connection ae CC SE
39. NG1 M 1 In minimum delay symmetric MAC service type 5 4 21 M M T M NG1 M 2 In_normal delay symmetric MAC service type 5 4 21 C501 C501 C501 NG1 M 3 lpq_error_detection symmetric MAC service type 5 4 21 C501 C501 NG1 M 4 Advanced connections 5 4 21 M NG1 M 5 C501 C501 5 4 GAP M 1 GAP M 2 GAP M 3 GAP M 4 _ oO GAP M 5 GAP M 6 Po Q a a GAP M 7 Encryption activation 5 2 12 GAP M 8 Extended frequency allocation note 5 2 12 GAP M 9 Bearer Handover intra cell 5 2 12 intra 502 Bearer Handover inter cell 5 2 12 NG1 M 1 NG1 M 2 NG1 M 3 NG1 M 4 NG1 M 5 GAP M 1 GAP M 2 GAP M 3 GAP M 4 GAP M 5 GAP M 6 GAP M 7 GAP M 8 GAP M 9 Q gt U Connection Handover intra cell GAP M 14 C504 501 Status defined by clause 6 3 table 2 C502 IF service GAP M 11 THEN O ELSE M C503 IF service GAP M 9 THEN O ELSE M C504 IF feature GAP N 29 OR N 28 THEN M ELSE I C505 IF feature GAP N 17 OR N 27 THEN M ELSE NOTE Handsets not supporting these extra frequencies need only adapt scanning to allow continued use of the standard DECT frequencies 503 Q gt a D 5 4 Q _ Q O _ Q a a 1O j N C504 Oa gt rd Bl in D 6 7 Physical layer PHL services New Generation DECT part 3 Extended wideband speech services devices shall support the following Physical layer
40. PHL services Table 6 PHL services status Service supported NG1 P 1 2 level GFSK modulation 5 5 21 NG1 P 2 NG1 P 3 NG1 P 4 Physical Packet P67 Tt o NG1 P 5 Physical PacketP80 _ _ o Tssa o o The requirements of EN 300 444 12 clause 11 also apply ETSI 31 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 6 8 Speech coding and audio features New Generation DECT part 3 Extended wideband speech services devices shall support the following Speech coding and audio related features Table 7 Speech Coding and audio features Service supported Name of service Reference RB NG1 SC 1 5 6 21 NG1 SC 2 G 711 64 kbit s PCM codec Cf NG1 SC 3 G 722 64 kbit s 7 kHz wideband codec 5 6 21 NG1 SC 4 G 729 1 32 kbit s 7 kHz wideband codec 5 6 21 NG1 SC 5 MPEG4 AAC LD 64 kbit s 14 kHz superwideband codec 5 6 21 NG1 SC 6 5 6 21 NG1 SC 7 Packet Loss Concealment PLC for G 722 NG1 SC 8 NG1 SC 9 Codec selection and switching 5 6 21 NG1 SC 10 PP Audio profile type 1a classic GAP handset 5 6 21 1 NG1 SC 11 PP Audio profile type 1b improved GAP handset 5 6 21 NG1 SC 12 PP Audio profile type 1c HATS 3 1 kHz handset 5 6 21 C702 N A NG1 SC 13 PP Audio profile type 1d HATS 3 1 kHz improved handset 5 6 21 C702 N A N A NG1 SC 14 PP Audio profile type 2a ITU T Recommendation P 311 i 5 5 6 21 C703 N A N A 7 kHz handset note 2 NG1 SC 15 PP Audio profile type 2b HATS 7 kHz handset N A N
41. SC 1 over 32 kbit s unprotected transmission channel Narrow band PCM G 711 voice service NG1 2 ITU T Recommendation G 711 16 narrow band codec NG1 SC 2 over 64 kbit s protected or unprotected transmission channels Wideband 7 kHz G 722 voice service NG1 3 ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 wideband codec NG1 SC 3 over 64 kbit s protected or unprotected transmission channels Wideband 7 kHz low rate G 729 1 voice service NG1 4 ITU T Recommendation G 729 1 18 wideband codec NG1 SC 4 over 32 kbit s unprotected transmission channels Super wideband 14 kHz MPEG 4 ER AAC LD voice service NG1 5 MPEG 4 ER AAC LD super wideband codec NG1 SC 5 over 64 kbit s protected or unprotected transmission channels Wideband 11 kHz low rate MPEG 4 ER AAC LD voice service NG1 6 MPEG 4 ER AAC LD super wideband codec NG1 SC 6 over 32 kbit s unprotected transmission channels D 1 2 New Generation DECT part 1 Network NWk features clause 5 2 of TS 102 527 1 Codec Negotiation NG1 N 1 capability to negotiate the speech codec to be used in a communication based on the supported capabilities in both peers and the previsions included in the present document This feature may require slot type change Codec Switching NG1 N 2 capability to switch between different speech codecs during a call This feature may require slot type change D 1 3 New Generation DECT part 1 Data Link Control DLC services clause 5 3 of TS 102 527 1
42. User data oriented lists DECT system and line settings lists at ef OO TTB list access Figure 39 Structure of the lists managed by the List access service feature The list access feature defines a generic way to access lists located in the FP from the PP This access includes read edit and delete functionalities When implementing the feature the FP shall set the capability bit indicating List access service feature support see EN 300 175 5 5 clause F 3 bit a36 The procedure is based on IWU Info messages which contain the information element lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt using the dedicated protocol discriminator 03 H Table 28 Values used within the lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt information element Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE 1 127 ist access command lt Command specific byte 0 gt oOo O O ha a a eee lt Command specific byte L 2 gt lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt lt Length of content gt Length of content lt S R bit gt 1 Transmission of message lt Protocol Discriminator gt List access Basic service The procedure can be started by a PP either in idle mode or in an already existing call The procedure can be used independently of the basic service lt Call class gt field value of the call i e all lists may be accessed with any lt call class gt value At call setup it is recommended to use th
43. Value 4 Value shall be 30H or 31H 30H stands for intrusion call not allowed 31H for intrusion call allowed This field is related to the intrusion call feature see clause 7 4 3 8 For Implicit call intrusion see clause 7 4 3 8 1 the value also indicates the behavior of the system when a call setup is attempted on the line real call setup vs call intrusion ETSI 124 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 11 4 10 Field Permanent CLIR The Permanent CLIR field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier Permanent CLIR 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 Editable x X x xX x X 3 Value 4 CLIR code 1 digit 5 CLIR code 2 digit Value shall be 30H or 31H 30H stands for CLIR de activated for all calls 31H for CLIR activated for all calls Each digit shall be out of interval 30H 39H and values 23H 2AH 05H and 15H If a PP sets or resets the value the FP shall activate or deactivate the CLIR service in the network using the CLIR code for all outgoing calls placed on the specified line This setting shall be consistent with the CLIR feature NG1 N 17 If the CLIR code is not relevant depending on the Network type the FP may set the length of the field so that the field only includes the value octet Default value 30H de activated Default CLIR code is manufacturer defined 7 4 11 4 11 F
44. a multiple call line in single call mode or the other way round the Multiple call mode setting of the DECT system settings list see clause 7 4 11 4 8 shall be used through the List access service feature NG1 N 16 NOTE 1 PSTN double calls are also a kind of multiple calls on a single line but always with a single handset for both calls and only one call context active at a time NOTE 2 Multiple calls is most notably a feature brought by VoIP protocols allowing several call contexts to be opened simultaneously on network side When implementing the Multiple calls feature the FP shall set bit a39 of the Extended higher layer capabilities part 2 see EN 300 175 5 5 clause F 3 7 4 8 1 1 Pre requisites The following pre requisites for implementation of the Multiple calls feature shall be taken into account A FP implementing the Multiple calls feature shall implement the Call identification feature as a pre requisite A PP implementing the Multiple calls feature should implement the Call identification feature as well A PP or FP implementing the Multiple calls feature shall implement the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures of clause 7 4 3 5 as a pre requisite so that a new call can be placed or received on an already in communication PP NOTE On FP side implementation of the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures also implies implementation of the Line identific
45. adaptation for codec G 729 1 NG1 SC 4 ITU T Recommendation 5 6 21 G 729 1 18 32 kbit s 7 kHz wideband codec NG1 SC 9 Codec selection and switching NG1 SC 14 PP Audio type 2a 5 6 21 ITU T Recommendation P 311 i 5 7 kHz handset NG1 SC 15 PP Audio type 2b HATS 5 6 21 7 kHz handset oe NG1 SC 16 PP Audio type 2c HATS 7 kHz improved handset NG1 SC 19 PP Audio type 4a HATS 7 kHz handsfree NG1 SC 20 PP Audio type 4b HATS 7 kHz improved handsfree NG1 SC 28 FP Audio type 4 ISDN 5 6 21 wideband gt O n D 5 zi gi ol lt pej 0 e nv NG1 SC 29 FP Audio type 5 VoIP 5 6 21 wideband 5 6 21 5 6 21 NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal 5 6 21 call NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal conference NG1 SC 34 Adaptive volume control 5 6 21 zg z QI5 O nL u Oj2 O wl Za Z 2 ole w OJQ O N N AIO R l3 v ve 28 8 gt gt O O n p pej D n n O fe 71 U Q o Oo ft gt a ee ee soos al Ba ETSI NG1 5 Superwideband 14 kHz MPEG 4 ER AAC LD 64 kbit s voice service NG1 5 Superwideband 14 kHz MPEG 4 ER AAC LD 64 kbit s voice service TI U Z z O gt O i n olislalg ojolz O W ziglia v oO 3 O eae 26 Service DECT Feature mapping Status Reference pr T _ RB P 5 1 21 O 5 5 21 M 5 5 21 M 5 4 21 M M 5 421 M 5 4 21 M i M 5
46. address subnet mask MD MD Editable only for static IP address 7 4 11 3 6 0x07 FP IP address gateway MD MD Only for static IP address 7 4 11 3 7 0x08 FP IP address DNS server MD MD Only for static IP address 7 4 11 3 8 0x09 FP version Firmware version YES MD NO Software version of the FP 7 4 11 3 9 Ox0A FP version Eeprom version YES MD NO Eeprom version of the FP 7 4 11 3 10 0x0B FP version Hardware version YES MD NO Hardware version of the FP 7 4 11 3 11 ETSI 117 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Default value it is the value of the setting when product is manufactured YES means that a default value is standardized See corresponding setting clause definition MD means that a default value shall be provided by the manufacturer could also be empty or a zero length setting YES MD means that a default value shall be provided by the manufacturer which shall not be empty Base reset impacted describes the impact of the Base reset setting on this particular setting YES means setting is reset to default value when Base reset setting is activated NO means setting is not impacted by Base reset setting MD means manufacturer defines if the setting is impacted or not by the Base reset setting 7 4 11 3 1 Field PIN code The PIN code field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier PIN code 1 0 1 Le
47. are the following The Missed calls Outgoing calls Incoming accepted call lists and more generally all call related lists shall be sorted by default using the Date and time field The Contact list shall be sorted by default using the Name field first criterion In case the names are equal the list should be sorted using the First name field criterion 2 The Internal names list shall be sorted by default using the Number field terminal id number The Line settings list shall be sorted by default using the Line id field Please refer to the Start session command for a definition of the sorting order used for a given field type this definition applies independently of the position of the field in the sorting process i e whether used as first criterion criterion 2 etc 7 4 10 4 List Access Commands The following list access commands are defined Bits 87654321 Meaning PP gt FP FP gt PP 00000000 start session yes 00000001 start session confirm yes 00000010 end session yes yes 00000011 end session confirm yes yes 00000100 query supported entry fields yes 00000101 query supported entry fields confirm yes 00000110 read entries yes 00000111 read entries confirm yes 00001000 edit entry yes 00001001 edit entry confirm yes 00001010 save entry yes 00001011 save entry confirm yes 00001100 delete entry yes 00001101 delete entry confirm yes 00001110 delete list yes
48. be empty or zero length setting YES MD means that a default value shall be provided by the manufacturer shall not be empty YES means that a default value is standardized See corresponding setting clause definition Base reset impacted describes the impact of the Base reset setting on the given setting YES means that the setting is reset to default value when Base reset setting is activated NO means that thesetting is not impacted by Base reset setting MD means manufacturer defined whether or not the setting is impacted by the Base reset setting The list shall be sorted by ascending numerical order of the Line id field values Only one entry per line identifier shall exist in the line settings list In other words two distinct entries shall never have the same line id If a PP attempts to add or modify an entry with an already existing line id in one entry of the list the FP shall reject it with negative acknowledgement clause 7 4 10 4 9 reject reason content not accepted When the line name of a specific line is modified the FP should automatically update the other lists where line name is stored especially call lists 7 4 11 4 1 Field Line name See Line name field in List access service feature clause 7 4 10 5 1 6 7 4 11 4 2 Field Line id See Line id field in List access service feature clause 7 4 10 5 1 7 ETSI 122 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 0
49. call ETSI 159 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP2 PP1 FP Network attached to line u attached to line u Call established with call id 1 external or internal Incoming call from CC SETUP oat calling number lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt Incoming call presentation CC INFO Call waiting indication lt lt SIGNAL value call waiting tone 07 H gt gt lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt If PP2 accepts the call or accepts it first r I l CC CONNECT lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 33 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt If PP1 accepts the waiting call CC INFO or accepts it first lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 35 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt
50. call external 15H number see note 2 PP to FP M Call waiting indication external or internal Clip see note 3 IE lt lt SIGNAL call FP to PP M waiting tone 07H gt gt Intrusion call request indication only internal IE lt lt SIGNAL Intercept tone ON FP to PP O 02H gt gt Call toggle request external or internal 1CH 31H PP to FP M 3 party conference call request external or 1CH 32H PP to FP O internal Call release of the indicated call 1CH 33H PP to FP M or Active call release if the PP does not implement Call identification Call transfer request external or internal 1CH 34H PP to FP M Call waiting acceptation 1CH 35H PP to FP M Call waiting rejection 1CH 36H PP to FP M On hold call release when 2 parallel calls are 1CH 37H PP to FP or C1701 established FP to PP Call release rejection IE lt lt SIGNAL 09H negative FP to PP M acknowledgement tone gt gt Explicit call intrusion 1CH 40H PP to FP O Putting a call on hold 1CH 41H PP to FP O Resuming a call put on hold 1CH 42H PP to FP O C1701 _IF feature NG1 N 13 THEN O ELSE M NOTE 1 NOTE 2 NOTE 3 NOTE 4 NOTE 5 NOTE 6 7 4 3 3 In case there is no ambiguity i e when there are only two registered PPs switched on the number can be omitted Use of 31H 32H 33H 35H etc as number after 15H may have a specific meaning for the network For backward compatibility reasons the FP may have to interpret these codes as c
51. call is accepted on the PP is out of the scope of the present document For example only the call key could accept the incoming call PP2 PP1 FP CC SETUP lt lt CNIP Hanset locator gt gt VY CC SETUP lt lt CNIP Hanset locator gt gt PP1 is located by user CC CONNECT OIH CC RELEASE CC RELEASE COM CC RELEASE Figure 47 Handset locator example where PP1 is located NOTE 5 The Call Control message sequence in figure 47 should be understood as an example The real sequences may also contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents ETSI 137 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Annex A normative System parameters A 1 lt AP 01 gt FT value PT value Start Stop lt AP 02 gt FT value PT value Start Stop lt AP 03 gt FT value PT value Start Stop Application timers Subscription mode timer 120 seconds Not used Subscription mode has been requested by the user set a44 access rights supported bit and Easy pairing registration supported a37 bit As soon as on air subscription procedure is successful clear a44 access rights supported bit and Easy pairing registration supported a37 bit Searching mode timer Not used 120 seconds Searching mode has been requested by the user listen and wait for a44 access rights supported bit As soo
52. call may be the first voice call occurring during the connection i e it is not a truly parallel call although the Waiting call indication procedure is used When an open list access session and a voice call s are ongoing in parallel the FP shall not release the link before the session and the call are ended Interactions with the Call identification feature NG1 N13 Assuming that the Call identification feature NG1 N13 is implemented on FP side call identification is intended for voice calls only More specifically At list access call setup whatever the call class the FP shall assign a call id just after the SETUP message This call id is intended for the outgoing voice call expected to be placed following the list access session If list access re uses an already established connection no call identification shall be assigned by the FP at list access session setup When the PP initiates a first voice call during a list access session the voice call shall use the already assigned call identifier When the PP initiates a parallel voice call during a list access session the list access session was started while a first call was going on the FP shall assign a new call id to this parallel call When a waiting call is presented during a list access session the FP shall always assign a new call id to this incoming call In other words even if this waiting call is the first voice call occuring within the connection it sha
53. call waiting procedure for already in use handsets may be used in the following two cases a second VolP call is received or an in band call waiting tone from a PSTN to VoIP gateway is received However the used procedures are the same NOTE 5 If the call is meanwhile accepted by another PP or if the remote party hangs up before the call is accepted by any PP the call must be then released by the FP towards the current PP see clauses 7 4 3 5 4 and 7 4 3 5 5 7 4 8 3 Busy system or line notification This procedure applies to the FP and a PP that initiated an outgoing call external or internal at a point in time where the FP and or the line cannot support the additional call The new outgoing call may be a first call or a parallel call NOTE 1 The current procedure applies within an outgoing call setup attempt For idle PPs a lt lt DISPLAY gt gt notification can also be used outside of any call for preventing call setup attempts especially on a line in single call mode NOTE 2 In single call mode the line is considered busy for idle PPs as soon as one call is going on on it Busy line A busy line is a line for which no new incoming or outgoing call can be performed because all of the available bandwidth is used This concept is especially relevant for multiple call lines Busy system A DECT system is busy if the FP is not able to support any additional call because the maximum number of call contexts it can handle h
54. case transfer number from missed call list to contact list a ae CC Setup IE lt lt BASIC_SERVICE lt Call Class Normal call setup gt gt gt CC Call Proc IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session missed call list Nb sorting field identifiers 0 gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session confirm session identifier 1 Total number Sorting field identifier 1 date and time gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries session id start index counter list of field identifiers gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWUES read entries confirm session id counter gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part 1 gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part i gt gt user selects entry to save in contact list i IWU Info a_l IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session contact list Nb sorting field identifiers 0 gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session confirm session identifier 2 Total number Sorting field identifier1 name Sorting field identifier2 First name gt gt Figure C 25 List access use case transfer number from missed call list to contact list 1 2 ETSI 171 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry session id 2 entry identifier 00H gt gt IWU Info IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id 2 content part 1
55. case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 NOTE 2 Discriminator type set to 1 EMC indicates the support of proprietary list access commands of proprietary lists and of proprietary list fields For distinguishing proprietary elements from different manufacturers the EMC is given in the following two octets In case Discriminator type is set to 0 the following two octets are don t care The PP shall not use proprietary list elements in case either the Discriminator type is 0 Undefined or the EMC is different from the own one The session identifier shall be unique between FP and one PP It identifies the access for one list to the PP which has started the session The FP shall at least support two session at a time to one PP Proprietary elements shall have identifiers with the most significant bit set to 1 The submitted list entry field identifiers are used to indicate the entry field which is used by the FP to sort the requested list towards this PP in the given session The FP may choose other entry fields than the ones suggested by the PP in the start session command e g name instead of first name in contact list The sorting capabilities of the FP depend on the implementation of the FP For list entry field identifiers see clause 7 4 10 5 1 If start session is confirmed the reject reason
56. clause 7 4 3 5 4 or clause 7 4 3 5 5 if the PP does not implement the Call identification feature if one of the remote parties hangs up PP FP 3 party conference established CC RELEASE COM Figure 20 3 party conference release NOTE 2 For the initiating PP sending a CC RELEASE message releases the conference For a non initiating PP sending a CC RELEASE message withdraws that non initiating PP from the conference ETSI 67 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP1 FP PP2 internal call established external or internal with call id 1 other call established external or internal 3 party conference call request CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 32 H gt gt Only ifthe PP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt CC INFO implements the Call Aea lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION feature lt Identifier value 3 party call id H gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt gt gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier lt Identifier value call id 1 H gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Updated call id gt lt Identifier value 3 party call id H gt Figure 21 Call id update for the non initiating PP 7 4 3 8 Call intrusion from PP to FP Call intrusion is a simple way to set up a 3 party conference call with an existing extern
57. en ee eee N 3 On Hook full release eae A MMM NA Dialed dats asi ee EE NS Reasterecal eee EE HH ee a aeaa o defined tone length N 7 Pause dialing Pause ep IIe N 8 Incoming call ee A MM Mi E NS Authentication ofthe PP ae N10 Authentication oftheuser _ 4161 0 N 11 Location registration a ee ee ee Location update 89 m of o Terminal Capability indication 817 o o O N 12 On air key allocation ge ait RH N 13 Identification of PP Ooo ai Smf of o N 14 Service class Oo aA Mm ofM indication assignment Terminal Capability indication S 817 O O O N 15 Alerting Oo O a MMM N 16 ZAP Ooo ai i Smf of o Terminal Capability indication 817 O O O Authentication of FT 8233 o UM UM N 17 Encryption activation FT et m ofm initiated Storing the Derived Cipher Key DCK ETSI 200 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Feature Procedure mapping Feature P fe eee eed N 18 Subscription registrationuser CT i i Obtaining access rights 4 nv i procedure on air Obtaining access rights N 19 Link control a eee ee ol ink release normal ink release maintain N 20 Terminate accessrightsFT o O OC initiated Authentication of FT CT 8233 N 21 Partial release e l a E ee Partial release O o 89 N 22 Go to DTMF infinitetone CS i i Sending keypad information 810 4 4 gt f 5 o T Q 9 e 5 o T oO Q A gt endi
58. external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt gt gt Figure 30 Line identification for a first external outgoing call using the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt method 7 4 5 3 Line identification for external incoming call 7 4 5 3 1 General line identification requirements for external incoming calls For incoming calls the Line identification feature enables the FP to notify the PP of the line on which the incoming call was received NOTE 1 The current general procedure applies to all external incoming calls first incoming call or waiting call In the case of a waiting call it applies conditionally to the implentation of the feature entitled Common multiple call procedures For incoming calls the line identifier information shall always be sent included in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element as follows For a first incoming call it shall be sent in the CC SETUP message as decribed in clause 7 4 5 3 2 For a waiting call it shall be sent in every CC INFO message used for notifying the waiting call as decribed in clause 7 4 3 5 2 7 4 5 3 2 Line identification for a first external incoming call For incoming calls the Line identification feature enables the FP to notify the PP of the line identifier of the line on which the incoming call arrived A line identifier for an incoming call shall be sent from FP to PP in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information el
59. feature implies implementation of the Common parallel call procedures external or internal feature NOTE 2 In single call mode PPs not involved in a call do not receive the call waiting indication and do not ring In multiple call mode there may be several PPs already involved in a call and all of them receive the call waiting indication idle PPs receive an incoming call request and ring ETSI 52 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Call waiting shall be indicated by the FP by sending in a CC INFO message the information element lt lt SIGNAL gt gt with the value 07H indicating call waiting tone Together with this procedure the FP shall use the CLIP on call waiting procedure of clause 7 4 3 5 10 Furthermore as a result of the Call identification feature the FP shall assign an identifier for the waiting call and send it in a lt lt CALL INFORMATIONS gt information element included in every CC INFO message used one or two regardless of whether the PP implements the Call identification feature or not If an internal call is waiting the information element lt lt Calling Party Number gt gt shall indicate a private numbering plan PP FP Ongoing call external or internal CC INFO lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line on which waiting call lt id type Line identifier subtype external call oc
60. for UTF 8 ETSI 121 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 11 4 Line settings list The following entry field identifier for line settings list are defined Table 59 Entry fields for a line settings list entry Field Field Default valueBase Normative action comment Clause identifier reset impacted 0x01 Line name MD MD Name of the line 7 4 11 4 1 0x02 Line id MD NO Line identifier 7 4 11 4 2 0x03 Attached handsets MD MD List of registered handsets which are 7 4 11 4 3 attached to the line 0x04 Dialling prefix MD MD If defined adds a prefix to called party 7 4 11 4 4 numbers for calls placed on the line 0x05 FP melody YES MD_ MD Melody of the FP linked to this line 7 4 11 4 5 0x06 FP volume YES MD_ MD Melody volume of the FP linked to this line 7 4 11 4 6 0x07 Blocked telephone MD MD Forbidden called party numbers on the line 7 4 11 4 7 number 0x08 Multiple calls mode MD MD Current mode of the line single call or 7 4 11 4 8 single multiple multiple call 0x09 Intrusion call MD MD Intrusion call YES NO 7 4 11 4 9 Ox0A Permanent CLIR YES MD Restrict number for all outgoing calls on 7 4 11 4 10 this line 0x0B Call forwarding YES MD Stores the type and number of the call 7 4 11 4 11 forwading Default value it is the value of the setting when product is manufactured MD means that a default value if any shall be provided by the manufacturer could also
61. gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION Use of line u for calling called number lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt Figure C 2 Line identification by PP using lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt ETSI 152 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NOTE 1 The PP in this diagram is also supposed to implement Line identification see CC SETUP and CC INFO for called number and Call identification see CC INFO for called number NOTE 2 As Call identification is mandatory for NG PART3 FPs the call identifier notification is represented although it is somehow independent of the Multiple lines feature The line identifier is repeated in the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt
62. gt IE used for that notification as a result of the call information completeness principle C 2 2 2 2 Line identification by PP using the lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt Use case the PP selects a line on a call by call basis using lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt IE e g the user used the keyboard to select the line instead of the dedicated MMI PP FP Network attached to line u e 1 9 CC SETUP lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 23 3u H gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt CC INFO Use of line u for calling called number lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Kevpad info called number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt Figure C 3 Line identification by PP using lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt NOTE Restriction to 0 9 interval for the line id value is in place here because lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt is used for s
63. gt gt i el E E ooo l 00010000 Discriminator Device name octet 3 First character of name octet 4 ETSI 135 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Table 63 Values used within the CLMS FIXED message k segment Information element Field within the Standard values Normative action comment AE veel internaten ereat Metinides ee eee k lt lt A gt gt CE Data section Y Oef I lt lt CLMSheader gt gt o Z o T K Datasegment k 1 lt lt DATA Fil gt gt Nawe ef fe if O aa eC ef Po Name Fi E Po Name Fie o O 7 10 1 3 3 Registration user feedback This clause applies only to FP with user signalling capability for example a display a LED or a buzzer To improve the security it is strongly recommended to support this feature both on the FP and the PP The FP and the PP shall give a feedback to the user of the registration process through a user interface The feedback given on the user interface of the PP and the FP shall be as a minimum the following status of the registration process with the following states Registration in progress state Condition of entrance the PP is looking for or is locked on a FP in subscription mode and the protocol is exchanging messages Recommended user action wait for protocol to finish Registration error state Condition of entrance some error occurred such as failed to find a peer device or to complete the access rights procedure e g auth
64. in the domain of the same cell while maintaining the service provided to the NWK layer intercell voluntary connection handover D 5 internal handover process provided and initiated by the DLC layer e g as a result of continued poor quality of service from the MAC layer whereby one set of DLC entities C plane and U plane can re route data from one MAC connection to a second new MAC connection not in the domain of the same cell while maintaining the service provided to the NWK layer encryption activation D 6 transporting the NWK layer encryption request and the cipher key to the MAC layer thereby enabling the encryption process in the MAC layer LU1 TRansparent UnProtected service TRUP class 0 min_delay D 7 transparent unprotected service introducing minimum delay between the higher layers and the MAC layer May be used for speech and non speech applications Speech transmission shall only use the class 0 min_delay operation over a single bearer MAC connection Data integrity is not guaranteed No error protection is applied and octets may be lost erroneous or duplicated The continuous higher layer data is fragmented for delivery to the Iy logical channel in the transmission direction and recombined from the Iy logical channel in the receiving direction FU1 D 8 offers a defined fixed length frame structure and buffering functions for transmission of U plane data to the MAC layer at the transmit side or accept of data fro
65. internal name of the PP number 3 in the DECT system This use case can be used just after subscription registration or later PP FP i Internal names list access start session i IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU search entries session id matching option 00H searched value 33H counter 1 list of field identi fiers Number id Name id gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU search entries confirm session id start index counter 1 gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to WU data packet last session id content part entry identifier number name for 34 entry gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to WU edit entry session id entry identifier list of field identifiers number id name id gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to WU edit entry confirm session id start index gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt WU to WU data packet last session id content part ontent part entry identifier number name for 3 entry gt gt i user updates the name field for 3 entry in internal name list il IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry session id entry identifier gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to WU data packet last session id content part 3 entry content updated gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry confirm session id entry identifier start index gt gt Internal names list access end session FP notifies PP 3 of the changing of its name using clause 7 4 10 2 Figure C 31 Li
66. internal names list terminal id number but represents the same handset numbers 7 4 11 4 4 Field Dialling Prefix See Number field in List access service feature clause 7 4 10 5 1 2 The prefix shall be added by the FP to the called party number to any external outgoing call placed on the line The length of the field shall be set to zero when the value of the field is not defined 7 4 11 4 5 Field FP melody See Associated melody field in List access service feature clause 7 4 10 5 1 12 This field defines the melody to be used to ring in the FP on an incoming call on a dedicated line 7 4 11 4 6 Field FP volume The FP volume field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier volume 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 editable X x x x x X 3 Value 4 ETSI 123 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Value shall be out of interval 30H 39H 7 4 11 4 7 Field Blocked number See Number field in List access service feature clause 7 4 10 5 1 2 except that the possible value shall be out of interval 30H 39H and 2AH value The blocked number field may be composed of either a single phone number value or a range of phone number values In this case the Number field shall be equal to a sequence of one or more digit s followed by For example 02 represents all numbers starting with 02 digit sequence When a PP attached to t
67. is defined by the FP manufacturer dependent A dedicated error code shall be used if PP tries to save new entry in a full list 7 4 10 2 List change notification When a list change notification is implemented by the FP The notification shall be sent upon change of the contents of a list i e change of an entry or addition of an entry If the list contains a line identifier the notification shall be sent to all PPs attached to line id of the modified entry and only to them If the list does not contain any line identifier the notification shall be sent to all registered PPs Notifications shall be sent by the FP by use of the generic event notification procedure For indication of list change and values used in lt lt Events notification gt gt information element consider table 29 Table 29 Values used within FACILITY message for list change indication Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt Events notification gt gt lt Event type gt List change indication lt Event sub type gt X List identifier as indicated in clause 7 4 10 3 lt Event multiplicity gt 0 127 Total number of entries in the list see note NOTE Event multiplicity can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81
68. list access session setup IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries session id start index counter list of field identifiers gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries confirm session id counter gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part 1 gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part m gt gt Figure B 13 List access read entries ETSI 146 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 B 3 5 Edit entry list access session setup i IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry session id entry identifier list of field identifiers gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry confirm session id gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part 1 gt gt IWU Info I IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part m gt gt Figure B 14 List access edit entry ETSI B 3 6 NOTE B 3 7 NOTE 147 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Save entry srs S E IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry session id entry identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part 1 gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part k gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry confirm session id start index entry identifier position index gt gt F
69. lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part m gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session session identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session confirm session identifier gt gt CC Info IE lt lt MULTI KEYPAD number digits gt gt Figure C 28 List access use case select and call number from contact list ETSI 174 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 5 5 Use case save entry with invalid format seins TT IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry session id entry identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part 1 invalid entry format gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part m invalid entry format gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU negative acknowledgement session id reject reason entry format incorrect gt gt Figure C 29 List access use case save entry with invalid format C 5 6 Use case read invalid start index i list access session setup fi IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries session id start index counter list of field identifiers gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU negative acknowledgement session id reject reasonsinvalid start index gt gt Figure C 30 List access use case read invalid start index ETSI 175 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 5 7 Use case modify a PP internal name The user edits the
70. lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt gt gt Figure C 4 Line identification by PP immediately followed by call number C 2 2 2 4 No line identification by PP FP managed line selection Use case a line is selected by the FP using the Attached handsets parameter of lines settings For example a line is selected by configuration for all outgoing calls or lines are prioritized by configuration and the first free line is used etc PP FP Network CC SETUP CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Selects u among lines attached to PP CC INFO Use of line u lt Identifier type Line identifier gt called number lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt Figure C 5 No line identification by PP FP managed line selection ETSI 154 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NOTE The sequence of messages above is also used f
71. messages and information elements required in New Generation DECT Extended Wideband Speech Services not described in TS 102 527 1 21 or in EN 300 444 12 GAP or incorporating modifications to the description given in these specifications 7 5 1 DLC services The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 5 1 shall apply 7 6 Medium Access Control MAC layer procedures This clause specifies the additional MAC layer procedures messages and information elements required in New Generation DECT Extended Wideband Speech Services not described in TS 102 527 1 21 or in EN 300 444 12 GAP or incorporating modifications to the description given in these specifications 7 6 1 MAC services The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 6 1 shall apply ETSI 127 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 6 2 Frame formats and multiplexers The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 6 2 shall apply 7 6 3 Downlink broadcast 7 6 3 1 Nr message The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 6 3 1 shall apply 7 6 3 2 Qr static system information The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 6 3 2 shall apply 7 6 3 3 Qr Fixed Part capabilities The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 6 3 3 shall apply Higher layer information The management entity in the FP supplies the MAC layer with a 16 bit SDU via the Management Entity ME SAP The content of that SDU is placed in bits lt a32 gt to lt a47 gt of th
72. methodology as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 10 It includes strong echo suppression TCLw requirements and is compatible with VoIP and long delay networks PP Audio type 2c HATS 7 kHz improved handset NG1 SC 16 Handset for 7 kHz service wideband based on HATS methodology with improved quality as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 11 It includes strong echo suppression TCLw requirements and is compatible with VoIP and long delay networks This type has a more demanding acoustic specification providing superior subjective quality In practice this means better electro acoustic components speaker microphone electronics and signal processing PP audio type 3a HATS tested 3 1 kHz handsfree NG1 SC 17 Audio specification for a Narrowband 3 1 kHz handsfree device as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 7 This type applies to handsfree devices operating with an open loudspeaker and microphone The type applies to either 1 specific PPs designed to operate in handsfree mode 2 standard handset implementing types la 1b 1c or 1d but with the option to operate in handsfree mode and 3 handsfree accessory devices connected to a handset by any wired or wireless technology It provides 300 Hz 3 4 kHz frequency range and it is defined based on HATS methodology PP audio type 3b HATS tested 3 1 kHz improved handsfree NG1 SC 18 Audio specification for a Narrowband 3 1 kHz handsfree device improved
73. o Oo GAP N 28 Encryption deactivation FT initiated ee o Oo GAP N 29 Encryption deactivation PT initiated 1 4112 o o GAP N 30 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP GAP N 31 Internal call GAP N 32 Servicecall o oo danaj o o o S F S S S S S S S S S S SI E S S FS E Q z z 8gjo z S O S S S S S E ETSI 29 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Feature supported FT calls GAP N 33 Enhanced U plane connection 41013 o oO GAP N 34 Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP 4 1 12 C301 IF DECT system PIN code setting clause 7 4 11 3 1 is implemented THEN M ELSE O NOTE 1 The PT is only required to be able to send the lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt information element containing the DECT standard 8 bit character EN 300 175 5 5 annex D codings Go to DTMF defined tone length and the FT is required to be able to understand it in the public environment NOTE 2 This feature is required to be supported in the PT to guarantee the same level of security among all the handsets that operates in a system The invocation of the feature is however optional to the operator NOTE 3 The PT is required to be able to send the lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt information element containing the DECT standard 8 bit character EN 300 175 5 5 annex D codings Dialling Pause This guarantees automatic access to secondary or alternative networks NOTE 4 This feature use
74. order to ensure traceability Furthermore the reference should as far as possible remain valid for the expected life of the document The reference shall include the method of access to the referenced document and the full network address with the same punctuation and use of upper case and lower case letters ETSI NOTE 2 1 12 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 While any hyperlinks included in this clause were valid at the time of publication ETSI cannot guarantee their long term validity Normative references The following referenced documents are indispensable for the application of the present document For dated references only the edition cited applies For non specific references the latest edition of the referenced document including any amendments applies 1 2 ETSI EN 300 175 1 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Common Interface CI Part 1 Overview ETSI EN 300 175 2 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Common Interface CI Part 2 Physical layer PHL ETSI EN 300 175 3 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Common Interface CI Part 3 Medium Access Control MAC layer ETSI EN 300 175 4 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Common Interface CI Part 4 Data Link Control DLC layer ETSI EN 300 175 5 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Common Interface CI Part 5 Network NWK layer ETSI EN
75. outgoing calls incoming accepted calls all calls lists only between handsets attached to the same line For a system implementing this procedure it shall be possible to switch back dynamically to the default behavior ETSI 125 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 After reading or searching entries the PP shall filter the entries that are related to a given line thanks to the line identifier field This way the PP has a possibility to show to the user only the calls and contacts that are related to one line including the contacts that are attached to all lines 7 4 12 Calling line identity restriction CLIR 7 4 12 1 Considerations The Calling line identity restriction feature defines procedures for CLIR as defined by 3GPP Technical specifications for Line identification supplementary services see TS 122 081 24 This procedure allows a user to enable or to disable the presentation of its calling line identification when originating a call When it is enabled the originating network notifies the destination network that the calling party number is not allowed to be presented to the called party If the called party subscribes to calling identification and the calling party has calling line identification restriction enabled the called party shall receive the presentation indicator set to presentation restricted in the lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER gt gt IE of the CC SETUP In this case the calling party s number will not be pres
76. part gt gt If entered PIN code matches FP return PIN IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry session id entry identifier list of field identifiers PIN code gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry confirm session id start index gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part entry identifier PIN code gt i New PIN code is entered twice If equal PP saves the new PIN code value IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry session id entry identifier gt gt IWU INFO IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry confirm session id entry identifier start index gt gt DECT system settings end session Figure C 39 Modifying the PIN code ETSI FP version gt gt IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part updated PIN code gt gt 183 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 7 3 Resetting the base Use case Reset all DECT system and line settings to their default value PP FP DECT system settings start session OO O Read DECT ystem settings IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries session id start index 1 counter 01H list of field identifiers FP registration mode PIN code FP version gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries confirm session id start index counter 1 gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part
77. procedures external or internal NOTE 1 Implementation of the Multiple call feature or of the Multiple line feature implies implementation of the Common parallel call procedures external or internal feature The initiation of an outgoing parallel call shall be done by sending either the internal call 17H or the register recall 15H keypad information in a lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt information element in a CC INFO message In the same or other CC INFO message s one or more further keypad information containing the decimal coded digits of an internal number resp an external number shall follow However in case there is no ambiguity i e when there are only two registered PPs switched on the number can be omitted ETSI 50 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP Ongoing call external or internal Outgoing parallel call invitation CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 15 17 H gt gt gt The FP assigns a call identifier CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION Ignored if the PP does not implement lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value assigned call id gt If the PP does NOT use FP managed line selection CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line selected by PP for the call lt id type Line identifier using the CALL INO method subtype external call external call only value u gt lt id typ
78. procedures external or internal NG1 N 7 set of common procedures for handling PSTN double calls SIP multiple calls on a single line as well as parallel call situations occurring in a multiple line DECT system Call transfer internal or external NG1 N 8 ability to create a new call while already involved in a call and connect the remote party to it kind of parallel calls 3 party conference call internal or external NG1 N 9 ability to connect the local party and the two remote parties of two parallels calls into a single conference kind of parallel calls Intrusion call NG1 N 10 ability for a PP not participating to an already established call to connect to it kind of parallel calls Intrusion call is also known as barging in Call deflection NG1 N 11 ability to redirect an incoming call during the call presentation to another user Line identification NG1 N 12 ability to exchange between the PP and FP a line identifier for external calls Call identification NG1 N 13 ability to exchange between the PP and FP a call identifier assigned by the FP at call setup Multiple lines NG1 N 14 ability for a DECT System to handle several external lines Multiple calls NG1 N 15 ability for a DECT System to handle a line supporting several simultaneous external calls List access service NG1 N 16 ability to store information on the DECT system in a set of lists on the FP and manage these lists from the PP Call
79. send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 Content of list entry is transmitted in data packets Entry identifier Bits 7654321 Meaning 0000000 not yet assigned entry identifier new entry proposed by the PP other values assigned entry identifier this entry identifier shall already exist in the list If a new entry has to be created the PP shall indicate this by using the entry identifier OOH In this case FP shall assign a new entry identifier for the entry and submit it in the following save entry confirm The new or modified entry shall be inserted in the list by the FP taking into account the sorting criteria for this list Content of list entry is transmitted in data packets ETSI 102 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 If the previously started edit procedure has to be terminated without changing the list entry PP shall perform the save entry procedure with only one empty last data packet following after save entry In case several fields of the same type in one entry were received during edit PP shall send with save all received fields of this type Fields which shall be deleted shall be sent back to FP with length 0 Possible error cases If session identifier is wrong the FP shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason invalid session number If an unknown entry identifier of the list is requested except 0 the FP shall answer with ne
80. shall be displayed by the PP EXAMPLE 1 The PP may display a list of FP names in subscription mode for selection by the user EXAMPLE 2 The PP may display only the selected FP taking into account the best RSSI indication for example The PP will then start the access rights procedure with the selected FP see clauses 7 10 2 or 7 10 5 The name shall be displayed by the PP with the result of the complete registration procedure The FP shall transmit its name information frequently during the subscription mode i e during timer F lt AP 01 gt At least the first segment of the FP name shall be transmitted within one period of F lt AP 03 gt after the FP capabilities information transmission in order to receive it very quickly on PP side NOTE 1 When there are several FP of same type in range in subscription mode this can be confusing Therefore it is recommended to set a unique name by default For a DECT phone the name could be composed of the phone model reference with the two last bytes of RFPI and indicated with a sticker on the FP For a DECT FP integrated within a gateway PBX the name could be composed of the gateway PBX model reference with additional unique identifier NOTE 2 The PP should take into account the FPs not supporting the base name broadcasting e g GAP or NG DECT part 1 base stations In that case the PP may display a message like Unknown or the RFPI NOTE 3 With this procedure the overall process to sele
81. shall correspond to the decimal representation of the terminal identity numbers coded in IA5 For example For terminal 1 terminal identity number is 0000 0001B coded value is 31H For terminal 14 terminal identity number is 0000 1110B coded value is 31H 34H 7 4 10 5 1 3 Field Name Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3J 2 1 Octet Field identifier Name 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 editable x xX X x x xX 3 1 character byte 4 2 character byte Characters shall be coded as defined for UTF 8 NOTE _ If FP supports contact list it is recommended to use the name from the contact list if available For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x the value is reserved for future use 7 4 10 5 1 4 Field Date and time Bits Octet 1 2 xX x x 3 Content as specified for IE lt lt Time DATE gt gt octet 3 4 Content as specified for IE lt lt Time DATE gt gt octet 4 5 For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x the value is reserved for future use Octets 4 and following are coded as specified for octets 3 and following in IE lt lt Time Date gt gt EN 300 175 5 5 Only interpretation 000000 current time date is allowed Any coding is allowed time or date or time amp date In case of multiple calls it is recommended that date and time indicate the la
82. shall not be evaluated Even if the default sorting is required by the PP in the Start session command using 0 as value for lt Number of sorting fields gt the FP shall confirm the sorting fields which were actually used for sorting the list and which shall be the ones defined as default sorting fields in clause 7 4 10 4 1 1 Possible error cases If start session is rejected the session identifier shall be set to 0 and the field reject reason shall indicate the appropriate reason If a sorting field identifier is not valid the submitted sorting field identifier shall be ignored by the FP Nevertheless the FP indicates the chosen sorting field identifiers in the start session confirm ETSI 97 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Start session reject reason Bits 87654321 Meaning 00000000 not enough resources 00000001 list already in use by another session 00000010 list not supported all other values reserved 7 4 10 4 1 3 End session command This command from PP or FP ends the specified session Table 32 Values used within IWU to IWU information element to request the end of a list change session Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt lt Length of content gt Length of content lt Protocol Discriminator gt lt Command end session gt Tis access command lt Session identifier gt 1 127 Sess
83. system Terminal identity number assignment C801 IF feature GAP N 9 OR GAP N 10 OR GAP N 12 OR GAP N 26 THEN M ELSE N Subscription control M O M M M A 6 14 General requirements 6 14 1 Network NWk layer message contents The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 6 14 1 shall apply 6 14 2 Transaction identifier The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 6 14 2 shall apply 6 14 3 Length of a Network NWk layer message The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 6 14 3 shall apply 6 14 4 Handling of error and exception conditions The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 6 14 4 shall apply 6 14 5 Generic Access Profile GAP default setup attributes The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 6 14 5 shall apply ETSI 41 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 6 14 6 Coexistence of Mobility Management MM and Call Control CC procedures The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 6 14 6 shall apply 6 14 7 Coding rules for information elements The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 6 14 7 shall apply 7 Procedure description The following clauses define the process mandatory procedures which are in the scope of the New Generation DECT wideband speech Each procedure if appropriate is divided into three parts a normal i e successful case s This part defines the functions and respective protocol element values in normal operation b associate
84. used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 Counter returns the number of returned list entries Start index shall always indicate the smallest index value of the list response Content of list entry is transmitted in data packets 7 4 10 4 4 Edit entry 7 4 10 4 4 1 Edit entry command This command from PP requests to read and lock only one entry Table 38 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Edit entry command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt lt Length of content gt lt Protocol Discriminator gt lt Command edit entry gt lt Session identifier gt lt Entry identifier gt 1 127 Entry identifier see note lt List entry field identifier 1 gt 0 255 Requested field element type E eee lt List entry field identifier n gt 0 255 Requested field element type NOTE _ Session identifier and entry identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 Whether a field element is editable or not is indicated in the response message In contrast to read entries the list access command edit entry offers the reference to a
85. 01 0x80 Reject of end session request shall not be possible 7 4 10 4 2 Query supported entry fields 7 4 10 4 2 1 Query supported entry fields command This command from PP queries the fields which are supported or not in the entries of a given list in the FP ETSI 98 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Table 34 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for the Query supported entry fields command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWUs gt lt Length of content gt Length of content lt Protocol Discriminator gt entry fields gt NOTE _ Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 Possible error cases If session identifier is wrong the FP shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason invalid session number 7 4 10 4 2 2 Query supported entry fields confirm command This command from FP confirms the query of supported fields which are supported or not in the entries of a given list in the FP The FP submits the supported entry field identifier and shall group them in editable and non editable fields Table 35 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for the Query suppor
86. 1 for synchronizing all PPs with the DECT system date and time The PP should support and the FP shall support the PT initiated Date and Time synchronization procedure of clause 7 4 2 2 If used by the PP the FP should not use clause 7 4 2 1 at the same time with the same PP especially when using the date and time from the network The present procedure clause 7 4 2 shall be consistent with the Clock master setting see clause 7 4 11 3 2 of the DECT system settings list clause 7 4 11 3 if implemented List access service feature NG1 N 16 When the setting is implemented If the Clock master field is equal to FP PPs shall not use the PT initiated Date and Time synchronization procedure The FP may set the DECT system date and time as received from the network e g received upon network incoming call or through NTP or from a dedicated interface e g local or web interface If the Clock master field is equal to PP a PP shall be able to define the DECT system date and time on the FP using procedure PT initiated Date and Time synchronization of clause 7 4 2 2 The FP shall ignore any date and time received by any other means e g received from the network In both cases the FP shall use procedure FT initiated Date and Time synchronization of clause 7 4 2 1 to update the date and time of all other registered handsets 7 4 2 1 FT initiated Date and Time synchronization The present procedure shall be used
87. 1 A 1 N A NG1 A 2 N A NG1 A 3 l GAP A 1 M GAP A 2 l N A GAP A 3 N A GAP A 4 N A C801 IF feature GAP N 9 OR GAP N 10 OR GAP N 12 OR GAP N 26 THEN M ELSE N A ETSI 33 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 6 10 Network NWk feature to procedure mapping The NWK features to procedure mapping of EN 300 444 12 GAP clause 6 7 with the following changes and additional features shall apply Table 9 NWK feature to procedure mapping Feature Procedure mapping Feature Procedure NG1 N 1 Codec Negotiation Reference 5 2 21 7 31 21 Exchange of codec list during registration and location registration Basic service wideband speech and default attributes Codec Negotiation during call establishment 7 3 2 21 7 3 3 21 5 2 21 7 3 4 21 M 7 3 5 21 M 7 6 5 21 7 6 6 21 5 2 7 4 1 1 M 741 2 M 5 2 7 4 1 1 M 7 413 M 5 2 arallel call common requirements 7 4 3 1 M ontrol messages 7432 M ending Keypad information 8 10 12 M odec change for parallel calls 7 4 3 3 M ending negative acknowledgement 7 4 3 4 M usy system or line notification 7 48 3 M NG1 N 7 Common parallel call 52 M procedures external or internal Outgoing parallel call initiation external eer or internal Call waiting indication external or en eee internal all toggle external or internal 7 4 3 5 3 M all release and call release reject
88. 1219 1o o AJZ s O Djojo oud al eS o OICIE S a oj Jola SI llo lala Z lo a NG1 SC 29 FP Audio type 5 VoIP 5 6 21 wideband 5 6 21 5 6 21 supressor for FP wideband NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal 5 6 21 call NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal 5 6 21 conference NG1 SC 34 Adaptive volume control 5 6 21 92 20 aw L2H 2O n w oo Zz 10 Zu 20 ine S ay q gt O gt O Z o n O 2 Zz O n O Po A v v oO O g e M M M M M N A N A N A N A N A C708 C708 C709 C709 M a ee ING1 P 1 2 level GFSK modulation NG1 P 3 Physical Packet P32 G1 S Implementation Alternative C201 Advanced connections for Service NG1 1 shall only be used in the case of multiple connections between the same PT FT pair The support of this case is optional C702 At least one should be provided NG1 SC 11 type 1b is only allowed temporarely see note 1 C703 At least one should be provided NG1 SC 14 type 2a is only allowed temporarely see note 2 C706 At least one should be provided C707 IF feature NG1 SC 23 FP type 1b OR NG1 SC 27 FP type 3 THEN O ELSE I Either NG1 SC 24 or NG1 SC 25 may be provided but not both at the same time C708 At least one should be provided C709 IF feature NG1 SC 28 FP type 4 OR NG1 SC 29 FP type 5 THEN O ELSE I Either NG1 SC 30 or NG1 SC 31 may be provided but not both at the same time Feature NG1 SC 11 t
89. 15 Multiple calls 5 2 List access service sd z 5 NG1 N 16 List access service 5 2 NG1 N 17 52 O GAP N 1 Outgoing cal et oi i GAP N 2 Offhook tt Mi i i GAP N 3 On hook full release 4 1 12 M GAP N 4 Dialled digits basic 4 1 12 M GAP N 5 Registerrecall seenotes4and5 412 m GAP N 6 Go to DTMF signalling defined tone length see note 1 4 1 12 M GAP N 7_ Pause dialling pause see note 3 41023 M GAP N 8 Incomingcall ETM GAP N 9 AuthenticationofPP Tet m GAP N10 Authentication of user see note 2 4 112 M GAP N 11 Location registration Ett Mm GAP N 12 On air key allocation see note 2 412 M GAP N 13 IdentificationofPP_ Et Mi i GAP N 14 Service class indication assignment_ 4 12 mMm GAP N 15 Alerting 4 1 12 M GAP N 16 ZAP see note 2 4 1 12 M GAP N 17 Encryption activation FTinitiated 412 Mm GAP N 18 Subscription registration procedure on air 4 112 m m GAP N 19 Link control 4 112 M M GAP N 20 Terminate access rights FT initiated see note 2 4103 M O GAP N 21 Partial release CE tT o f O GAP N 22 Go to DTMF infinite tone length tt o o GAP N 23 Go to Pulse 41 12 o oO GAP N 24 Signalling of display characters 4103 o Oo GAP N 25 Display control characters 4113 o o GAP N 26 Authentication of FT 413 o o GAP N 27 Encryption activation PT initiated 4103
90. 192 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP audio type 1b improved GAP handset NG1 SC 11 Audio specification for a general purpose 3 1 kHz telephony handset with improved TCLw as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 4 It is compatible with VoIP and long delay networks PP audio type 1c HATS tested 3 1 kHz handset NG1 SC 12 Audio specification for a general purpose 3 1 kHz telephony handset based on the new HATS methodology as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 5 It includes strong echo suppression TCLw requirements and is compatible with VoIP and long delay networks PP audio type 1d HATS tested 3 1 kHz improved handset NG1 SC 13 Audio specification for a general purpose 3 1 kHz telephony handset based on the new HATS methodology with improved quality as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 6 It includes strong echo suppression TCLw requirements and is compatible with VoIP and long delay networks This type has a more demanding acoustic specification providing superior subjective quality In practice this means better electro acoustic components speaker microphone electronics and signal processing PP Audio type 2a ITU T P 311 7 kHz handset NG1 SC 14 Audio specification for a wideband 7 kHz service handset based on the ITU T Recommendation P 311 1 5 as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 9 PP Audio type 2b HATS 7 kHz handset NG1 SC 15 Handset for 7 kHz service wideband based on HATS
91. 1a classic 5 6 21 N A N A GAP handset NG1 SC 11 PP Audio type 1b 5 6 21 C702 N A improved GAP handset note 1 A NG1 SC 12 PP Audio type 1c HATS 5 6 21 C702 N 3 1 kHz handset NG1 SC 13 PP Audio type 1d HATS ee E aes haa 3 1 kHz improved handset NG1 SC 17 PP Audio type 3a HATS fearon See eee eee 3 1 kHz handsfree NG1 SC 18 PP Audio type 3b HATS een dere ee 3 1 KHz improved handsfree NG1 SC 23 FP Audio type 1b new 5 6 21 N A ISDN 3 1 kHz N N N A N N A N N A N C706 C7 NG1 SC 24 PP echo canceller for FP 5 6 21 N A C707 C7 narrowband NG1 SC 25 PP echo supressor for FP 5 6 21 N A C707 C7 narrowband NG1 SC 26 FP Audio type 2 analog 5 6 21 N A C706 C7 PSTN 3 1 kHz NG1 SC 27 FP Audio type 3 VoIP 5 6 21 N A C706 C7 3 1 kHz NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal 5 6 21 KARAKA call O O NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal 5 6 21 N A conference NG1 SC 34 Adaptive volume control for 5 6 21 N A FP A A A A A 06 07 07 06 06 M O O ETSI 21 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NG1 2 Narrow band PCM G 711 64 kbit s voice service FT DE eID os 1a CT feature service Reference RB P MJ O o ET Service DECT Feature mapping Status PT oO O NG1 P 1 2 level GFSK modulation 5 5 21 NG1 P 4 Physical Packet P67 5 5 21 NG1 M 3 Ipq_error_detection symmetric 5 4 21 M M MAC service type NG1 M 4 Advanced C
92. 2 ETSI TBR 006 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT General terminal attachment requirements i 3 ETSI TBR 010 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT General terminal attachment requirements Telephony applications i 4 ETSI TS 102 527 2 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT New Generation DECT Part 2 Support of transparent IP packet data i 5 ITU T Recommendation P 311 06 2005 Transmission characteristics for wideband 150 7000 Hz digital handset telephones 1 6 ITU T Recommendation G 729 Coding of speech at 8 kbit s using conjugate structure algebraic code excited linear prediction CS ACELP 3 Definitions symbols and abbreviations 3 1 Definitions For the purposes of the present document the terms and definitions given in EN 300 444 12 and the following apply CALL INFORMATION completeness principle independently of the line identification requirements themselves a party PP or FP that implements both the Line identification feature and the Call identification feature shall when it must send a call identifier for an external call also send the identifier of the line used for this external call together with the call identifier in the same lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element NOTE This only applies if the line identifier is available at the time of sending FP managed line selection mode for an outgoing external call in whic
93. 3 All call list entry Melds sissie es arino eree a a eE E inci ERAS RE VIERE EE PAE SEKURE TERTS 113 Contact list entry fields snena oure eE S E E EAE r esto de diamante 114 Internal names list entry fields piecsicinnneiiicoreni enini i i a a 114 DECT system settings list entry fields 0 eee eee eeceesceseceseceseceaecaecsaecaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeeeeneeeeaes 114 Line settings list entry fields 5 cissceestessiacesteceucavensoeesscvensepeteceouaceestseeceeusssasenensuysevennenduegonsbays 114 Generic sequence charts for list ACCESS ee eee esecsseeseceseceseceeecaeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeessesseessecsaecsaecsaecnaeeas 114 Use case examples for list aCCeSS 0 eee eee eeceesceseeescesecesecseceaecsaecaeecaeseaeseaeeeeeeseeseeseceaecsaeeaereas 114 DECT systemi and lime Settings cosis sctbescnsceecuesuedeuscvivte spessebvesescveecneuenbeasensubecnysevulevssovenenaeenoeessdsenedves 114 DECT system and line settings considerations 20 0 0 cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeecesecsecsecsaecnaecseecaeeeaeseeeeeeeens 114 Interactions between registration attachments of handsets and lists 0 0 0 eeee esse cseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 116 ETSI 6 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 11 3 DECT systemisettings istenien era a A E Mas BRAS a 116 7 4 11 3 1 Field PIN code tsi os Stilt E RE ES Ae elon Al eerie Se oe 117 7 4 11 3 2 Field Clock master lt 255 Sines els spies ee ai eel tp et Seed ton ieee oe A peed 117 7 4 11 3 3 Field Base reset st aie telat int
94. 300 175 6 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Common Interface CI Part 6 Identities and addressing ETSI EN 300 175 7 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Common Interface CI Part 7 Security features ETSI EN 300 175 8 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Common Interface CI Part 8 Speech and audio coding and transmission Void ETSI EN 300 176 2 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Test specification Part 2 Speech ETSI EN 301 406 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Harmonized EN for Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT covering essential requirements under article 3 2 of the R amp TTE Directive Generic radio ETSI EN 300 444 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Generic Access Profile GAP ISO IEC 9646 6 Information technology Open Systems Interconnection Conformance testing methodology and framework Part 6 Protocol profile test specification ISO IEC 9646 7 Information technology Open Systems Interconnection Conformance testing methodology and framework Part 7 Implementation Conformance Statements ITU T Recommendation G 726 12 1990 40 32 24 16 kbit s Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM ITU T Recommendation G 711 11 1988 Pulse code modulation PCM of voice frequencies ITU T Recommendation G 722 11 1988 7 kHz audio coding within
95. 4 10 4 1 7 4 10 4 2 O 7 4 10 4 3 7 4 10 4 4 O 74 10 45 O 7 4 10 4 6 O 7 4 10 4 7 O 7 4 10 4 8 O 7 4 10 4 9 7 4 10 4 1 7 4 11 1 7 4 11 2 7 4 10 5 1 7 4 10 5 2 O 7 4 10 5 3 7 4 10 5 4 O 7 4 10 55 O 7 4 10 5 6 O 7 4 10 5 7 O 7 4 10 5 8 7 4 11 3 7 4 11 4 7 4 11 5 C 7 4 1131 O 7 4 11 3 2 7 4 11 3 3 7 4 11 3 4 O 7 4 1135 O 7 4 11 3 6 O 7 4 11 37 O 7 4 11 38 O 7 4 11 3 9 7 4 11 3 10 O 7 4 11 311 O 7 4 11 4 1 7 4 11 4 2 7 4 11 4 3 7 4 11 44 O 7 4 1145 O 7 4 11 46 O 7 4 11 47 O 7 4 11 4 8 7 4 1149 O 7 4 11 4 10 C904 7 4 1141 o o 52 Ere ae 7 4 12 1 7 4 12 2 Oo QO N Q oo Temporary CLIR mode call by call M M 7 4 12 3 M N A ETSI 36 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Feature Procedure mapping as a F r P GAP N 11 Location registration O Z O Z y y danaj M o M Location registration 8233 M M M_ Location update ezpa m of O Terminal Capability indication 7 4 91 M M M GAP N 14 Service class OOo yy aal oo mM indication assignment Obtaining access rights 8sopga m M M Authentication of PT 8e2z4nj m M M_ GAP N 16 ZAP OOo yy daal M o f o Obtaining access rights 8sopa m M M Terminal Capability indication 7 4 91 M Mm M GAP N 18 Subscription ee a registration user procedure on air Obtaining access rights _ _ 8
96. 5 8 8 clause 7 3 4 FP audio type 3 VoIP 3 1 kHz SC 13 Audio specification for a DECT FP supporting narrowband service and providing a VoIP interface with codecs G 711 typically or G 726 on top of it As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 5 FP audio type 5a internal call SC 14 This type of audio specification applies to the case of internal call inside a DECT FP or a DECT system without any external interface This type applies to any service As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 8 FP audio type 5b internal conference SC 15 This type of audio specification applies to the case of 3 party or multi party conference inside a DECT FP or a DECT system with or without an external interface Applies to any service As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 9 ETSI 197 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Adaptive volume control for FP SC 16 Accesory feature for FPs consisting on an adaptive volume control depending on the level of environmental noise at the PP The gain variation shall be symmetrical As described in EN 300 175 8 8 detailed descriptions for each type of FP in clause 7 6 and examples of settings in annex D D 2 3 GAP Application features clause 4 3 of EN 300 444 AC to bitstring mapping A 1 Mapping of the AC into a bitstring multiple subscription registration A 2 Ability of PP to store more than one subscription manual entry of the Portable Access Rights Key PARK A 3 Ability
97. 6 7 4 11 4 3 Field Attached handsets The Attached handsets field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet 0 Field identifier Attached handsets 1 Length L 2 0 1 Editable x X x x X X 3 0 1 Number of registered handsets attached to the line 4 0 1 Handset bitmap 5 0 1 a 0 1 Handset bitmap continued 5n Number of registered handsets attached to the line octet 4 The number of handsets relates to the number of handsets attached to the line The value shall be coded with the natural binary value with the least significant bit in bit position 1 Allowable values are 1 to 255 Handset bitmap octet group 5 This is a bitmap octet group with the handset number in bit position 1 A 1 indicates handset is attached to the line and a 0 indicates it is not Handset bitmap octet 5n Bits 7654321 Meaning XXXXxxl Handset number 1 is attached XXXxxI1x Handset number 2 is attached XxXxxI1xx Handset number 3 is attached Xxx1xxx Handset number 4 is attached xx1xxxx Handset number 5 is attached x1xxxxx Handset number 6 is attached 1xxxxxx Handset number 7 is attached NOTE 1 If the extension bit is 0 in the first octet indicating presence of an additional octet the least significant bit of second octet stands for handset number 8 NOTE 2 The format of the current field is a bit mask it is different from the format of the number field of the
98. 6 21 a bald i e S DECT feature service NG1 P 1 2 level GFSK modulation NG1 P 3 Physical Packet P64 NG1 M 2 In_normal_delay symmetric MAC service type NG1 M 4 Advanced Connections NG1 D 2 DLC Service LU1 Class 0 M M M M 6z wo ine NG1 SC 5 MPEG4 AAC LD 64 kbit s 14 kHz superwideband codec NG1 SC 9 Codec selection and Zz 0 a w T O D 3 D aa 5 6 21 Superwideband 14 KHz handset z Zjv Ole OE 10 ole Bis pla ple N ool Uv U U U gt gt Cc Cc ajeg O a zi te xo xo oO oO oi o ion w N A N A Superwideband 14 KHz handsfree NG1 SC 28 FP Audio type 4 ISDN wideband NG1 SC 29 FP Audio type 5 VoIP wideband NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal call NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal NG1 SC 34 Adaptive volume control for 5 6 21 N A C C 5 6 21 5 1 21 5 5 21 5 5 21 5 4 21 5 3 21 5 3 21 5 6 21 5 6 21 M Q oO oO Q oO NG1 P 1 2 level GFSK modulation NG1 P 3 Physical Packet P67 NG1 M 3 Ipq_error_detection symmetric M NG1 M 4 Advanced Connections NG1 D 2 DLC service LU1 Class 0 NG1 SC 5 MPEG4 AAC LD 64 kbit s 14 kHz superwideband codec M M M M M M M NG1 SC 9 Codec selection and M n a 5 amp M M M Oo M M_ M M_ M NG1 SC 21 PP Audio type 5a M Superwideband 14 KHz handset NG1 SC 22 PP Audio type 5b Superwideband 14 KHz hand
99. 64 kbit s ITU T Recommendation G 729 1 05 2006 G 729 based Embedded Variable bit rate coder An 8 32 kbit s scalable wideband coder bitstream interoperable with G 729 ISO IEC JTC1 SC29 WG11 MPEG International Standard ISO TEC 14496 3 2005 AMD 1 2007 Coding of audio visual objects Part 3 Audio AMENDMENT 1 Low Delay AAC profile ETSI 13 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 20 ISO IEC JTC1 SC29 WG11 MPEG International Standard ISO IEC 14496 3 2005 Information Technology Coding of audio visual objects Part 3 Audio 21 ETSI TS 102 527 1 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT New Generation DECT Part 1 Wideband Speech 22 ETSI TS 122 072 Digital cellular telecommunications system Phase 2 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System UMTS Call Deflection CD Stage 1 23 Void 24 ETSI TS 122 081 Digital cellular telecommunications system Phase 2 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System UMTS Line Identification supplementary services Stage 1 2 2 Informative references The following referenced documents are not essential to the use of the present document but they assist the user with regard to a particular subject area For non specific references the latest version of the referenced document including any amendments applies i 1 ETSI TR 101 178 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT A high Level Guide to the DECT Standardization i
100. 8 06 The present document implements also a further enhancement in acoustic performance for 3 1 kHz narrowband service compared to GAP EN 300 444 12 and TS 102 527 1 21 The more demanding audio specifications for PP types Ic and 1d see EN 300 175 8 8 shall be mandatory after a transition time With this extra requirement the acoustic performance of PPs compliant with the present document when operating in 3 1 kHz narrowband service will be even better than classic DECT GAP specification 4 2 Wideband speech scenarios See TS 102 527 1 21 clause 4 2 4 3 Extended wideband speech services defined in the present document The following additional services are provided by the present document compared to TS 102 527 1 21 More demanding audio specifications for both wideband and narrowband see clause 4 1 2 New simplified easy pairing procedures New no emision mode in FPs switching down the dummy bearer when in idle mode Date and time synchronization CLIP and CNIP are now mandatory features Internal call and wideband Internal call mandatory features e CLIP and CNIP for Internal calls mandatory features Generic Event notification mechanism providing support for Message waiting indication Missed call notification List access service Handling of multiple calls between the same PP and the RFP CLIP and CNIP on call waiting CLIP and CNIP on call transfer Cal
101. A NG1 SC 16 PP Audio profile type 2c HATS 7 kHz improved handset N A N A NG1 SC 17 PP Audio profile type 3a HATS 3 1 kHz handsfree 5 6 21 O N A NA NG1 SC 18 PP Audio profile type 3b HATS 3 1 kHz improved handsfree 5 6 21 O N A N A NG1 SC 19 PP Audio profile type 4a HATS 7 kHz handsfree 5 6 21 O NA N A NG1 SC 20 PP Audio profile type 4b HATS 7 kHz improved handsfree 5 6 21 O N A N A NG1 SC 2 N A N A NG1 SC 22 PP Audio profile type 5b superwideband 14 kHz handsfree N A N A NG1 SC 23 FP Audio type 1b new ISDN 3 1 kHz C706 C706 NG1 SC 24 C707 C707 NG1 SC 2 C707 C707 NG1 SC 2 C706 C706 NG1 SC 27 FP Audio type 3 VoIP 3 1 kHz C706 C706 NG1 SC 28 FP Audio type 4 ISDN wideband C708 C708 NG1 SC 29 FP Audio type 5 VoIP wideband 5 6 NG1 SC 3 5 6 NG1 SC 3 5 6 NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal call 5 6 NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal conference 5 6 ING1 SC 34 Adaptive volume controlforFP_ NA o o C701 Status defined by clause 6 3 table 2 At least one should be provided NG1 SC 11 type 1b is only allowed temporarely see note 1 At least one should be provided NG1 SC 14 type 2a is only allowed temporarely see note 2 IF Service NG1 5 Superwideband THEN M ELSE I IF Service NG1 5 Superwideband THEN O ELSE I At least one should be provided IF feature NG1 SC 23 FP type 1b OR NG1 SC 27 FP type 3 THEN O ELSE I Either NG1 SC 24 or NG1 SC 25 may be provided
102. ACILITY optional depending on list lt lt EVENTS NOTIFICATION List change notification gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line Id gt gt Figure B 15 List access save entry Alternatively the FACILITY message might be sent after terminating the list access session Delete entry i list access session setup i IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU delete entry session id entry identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU delete entry confirm session id total number gt gt Figure B 16 List access delete entry The list has changed once this procedure has been performed PP should read list again starting from index of the first entry which was deleted ETSI 148 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 B 3 8 Delete list fi list access session setup IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU delete list session id gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU delete list confirm session id gt gt Figure B 17 List access delete list B 3 9 Search entries i list access session setup i IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU search entries session id searched value counter list of field identifiers gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU search entries confirm session id start index counter gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part 1 gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part m gt g
103. E EEEE O E E EEEE 146 B 3 6 DAV EI CDR ERTA O E EEE E E ETE ATE EEA E E EEEE 147 B 3 7 Delete entry onpa e a e na a a a e 147 B 3 8 IBI T AET E e AEE EE EEEE E A EEE EEE EEE EATE Ake 148 B 3 9 STEA LA a T AEA DEONET EEEE TAE EEA EEEE EET E AEA event dein EE TT 148 Annex C informative Recommended implementation of procedures s sesssesosssossessossosssssossse 149 Ck Generaly ete aes ee nk ee ea ETE ce ia ee S RE eee 149 C2 sMultipledimes diagrams 22 3 tcescescte chads ies vase elect Gesu eee de capte se e e a cea te a a E Doan leeetunteseeea Selden a eed 149 C 2 1 Attaching a new PP to one or Several lines 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesecseceaecsaecseecseecseseaeseeeeeeeeeeasensesesaesaeeeas 149 C 2 2 Outgomefirst Call ona WME sresruk eo secon subdb teed cssneusins gulch de duedoesescbsvaes 151 C 2 2 1 PP attached to 1 li sen iea e Aeti cecil dais ove Ghat ie eth a a e Enoe E E ik a as bees 151 C 2 2 1 1 Line identification by Mono line PP oo ele eee eeeeeeeceesceeecesecesecsaecsaecsaecseecaaeeseseaeeseeeeseeeseesaeenaes 151 C 2 2 1 2 No line identification by mono line PP not relevant eee eeceeceseceseceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesees 151 C 2 2 2 PP attached to several HNES is hecessss eeaeee onio tots oe ioan a koeee Ea o oE KEKE kE KEES EER ea 151 C 2 2 2 1 Line identification by PP using lt lt CALL INFORMATIONS gt ccccescseseceseeeceseeeeesecaeeseeeeeeesaees 151 C2222 Line identification by PP using the lt lt M
104. ECT part 1 Medium Access Control MAC services clause 5 4 of TS 102 527 1 In minimum delay symmetric MAC service type NG1 M 1 Ix_minimum delay symmetric connection as defined in EN 300 175 3 3 clause 5 6 2 1 Iy_normal delay symmetric MAC service type NG1 M 2 Ix_normal delay symmetric connection as defined in EN 300 175 3 3 clause 5 6 2 1 Ipg_error_detection symmetric MAC service type NG1 M 3 Ipg_ error_detection symmetric connection as defined in EN 300 175 3 3 clause 5 6 2 1 type 3 Ip_ error_detection with single subfield protected B field as defined in EN 300 175 3 3 clause 6 2 1 3 4 Advanced Connections NG1 M 4 MAC Connection Oriented service providing connection between FT and PT Advanced connections are able to support multiple bearers bearers different of the full slot and any MAC service The service includes the means for setting up and releasing the required bearer s D 1 5 New Generation DECT part 1 Physical Layer PHL services clause 5 5 of TS 102 527 1 2 level GFSK modulation NG1 P 1 2 level Gaussian frequency Shift Key GFSK modulation as defined by EN 300 175 2 2 clause 5 Physical Packet P32 NG1 P 2 physical packet P32 full slot as defined by EN 300 175 2 2 clause 4 4 2 Physical Packet P64 NG1 P 3 variable capacity Physical packet POO as defined by EN 300 175 2 2 clause 4 4 3 with j 640 Physical Packet P67 NG1 P 4 variable capacity Physical packet POO
105. ETSI TS 102 52 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Technical Specification Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT New Generation DECT Part 3 Extended wideband speech services CD 2 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Reference DTS DECT NG0246 3 Keywords 7 kHz audio codec DECT GAP IMT 2000 interoperability IP profile radio speech ETSI 650 Route des Lucioles F 06921 Sophia Antipolis Cedex FRANCE Tel 33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax 33 4 93 65 47 16 Siret N 348 623 562 00017 NAF 742 C Association a but non lucratif enregistr e a la Sous Pr fecture de Grasse 06 N 7803 88 Important notice Individual copies of the present document can be downloaded from http www etsi org The present document may be made available in more than one electronic version or in print In any case of existing or perceived difference in contents between such versions the reference version is the Portable Document Format PDF In case of dispute the reference shall be the printing on ETSI printers of the PDF version kept on a specific network drive within ETSI Secretariat Users of the present document should be aware that the document may be subject to revision or change of status Information on the current status of this and other ETSI documents is available at http portal etsi org tb status status asp If you find errors in the present document please send your comment to one of the following services http portal
106. Event multiplicity 1 gt 22 CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Relating to line identifier lt Identifier value u gt gt gt Figure C 12 Voice message waiting indication on a specific line C 3 Multiple calls diagrams C 3 1 First incoming call on the line or system Use case the PP is attached to a multi call line An incoming call is presented to the line PP attached to multiple call line u FP Network Incoming call from calling number CC SETUP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt Figure C 13 First incoming call on the line or system NOTE Although somehow independent of the Call identification feature the line identifier notification is also represented as Line identification is mandatory for Part 3 FPs C 3 2 Second incoming call on the line or system Use case the PPs are attached to a multi call line A call is on going from PP1 which implements the Call identification feature An incoming call is presented to the line For conciseness of the diagram line identification is not represented which corresponds to the case of an internal waiting
107. FP LOCATE REQUEST LOCATE ACCEPT FACILITY lt lt Time Date gt gt inne Figure B 8 Date time synchronization when the PP is switched on B 2 4 Date time synchronization using call connection Use case FP has wanted to send a time and date synchronization when PP was not in range PP sends a CC SETUP use the call connection FP CC SETUP a gt CC CONNECT 1 rrov FACILITY lt lt Time Date gt gt inne i Figure B 9 Date time synchronization using call connection NOTE The line identifier is not represented here Note that it is anyway only relevant if the synchronization is done in the context of an external call B 3 List access service basic sequence diagrams For clarity of the following flowcharts lt lt Call information gt gt IE including call identifiers and line identifiers does not appear in some of the CC messages that must convey it Please note that they should not be omitted when implementing equivalent cases ETSI 143 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 B 3 1 Start end session when PP is in idle mode i Direct PT initiated link establishment CC SETUP IE lt lt Basic Service lt Call Class Normal call setup gt gt gt CC CALL PROC IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session list identifier sorting field identifiers gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session confirm session identifier Total number sorting field identifiers gt gt
108. FP Audio type 5 VoIP wideband NG1 SC 29 Audio specification for a DECT FP supporting wideband service and providing a VoIP interface with a wideband codec on top such as G 722 MPEG etc As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 8 PP echo canceller for FP wideband 7 kHz service NG1 SC 30 Auxiliary feature for FPs consisting on echo canceller for handling the echo generated by PPs type 2a As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 4 2 Only wideband echo cancellation capability is required for this feature PP echo supressor for FP wideband 7 kHz service NG1 SC 31 Auxiliary feature for FPs consisting on echo supressor for handling the echo generated by PPs type 2a As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 4 3 Only wideband echo cancelation capability is required for this feature FP audio type 6a internal call NG1 SC 32 This type of audio specification applies to the case of internal call inside a DECT FP or a DECT system without any external interface This type applies to any service As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 8 ETSI 194 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 FP audio type 6b internal conference NG1 SC 33 This type of audio specification applies to the case of 3 party or multi party conference inside a DECT FP or a DECT system with or without an external interface Applies to any service As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 9 Adaptive volume control for FP NG1 SC 34 Accessory feature for F
109. FP shall set bit agg of the Extended higher layer capabilities part 2 see EN 300 175 5 5 clause F 3 ETSI 126 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 12 3 Temporary CLIR mode call by call This procedure allows a user to disable the presentation of its calling line identification at the time of the call request If the user requests a temporary CLIR mode when originating a call the PP shall insert before the telephone number in the lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt IE the CLIR invocation temporary digits sequence PP1 Temporary CLIR FP Network invocation on line u if CC SETUP is used CC SETUP lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info CLIR invocation gt gt if CC INFO is used CC SETUP CC INFO lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info CLIR invocation gt gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt Use of line u for calling CLIR invocation called number Figure 42 Temporary CLIR mode invocation A temporary CLIR request shall override a permanent deactivated CLIR mode NOTE 1 It should be noted that the temporary mode can also be provisioned directly by the user by dialling the CLIR temporary digits sequence NOTE 2 As the network temporary CLIR invocation digits sequence is network dependent the sequence should be configurable on PP side 7 5 Data Link Control DLC layer procedures This clause specifies the additional DLC layer procedures
110. GHTS REQUEST lt lt Codec List G 722 G 726 gt gt ACCESS_RIGHTS_ACCEPT lt lt Codec List G 722 G 726 gt gt LOCATE REQUES LOCATE ACCEPT lt lt Codec List G 722 G 726 gt gt Initiate an internal call CC SETUP lt lt Basic Service 98 gt gt LCE_REQUEST PAGE long CC CALL PROC CC SETUP lt lt Basic Service 98 gt gt CC CONNECT CC CONNECT ACK CC CONNECT lt lt Codec List G 722 gt gt Figure 24 Internal call with no codec list at call setup Figure 25 shows example 2 with an internal call sequence where the codec list is specified at call setup and both PPs support wideband PP1 FP PP2 CC SETUP lt lt Basic Service 98 gt gt lt lt Codec List G 722 G726 gt gt LCE_REQUEST PAGE long CC CALL PROC CC SETUP lt lt Basic Service 98 gt gt lt lt Codec List G 722 G726 gt gt CC CONNECT lt lt Codec List G 722 gt gt CC CONNECT lt lt Codec List G 722 gt gt CC CONNECT ACK Figure 25 Internal call with codec list at call setup ETSI 72 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NOTE The Call Control message sequences in figures 24 and 25 should be understood as examples The real sequences may also contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents 7 4 3 9 2 Exception cases Excep
111. General s2eiccos isc telecine ease hie Red UR ooh es ies oN ei Ee ee ete edie ds 128 7 8 2 Speech codecs sc Ssie eke a adie ee AR ected die ee ies Rad esl to aaa 129 7 8 3 Audio performance requirements 2 0 0 0 eee ceeceeeseeeeceesceeececceseceecsaecsaecsaecseecaaeeseseaeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeseenseesseeeas 129 7 9 Management procedures mrs ces ee erea aE des see E aE E E KAE E so cde SE ESR caus E IKEN SENAN Oke Eketa 129 7 10 Application proced TeSsoie eisean ra les cee E Ea AE AAE a ede dia cee apd IAEA TAEAE EEE Reta 129 7 10 1 Easy PIN code and easy pairing registration esesseesseeeesesessresrsrterrsterrsstrtestestesreseertssertrnerteetesreeteseesrent 129 7 10 1 1 Easy PIN code registration naenin ear a E NE EE E ges REEE EES ERER dtd 129 7 10 1 1 1 Searching mode and PIN code requests sseeseeeeseeeseeeseseeessseeresstsresrsrenresrerrssertrsesereriseeerssenset 129 7 10 1 2 Easy pairing registration sn erae nesenie E eara S NEEE AEE EARE O A AE AEE EE SESER E Sa 130 7 10 1 2 1 Easy pairing registration description eeesseesseeeeseetssessesreerseertssertesesrestesterissrertnertenteseeeteseesrent 130 7 10 1 2 2 Base station limited registration mode 0 0 0 eee eee eeeceeecnsecesecnecseecaeecaeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenseeeseenaeeeas 130 7 10 1 2 3 Searching mod regestis neinean e E OE EE RE EEE E E EAEE EEEE EEst 130 7 10 1 3 Common procedures to easy PIN code and easy pairing sssssesssseesesreesssereresrsrreresrerresesreeresreres
112. ICATION gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Relating to line identifier gt lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Relating to line identifier gt lt Identifier value v gt Figure 32 Events notification concerning lines u and v example during a call If a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element is used for conveying the set of lines concerned with the notified events as an addition to the Generic events notification procedure of clause 7 4 1 consider table 21 Table 21 Values used within the FACILITY message Information element Field within the Standard values within the Normative action comment information element field information element lines in the set lt Identifier type gt o Code for Line identifier identifier type lt dentifier subtype gt 3 Code for Relating to line identifier subtype lt Identifier value gt All Tre line identifier value itself 7 4 6 Call identification 7 4 6 1 Call identifier general requirements Call identifiers are used to identify all ongoing calls ina DECT system internal or external They allow to enhance the Parallel call and Multiple call features More specifically Call identifiers allow to properly handle PPs with more than 2 call instances especially for all double call related
113. INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries session id start index i counter N list of field identifiers Line id id Line name id Multiple calls mode id gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries confirm session id start index counter N gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part gt gt Line i selected by the user i e 1 N IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry session id entry identifier list of field identifiers Line id id Line name id Multiple calls mode id gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry confirm session id start index gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part content part for i entryp gt user updates the settings for i line in line settings list IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry session id entry identifier gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part i entry IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry confirm session id entry identifier start index gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session session identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session confirm session identifier gt gt FP notifies all PP FACILITY attached to the line lt lt EVENTS NOTIFICATIONS lt List change indication Line settings N gt gt
114. ION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt Call waiting indication User CC RELEASE hangs up CC RELEASE COM CC SETUP lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt Incoming call presentation NOTE The lt lt CALL INFORMATIONS gt gt information element is not sent ina CC RELEASE or CC RELEASE COM message Figure C 24 Call waiting represented as first call when user hangs up C 5 List access service use case examples C 5 1 General In the following clauses several use case examples for list access are depicted It has to be noted that the sequences are only examples it cannot be mandatory that the message flows shall always be exactly in the described way However it is recommended to follow the examples where possible in order to ensure interoperability For clarity of the following flowcharts lt lt Call information gt gt IE including call identifiers and line identifiers does not appear in some of the CC messages that must convey it Please note that they should not be omitted when implementing equivalent cases ETSI 170 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 5 2 Use
115. IWU TO IWU lt Command end session confirm gt lt session identifier gt gt gt Establish parallel internal call 2 CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD 17H terminal id number gt gt CC INFO Call id assignment by the lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type subtype Call identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt Call transfer request CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 34 H gt gt implements lt Identifier type Call identifier gt the Call lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt identification feature lt Identifier value call id 1 gt gt gt Figure C 33 List access use case call transfer using internal names list first call explicitly put on hold C 6 2 3 Use case call transfer using internal names list first call implicitly put on hold by internal call Use case Ongoing call is implicitly put on hold before establishing a parallel internal call using the internal names list The first call is then transferred It shows in particular that the 17H implicitly puts the ongoing call on hold NOTE The list access re uses call id2 ETSI 178 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP Ongoing call external or internal with call id 1 Request internal call call 1 implicitely put on hold CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD 17H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line ld call id 1 gt CC INFO Call id assignement by the lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type
116. IWU to IWU information element for Reject command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWUs gt lt Length of content gt Length of content lt Protocol Discriminator gt Li acknowledgement gt NOTE _ Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 Reject reason Bits 87654321 Meaning 00000000 invalid range 00000001 entry not available 00000010 invalid session number 00000011 temporarily not possible 00000100 entry format incorrect 00000101 invalid start index 00000110 procedure not supported 00000111 procedure not allowed 00001000 content not accepted 00001001 list full all other values reserved In case of invalid session number the invalid session identifier of the acknowledged command is used in the negative acknowledgement 7 4 10 4 10 Data packet Data packet last These packets allow to send data content along with a command Table 49 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Data packet command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment ere eer ement within the Helge lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt Length of content List access packet last gt lt Session id
117. Id type Line identifier subtype external value u gt lt Id type subtype Call identifier value call id 2 gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Updated call id gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt gt gt CC CONNECT CC INFO lt lt SIGNAL value 02 H gt gt PP2 lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt Figure 23 Successful explicit call intrusion Ongoing external call with call id 1 lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt 3 party call establishment Network NOTE 1 The Call Control message sequence in figure 23 should be understood as an example The real sequences may also contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents ETSI 70 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 If PP1 is involved in an active external call and PP2 wishes to participate in a 3 party conference with PP1 and the remote party PP2 shall attempt to get the external line with a CC SETUP The FP assigns a call identifier for this new setup call NOTE 2 At this stage the
118. LL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt CC RELEASE CC RELEASE COM FACILITY lt lt EVENTS NOTIFICATION lt Event type Missed call gt lt Event sub type Voice gt lt Event multiplicity 1 gt lt Event type List change indication gt lt Event sub type Missed call list gt lt Event multiplicity number of missed called in the missed calls list gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Relating to line identifier gt lt Identifier value u gt gt gt Figure C 11 Missed call on a specific line NOTE The list change indication for the Missed call list is optional ETSI 158 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 2 5 Voice message waiting indication on a specific line Use case a voice message has been left in the voice mailbox of line u a voice message waiting indication is sent to each PP attached to this line PP attached at least to line u FP Network Voice message waiting indication on line u FACILITY lt lt EVENTS NOTIFICATION lt Event type Message waiting gt lt Event sub type Voice gt lt
119. N 10 Intrusion call 5 2 Implicit call intrusion into a line in single call mode NG1 N 11 Call deflection internal O ssi esiz O or external 5 NG1 N 12 Line identification Line identification general requirements General line identification requirements for external outgoing calls Line identification for a first external 7 4 5 2 2 outgoing call using lt lt CALL INFO gt gt IE Kraal Line identification for a first external 7 4 5 2 3 outgoing call using lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt IE FP managed line selection for a first aka external outgoing call General line identification requirements 7 4 5 3 1 M for external incoming calls TAR Line identification for a first external 7 4 5 3 2 M M M Line specification in events notification 7 454 O M O NG1 N 13 Call identification bee oh SoS ees Se M Call identifier general requirements 7 4 6 1 Call identifier assignment on outgoing call 7 4 6 2 FP to PP Call identifier assignment on incoming 7 4 6 3 call FP to PP NG1 N 14 Multiple lines ee ee e a Incoming and outgoing external calls ona 7 4 7 3 multiple line system Internal calls in multiple line context 7 4 7 4 Compatibility with non multiple line PP or 7 4 7 5 FP NG1 N 15 Multiple calls ee ee Multiple calls general requirements nv M M M o N Multiple calls general requirements 7 4 8 1 Incoming and outgoing external calls ona 7 4 8 2 mu
120. N 300 444 12 GAP The requirements of EN 301 406 11 and EN 300 176 2 10 shall be met by all equipment conforming to the present document ETSI 19 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 6 2 New Generation DECT Speech Services support status The following end user services shall be supported by New Generation DECT part 3 Extended wideband speech services devices shall support the following end user services Table 1 Speech service status Feature supported N f i NG1 1 NG1 2 Narrow band PCM G 711 64 kbit s voice service 511 o o NG1 3 NG1 4 Wideband G 729 1 32 kbit s voice service S121 o o NG1 5_ MPEG 4 ER AAC LD super wideband 64 kbit s voice service 5 1 21 O O NG1 6 MPEG 4 ER AAC LD wideband 32 kbit s voice service 5 1 21 o o 6 3 Services to DECT feature implementation mappings New Generation DECT part 3 Extended wideband speech services end user services shall be implemented using the DECT features and implementation alternatives defined in table 2 Table 2 Speech service to DECT features implementation mappings Service DECT Feature mapping FT 1a AETA Reference PT a 15 E A a NG1 P 1 2 level GFSK modulation 5 5 21 NG1 P 2 Physical Packet P32 5 5 21 MAC service type NG1 D 1 DLC Service LU1 TRUP Class 5 3 21 M M M 0 min_delay G 726 15 32 kbit s ADPCM codec NG1 SC 10 PP Audio type 1a classic Peer elie EA GAP handset improved GAP h
121. NFORMATION Selected line id shall be present lt id type Line identifier subtype external call Call id is absent since it was not assigned value u gt 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I gt gt 1 Figure C 20 Outgoing parallel calls unsupported new outgoing parallel call ETSI 166 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 4 2 Incoming parallel calls C 4 2 1_ Two simultaneous incoming calls on two different lines Use case the PP is attached to several lines An incoming call is received on two different lines This use case shows that from the PP point of view this use case does not fundamentally differ from the use case where two simultaneous calls occur on a single line PP attached at least to two lines u and v FP Network Incoming call to line u CC SETUP from calling number 1 lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number 1 gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls lt Identifier value u gt gt gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt Incoming call to line v CC INFO from calling number 2 lt lt SIGNAL value call waiting tone 07 H gt gt lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address
122. NFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt The PP sets up the call and selects the line to be used gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Id type Line identifier subtype external value u gt lt ld type subtype Call identifier value call id 1 gt gt gt CC CONNECT CC INFO lt lt SIGNAL value 02 H gt gt PP2 lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier lt Identifier subtype Line identifi lt Identifier value u gt r for external calls gt Ignored if the PP does not implement lt Identifier type Call identifier gt the Call identification feature lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt gt gt 3 party call establishment Figure 22 Implicit call intrusion NOTE 1 The Call Control message sequence in figure 22 should be understood as an example The real sequences may also contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents NOTE 2 In addition to the Intercept tone on signal Call waiting with the same call id warns PP1 of a call intrusion attempt NOTE 3 If the selected line is not a single cal
123. No line identification by Part 1 PP FP managed line selection See clause C 2 2 2 4 No line identification by PP FP managed line selection which also applies here C 2 3 First incoming call on a line C 2 3 1 PP attached to 1 line See below clause C 2 3 2 PP attached to several lines as there is no difference with the case when a PP is attached to several lines C 2 3 2 PP attached to several lines Use case the PP is attached to several lines An incoming call on line u is presented PP attached at least to line u FP CC SETUP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt gt gt Network Incoming call to line u from calling number Figure C 10 First incoming call PP attached to several lines ETSI 157 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 2 4 Missed call on a specific line Use case the PP is attached to several lines Missed call list is implemented An incoming call on line u is not answered Missed call and missed call list update notifications are sent just after the incoming call release PP attached at least to line u FP Network Incoming call to line u from calling number CC SETUP lt lt CA
124. OTE 2 The call identifier should not be displayed to the user For this procedure using the CC SETUP message see table 22 of GAP 12 clause 8 12 Incoming call request with the additions described in table 22 Table 22 Values used within CC SETUP Information element Field within the Standard values within the Normative action comment information element oe ormation clement element lt lt Call information gt gt lt Identifier type gt 1 Code for Call identifier identifier type lt Identifier subtype gt o Code for Call identifier subtype lt Identifier value gt Al The call identifier value itself PP FP CC SETUP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value 02 H gt gt gt Figure 35 Example of Call identifier assignment on incoming call with call id 2 ETSI 82 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 7 Multiple lines handling 7 4 7 1 Multiple lines common requirements The Multiple lines feature describes the behaviour of DECT systems connected to more than one network lines A PP registered in such a DECT system may be attached to one or several of these lines The Multiple line feature is only useful if the DECT system is connected to at least two different lines 1 PP attached to the PSTN line 3 PPs attached to _ the VoIP line 1 Residential use PSTN li
125. PP implements the Call identification feature it shall send the call identifier of the rejected waiting call in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element included in the same CC INFO message NOTE 2 A PP implementing the Call identification feature sends the call identifier of the waiting call even if there is a single call waiting If the PP implements the Line identification feature and the waiting call is external it shall send the line identifier of waiting call in the same lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element even if it is attached to a single line ETSI 57 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NOTE 3 If the call identifier is absent the line identifier may help determine the targeted call if the call identifier is present the line identifier is only added as a result of the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt completeness principle see clause 3 1 PP FP lt orons call external or a gt CC INFO lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt Internal or external waiting call waiting from calling number CW tone heard by user lt lt SIGNAL value call waiting tone 07 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type Line identifier subtype external call value waiting call line id gt lt id type Call identifier value waiting call id gt Line on which wa
126. Part 1 PPs C 2 2 4 1 Line identification by Part 1 PP with backward compatible mechanism Part 1 PP means a PP compliant with TS 102 527 1 21 Use case the Part 1 PP selects a line using lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt IE but however receives the lt lt CALL INFORMATIONS gt gt element from the FP and ignores it ETSI 156 PP FP attached to line u e 1 9 CC SETUP lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 23 3u H gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt called number ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Network Use of line u for calling Figure C 9 Line identification by Part 1 PP with backward compatible mechanism NOTE Figure C 9 is also valid for a Part 3 non multiple line PP i e not implementing the Multiple lines feature If such a PP however implements the Line identification feature it could use a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt instead of sending the keypad information u See the introduction of clause C 2 for information about what distinguishes such a Part 3 PP from a real Multiple lines PP C 2 2 4 2
127. Parts FPs The FP shall support the GAP EN 300 444 12 standard procedures full slot and ITU T Recommendation G 726 15 In other words it shall inter operate with a GAP compliant PP NOTE 1 The FP may detect the type of PP by means of the Information Element lt Terminal Capability gt provided at registration NOTE 2 It should be noted that GAP compliant PPs may have a more relaxed requirement of TCLw than New Generation DECT part 3 devices In some scenarios when combining GAP terminals with poor TCLw with long delay networks like VoIP and insufficient echo cancellation in the network audible echo could be perceived by the far end terminal This problem is not specific of devices compliant with the present document For more information refer to EN 300 175 8 8 annex E ETSI 42 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 1 2 Backward compatibility with Generic Access Profile GAP Requirements for NG DECT part 3 Portable Parts PPs registered on GAP compliant FPs The PP shall use the GAP standard procedures full slot and ITU T Recommendation G 726 15 in front of GAP standard FP 7 1 3 Backward compatibility with New Generation DECT part 1 Requirements for NG DECT part 3 Fixed Parts FPs The FP shall support DECT New Generation part 1 TS 102 527 1 21 procedures In other words a DECT New Generation part 3 Fixed part shall become exactly as a DECT New Generation part FP for a New Generation Part 1 PP All f
128. Ps consisting on an adaptive volume control depending on the level of environmental noise at the PP The gain variation shall be symmetrical As described in EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 6 and informative annex D D 2 Services and features defined in EN 300 444 GAP The following informative annex shows the features and MAC DLC services defined in EN 300 444 12 GAP many of them are reused in the present document This list is informative and shows the status in EN 300 444 V1 5 1 In case of changes or divergences the original definitions at EN 300 444 12 GAP shall rule D 2 1 GAP Network NWk features clause 4 1 of EN 300 444 outgoing call N 1 call initiated at a DECT PP off hook N 2 ability to indicate the action of going off hook e g to start call setup or accept a call on hook FULL Release N 3 ability to indicate the action of going on hook e g to terminate a call and fully release the radio resource dialled digits basic N 4 capability to dial digits 0 to 9 register recall N 5 ability of the PP to request the invocation of the supplementary service register recall over the DECT interface and the ability of the FP to transmit the request to the local network Register recall means to seize a register with dial tone to permit input of further digits or other action go to DTMF signalling defined tone length N 6 go to DTMF signalling with defined tone length pause dialling pause N 7
129. TUP 2 CC CONNECT Facility lt lt Events notification gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld gt gt Figure B 4 Event notification using call connection NOTE Line identifier may be equal to all lines value B 1 5 Event notification for Missed call notification Use case Missed call notification message sequence CC SETUP lt lt CLIP gt gt CC ALERTING Alerting SS gt CC RELEASE lt lt RELEASE REASON gt gt CC RELEASE COM lt lt RELEASE REASON gt gt End of incoming call FACILITY lt lt EVENTS NOTI FICATIONS lt Missed call Voice 1 gt lt List change indication Missed call list 1 gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt Linedld gt gt User accesses missed calls list Missed calls list consultation using list access feature Read or edit command FACILITY _ lt lt EVENTS NOTIFICATIONS lt Missed call Voice 0 gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld gt gt Figure B 5 Missed call notification NOTE See also clause C 2 4 for more detailed flowcharts including line identifiers and call identifiers ETSI 141 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 B 2 Date time synchronization diagrams These flowcharts depicts the date and time synchronization feature but only in the cases where the FP sets the date and time of the PP If the DECT system implements t
130. The PP detects the absence of easy pairing registration supported capability bit from the beginning and decides not to use the easy pairing feature but to use easy PIN code registration feature instead This behaviour has the drawback not to use easy pairing So it should be implemented only if behaviour 1 and 2 can not be implemented 7 10 1 3 Common procedures to easy PIN code and easy pairing 7 10 1 3 1 Registration mode automatic access When a PP that it is not registered to any FP is powered on the PP shall start in a mode where the user is directly invited to trigger the access rights procedure Upon user acknowledge the access right procedure shall start It shall be possible for the user to leave this mode to switch back to idle mode For any further registrations on the PP additional registration to the initial one the registration mode should also be easily accessible from the user point of view ETSI 133 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 10 1 3 2 Base station name selection This clause applies only to PP with a display capability The FP shall broadcast its name during the subscription mode The name shall be composed of up to 17 characters to fit in a CLMS FIXED message The name could be set to the manufacturer and model of the phone by default see note 1 and could be changed by the user to a friendly name As soon as a FP with a44 set to 1 is found within the FP searching process based on the RSSI the name
131. ULTI KEYPAD gt gt 00 00 eoeeeecceeeceecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenseensees 152 C 2 2 2 3 Line identification by PP immediately followed by call number e g pre dialling 0 0 152 C 2 2 2 4 No line identification by PP FP managed line selection eee cee esese cece ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesreneeaees 153 C2225 No line identification by PP and permanent FP managed line selection eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 154 C 2 2 3 GAP PP E EEE EE E E a reialsna APA teva E beth E 155 C 2 2 3 1 Line identification by GAP PP with backward compatible mechanism eeeeeeeeeeeeseereeeeeeeeees 155 C 2 2 3 2 No line identification by GAP PP FP managed line selection 0 0 0 eee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeaees 155 C 2 2 4 NG DECT Part PPS sscsscssctstevszetsenscuts aa tas bandon acauen babes oto tasty Shand Meal N a R areas 155 C 2 2 4 1 Line identification by Part 1 PP with backward compatible mechanism uu ee eeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeees 155 C 2 2 4 2 No line identification by Part 1 PP FP managed line selection eee ee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaees 156 C 2 3 First incomunig call on a line innsin a sevens a a ove taser Red et ieee eae eed 156 C 2 3 1 PPiattached tol lime sc3ieevssersontidavtssnnen ties n A A teers Suds iat E E A hea 156 C 2 3 2 PP attached to several limes secisiioarrnmasdieerteseton tiie tae tiel Seared ens Heese death Athenee 156 C 2 4 Missed callon a Specie Lime wy cs c0ss bs evsssenzees oblate a E E a E R E a 157 C 2 5 Voice m
132. WU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry confirm session id start index gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part content part for i entry gt user updates the settings for i line in line settings list IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry session id entry identifier gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part i entry IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry confirm session id entry identifier start index gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session session identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session confirm session identifier gt gt FP notifies all PP FACILITY attached to the line lt lt EVENTS NOTIFICATIONS lt List change indication Line settings N gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld gt gt CC RELEASE AAA CC RELEASE COM AAAS e o o Figure C 41 Changing the settings of a line use case 1 Use case 2 The user edit the line settings of the line number i Read all N entries before editing the selected entry ETSI 186 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP CC SETUP lt lt BASIC_SERVICE lt Call Class Service call setup gt gt gt CC CALL PROC IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session lines settings Number of sorting fields 0 gt gt IWU INFO E lt lt IWU to IWU start session confirm session identifier total number N gt gt IWU
133. Wideband 7 kHz handsfree device improved quality version as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 13 This type applies to handsfree devices operating with an open loudspeaker and microphone The profile applies to either 1 specific PPs designed to operate in handsfree mode 2 standard wideband handset implementing profiles 2a 2b or 2c but with the option to operate in handsfree mode and 3 handsfree accessory devices connected to a handset by any wired or wireless technology It provides 150 Hz 7 kHz frequency range and it is defined based on HATS methodology This type has a more demanding acoustic specification providing superior subjective quality In practice this means better electro acoustic components speaker microphone electronics and signal processing PP Audio type 5a Super wideband 14 kHz NG1 SC 21 Handset for 14 kHz service super wideband as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 14 PP Audio type 5b Super wideband 14 kHz handsfree NG1 SC 22 Handsfree device for 14 kHz service super wideband as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 15 FP audio type 1b new ISDN 3 1 kHz NG1 SC 23 Audio specification for a DECT FP supporting narrowband service and providing a digital 64 kbit s G 711 interface typically but not necessarily an ISDN connection new specification as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 3 NOTE 3 FP Audio type la classic ISDN 3 1 kHz FP see EN 300 175 8 8
134. a NA registration Subscription control 14 1 N A N A A 3 Manual entry of the PARK Manual entry of the PARK A 4 Terminal identity number assignment in mono cell system Terminal identity number assignment C801 IF feature N 9 OR N 10 OR N 12 OR N 26 THEN M ELSE N A ETSI 204 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Annex E informative Bibliography ISO IEC 8073 1997 Information technology Open Systems Interconnection Protocol for providing the connection mode transport service ETSI EN 301 649 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT DECT Packet Radio Service DPRS ETSI EN 300 176 1 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT Test specification Part 1 Radio ETSITS 124 072 Digital cellular telecommunications system Phase 2 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System UMTS Call Deflection Supplementary Service Stage 3 IETF RFC 3640 RTP Payload Format for Transport of MPEG 4 Elementary Streams IETF RFC 3016 RTP Payload Format for MPEG 4 Audio Visual Streams IETF RFC 4749 RTP Payload Format for the G 729 1 Audio Codec IETF RFC 3261 SIP Session Initiation Protocol ETSI 205 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 History Document history ETSI
135. a busy tone signal which will terminate the procedure NOTE 4 In figure 16 the second call is being established using the Outgoing parallel call initiation procedure of clause 7 4 3 5 1 however any procedure leading to two parallel calls may precede the call transfer procedure For example unannounced call transfer could also be used instead of call waiting acceptation after the Call waiting indication procedure 7 4 3 6 3 Call re injection to the line external or internal The purpose of the Call re injection to the line external or internal procedure is to transfer a call external or internal unannounced to all PPs attached to the line PP1 FP Any PP attached to the same line Call 1 established external or internal Initiate setup of parallel internal general call CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD 17H gt gt Call transfer request CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD 1C 34 H gt gt CC RELEASE CC RELEASE COM Paging of the idle PP For each idle PP CC SETUP CC SETUP ACK If this PP picks up CC CONNECT unannounced call transfer complete e LEO M aE a Ml CW indication to the PP in use CC INFO lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER gt gt For each PP already in use lt lt SIGNAL value CW 07 H gt gt if the line implements the Multiple calls feature and is in multiple call mode If this PP accepts the waiting call CC INFO lt lt KEYPAD info 1C 35 H gt gt unannounce
136. al active call on another PP This service mimics the usual behavior of two PSTN wired phones connected to the same physical analogue line NOTE Call intrusion is also known as barging in This feature makes optional use of the Line identification feature on PP side 7 4 3 8 1 Implicit call intrusion into a line in single call mode This procedure applies to the FP and an idle PP on a line either not implementing the Multiple calls feature or implementing this feature but configured in single call mode NOTE 0 Implicit call intrusion if implemented should be a configurable feature of the single call mode line If PP1 is involved in an active external call and PP2 wishes to participate in a 3 party conference with PP1 and the remote party PP2 shall attempt to get the external line with a CC SETUP The call identifier assigned by the FP for this call shall be the call identifier for the intruded call This message shall then be directly acknowledged by the FP with a CC CONNECT message The FP shall notify PP1 with a CC INFO message containing the information element lt lt SIGNAL gt gt with the value 02H indicating Intercept tone on The FP shall generate automatically a conference call audio stream between the three parties ETSI 68 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP2 PP1 FP Network attached to line u attached to line u External Call established with call id 1 CC SETUP lt lt CALL I
137. all has been accepted or rejected the FP shall send a call release to the PP using Call release and call release rejection of clause 7 4 3 5 4 if the PP implements the Call identification feature or using On hold call release otherwise 7 4 3 5 3 Call toggle external or internal This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in a call on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal NOTE 1 Implementation of the Multiple call feature or of the Multiple line feature implies implementation of the Common parallel call procedures external or internal feature ETSI 53 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 In case two parallel calls are established in order to toggle between the calls the PP shall send the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 31H Furthermore If the PP implements the Call identification feature it shall send the identifier of the call targeted by the togggle in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element included in the same CC INFO message NOTE 2 A PP implementing the Call identification feature sends the call identifier of the targeted call even if it toggles between two calls only If the PP implements the Line identification feature and the targeted call is external it shall send the line identifier of the targeted call in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information e
138. all id gt Figure 5 Outgoing parallel call initiation request with FP managed line selection NOTE 4 The line identifier is ignored if the PP does not implement the Line identification feature it is present here either as a result of a PP using FP managed line selection or if the PP did select a line for the new call as a result of the CALL INFORMATION completeness principle see clause 3 1 In case the line identifier is not yet available in the FP e g because FP decides about line depending on dial progress the FP might omit the line identifier in the message The FP may change the audio codec for the parallel call by use of the service change procedure see clause 7 4 3 3 Codec change for parallel calls In case the parallel call is internal the FP shall use the GAP internal call CLIP and internal call CNIP procedures for this parallel call see clause 6 10 NOTE 5 In case internal call 17H is sent the character can be sent meaning general internal call 7 4 3 5 2 Call waiting indication external or internal This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in a call on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal If the Multiple call feature is implemented and used on a line the line may be configured in single call mode or in multiple call mode NOTE 1 Implementation of the Multiple call feature or of the Multiple line
139. all use the List access service procedures with the following additional requirements DECT system settings consist of a set of settings that are valid for the complete DECT system i e valid for all registered PPs independently of line multiple line concepts They are stored in the FP as a unique list with only one entry in the list Each setting is a field of this entry ETSI 115 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Line settings consist of a set of settings that are valid for one line of the DECT system i e valid for all registered PPs attached to this line They are stored in the FP as a unique list with one entry per line in the list Each setting is a field of this entry Even if the DECT system does not implement multiple line features the FP and PP shall support line settings with only one entry the settings for the only line supported by the system Sorting of the lists No sorting is defined for the DECT system settings list as it contains only one entry The Line settings list is sorted by ascending line id number Commands All the List access service feature commands shall be supported for the DECT system and line settings feature except for The delete entry command is not allowed for the DECT system settings list The delete list command is not allowed for the DECT system settings list nor for the Line settings list These commands shall not be invoked by any PP and shall be answered with negat
140. andset note 1 NG1 SC 12 PP Audio type 1c HATS 3 1 kHz handset NG1 SC 13 PP Audio type 1d HATS N A 3 1 kHz improved handset NG1 SC 17 PP Audio type 3a HATS EEEREN 3 1 kHz handsfree NG1 SC 18 PP Audio type 3b HATS 5 6 21 N A NG1 SC 23 FP Audio type 1b new 5 6 21 N A C706 ISDN 3 1 kHz C707 C707 C706 NG1 1 Narrow band ADPCM G 726 32 kbit s voice service NG1 SC 25 PP echo supressor for FP narrowband NG1 SC 26 FP Audio type 2 analog N PSTN 3 1 kHz 702 N A N A 3 1 kHz improved handsfree C706 NG1 SC 24 PP echo canceller for FP 5 6 21 N A C707 narrowband N A C707 A 706 C ETSI 20 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Service DECT Feature mapping 1al PEG P eaeeamce Reference PT Haa J P NG1 SC 27 FP Audio type 3 VoIP 5 6 21 N A C706 C70 3 1 kHz T O NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal 5 6 21 call NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal 5 6 21 N A conference NG1 SC 34 Adaptive volume control for 5 6 21 lene lies FP 5 1 21 O O O NG1 2 Narrow band PCM G 711 eee 64 kbit s voice service NG1 P 1 2 level GFSK modulation 5 5 21 NG1 P 3 Physical Packet P64 5 5 21 NG1 M 1 In_minimum delay symmetric 5 4 21 M M M MAC service type NG1 M 4 Advanced Connections 5 4 21 M NG1 D 1 DLC Service LU1 TRUP Class 5 3 21 M M 0 min_delay G 711 16 64 kbit s PCM codec iil E tone switching NG1 SC 10 PP Audio type
141. as been reached The system may be busy without the line being busy NOTE 3 A call context could be used by an internal call A system should allow as many calls external or internal as there are call contexts potentially available on the system ETSI 87 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 On call setup attempt first or parallel if the system is busy or the line is busy the FP shall send back a busy system or line notification back to the PP in the form of a lt lt SIGNAL gt gt information element with lt Signal value gt field equal to 04H busy tone included in a CC INFO message If the PP does not hook on after a time out has elapsed the FP shall send a call release request to the PP to terminate the call attempt This call release request shall take the form of a CC RELEASE message for a first call or of a CC INFO message according to procedure Call release and call release rejection clause 7 4 3 5 4 for a parallel call PP FP attached to a multiple call line the FP and or the multiple call line cannot support the additional call CC INFO lt lt SIGNAL lt value busy tone 04 H gt gt gt Added in case the call id was assigned lt lt CALL INFORMATION before the busy status of the line lt Identifier type Call identifier gt was discovered see note 4 lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value 03 H gt gt gt After some time out Call release r
142. ation lt lt MULTI KEYPAD Line selected by PP for the call using the CALL INFO method if external value u gt gt gt OR Line selected by PP for the call lt lt MULTI KEYPAD using the KEYPAD method lt Keypad info 23 3u H gt gt gt if external lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Busy system or line notification after Call id assignment call id assignment call release needed CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type Line identifier subtype external call Repeated here as a result of the CALL INFO completion principle value u gt l possibly ignored if PP does not implement lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value assigned call id gt l i l l l i gt gt Busy system or line notification CC INFO l lt lt SIGNAL value busy tone 04 H gt gt j lt lt CALL INFORMATION same values as above gt gt i l l l i l l Call release CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 33 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION same values as above gt gt Busy system or line notification before call id assignment i e before call context was created Busy system or line notification CC INFO lt lt SIGNAL value busy tone 04 H gt gt lt lt CALL I
143. ation feature 7 4 8 1 2 Minimum requirements An implementation of the Multiple calls feature on a DECT system shall comply with the following minimum requirements The maximum number of simultaneous calls supported by a FP implementing the Multiple calls feature shall be at least equal to 2 This includes support of as many simultaneous call contexts The FP shall be able to support this maximum number of incoming or outgoing calls for idle PPs as defined in clause 7 4 6 2 This includes simultaneous ringing of all idle PPs on incoming calls and availability of all idle handsets for placing a new call when there is already a call going on on the line ETSI 86 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 8 2 Incoming and outgoing external calls on a multiple call line This procedure applies to the FP and the PP at external call incoming or outgoing setup on a multiple call line This line might be set in multiple call or single call mode 7 4 8 2 1 Line set in single call mode On a multiple call line configured in single call mode only one call can be active at a time on the line Other calls second or further are on hold and can only become active by replacing the existing one on the same PP To handle a line in single call mode the DECT system shall use the usual procedures defined in the present DECT standard In particular the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures shall be used to handle the s
144. ature to procedure mapping esesseessereessstseeesrseeresrertsseressestestestenresenstentesrertnsenresreernseeset 33 6 11 Data Link Control DLC Service to procedure mapping eeseseseseeesssreesssererssrsrrerrsserrenrstenresreernseerenreeresereee 37 6 12 Medium Access Control MAC service to procedure mapping eesseseessersesesrsrrerrsreereserrtssrrrrersreneseeernsenees 38 6 13 Application feature to procedure Mapping eee eee eeceeecesecesecesecsaecseecaeecseseaeeeesesseeeenseecsaesaecsaecsaeeaeeennees 40 6 14 General requirement sassen e tered iets hese che ie eo dees AE ahs eee ed eect eee 40 6 14 1 Network NWK layer message CONtENES ee ee eeceeecesecesecsecaeecaeecaeeeeeeeeceeseeseeesecssecsaecsaecnaecsaeeaeeeneees 40 6 14 2 Transaction 1dentutier oirnn huss si ee a ces bein eee ea hte Ab he chee eee ceed 40 6 14 3 Length of a Network NWK layer message 0 0 0 eee ceeceseceecnsecseecaeecneeeeeeeeceseesseeeseecsaecsaecaeseneesaeeaeeeneees 40 6 14 4 Handling of error and exception conditions eee ee eecesecee esse cseecseecaeeseeesecssecsaecsaecsaecsaecaeesaecsaeesaeeaeens 40 6 14 5 Generic Access Profile GAP default setup attributes ee ceeeeesseceeeceeseeceeneeeneeceeeeeneeceeeeeaaeeeneecnaeeees 40 6 14 6 Coexistence of Mobility Management MM and Call Control CC procedures eeeeeesseeeeeeeeneeeeee 41 6 14 7 Coding rules for information elements 00 0 0 eee ee cesecese cece ceeceeeeeeeeeeca
145. by the FP in order to update the PP date and time and synchronize it with the DECT system date and time The DECT system date and time could have been provided by the network or by one of the PPs using procedure PT initiated Date and Time synchronization of clause 7 4 2 2 NOTE When the the Clock master setting is implemented the DECT system date and time origin is restricted However a PP should never ignore the FP notification even if the Clock master field is set to PP because the DECT system date and time may have been set by another PP ETSI 46 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP FACILITY lt lt TIME DATE gt gt Figure 1 FT initiated Date and time synchronization 7 4 2 2 PT initiated Date and Time synchronization In some cases e g if the date and time are not provided by the network or erroneous the DECT system date and time may be provided by one of the PPs using the present procedure When the the Clock master field is equal to PP the DECT system date and time shall only be provided by one of the PPs using the present procedure However procedure FT initiated Date and Time synchronization of clause 7 4 2 1 may be used subsequently in order to transfer the updated date and time to all other registered PPs PP FP FACILITY lt lt TIME DATE gt gt Figure 2 PT initiated Date and time synchronization 7 4 3 Handling of parallel calls 7 4 3 1 Parallel call common requirements
146. calling number 2 gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value v gt gt gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt Figure C 21 Incoming parallel calls two simultaneous incoming calls on two different lines ETSI 167 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 4 2 2 FP release of waiting call when remote party hangs up Use case use of call release from the FP when the remote partie hangs up This may occur even before the PP answered the call PP2 FP Network attached to line u Call established with call id 1 external or internal CC INFO lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt CW tone heared by user lt lt SIGNAL value call waiting tone 07 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type Line identifier subtype external call value waiting call line id gt lt id type subtype Call identifier value waiting call id call id 2 gt Line on which waiting call occurred if external CW context created remote party hangs up Call release used for a waiting call CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 33 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION
147. ce this means better electro acoustic components speaker microphone electronics and signal processing PP audio type 3a HATS tested 3 1 kHz handsfree SC 6 Audio specification for a Narrowband 3 1 kHz handsfree device as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 7 This type applies to handsfree devices operating with an open loudspeaker and microphone The type applies to either 1 specific PPs designed to operate in handsfree mode 2 standard handset implementing types la 1b 1c or 1d but with the option to operate in handsfree mode and 3 handsfree accessory devices connected to a handset by any wired or wireless technology It provides 300 Hz 3 4 kHz frequency range and it is defined based on HATS methodology PP audio type 3b HATS tested 3 1 kHz improved handsfree SC 7 Audio specification for a Narrowband 3 1 kHz handsfree device improved quality version as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 8 This type applies to handsfree devices operating with an open loudspeaker and microphone The type applies to either 1 specific PPs designed to operate in handsfree mode 2 standard handset implementing types la 1b 1c or 1d but with the option to operate in handsfree mode and 3 handsfree accessory devices connected to a handset by any wired or wireless technology It provides 300 Hz 3 4 kHz frequency range and it is defined based on HATS methodology This type has a more demanding acoustic specification p
148. cedure Reference D 1 LAPC class A service and Lc Class A link establishment Class A acknowledged information SS RSS Class A link release sd A link release Class A link re establishment EEE D 2Cschannelfragmentatonand oO OOOOO O O recombination channel fragmentation and 2 recombination oaeo D 3 Broadcast Lb service a e a D 4 Intra cell voluntary connection o Z o Z 51 mMm ceo C601 handover Class A basic connection handover__ 97 m m M_ D 5 Inter cell voluntary connection ee IM Os I OT handover Class A basic connectionhandover 97 m M M D 6 Encryption activation ee e E Encryption switching 98 m m UM D 7 LU1 TRUP Class 0 min_delay oco 5 M M u U plane Class O min delay 99 m OM mM D 8 FU1 o FU1 frame operation 910 m M OM _ D 9 Encryption deactivation Pe a eam een Encryption switching 98s m m M C601 IF service M 9 THEN O ELSE M C602 IF feature N 29 OR N 28 THEN M ELSE lI C603 IF feature N 17 OR N 27 THEN M ELSE lI ETSI 202 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 D 3 3 GAP MAC service to procedure mapping table clause 6 8 3 of EN 300 444 Table D 3 MAC service to procedure mapping table 7 of EN 300 444 Service Procedure mapping Status Service Procedure Reference PT FT _ i E te ee SB PS M 1 General M 2 Continuous broadcast pM LM OM M 3 Paging broadcast ae e
149. ceeeeeeneeceeeeecaeceeneecsaeceeneeeaeeeees 77 ETSI 7 4 5 4 7 4 6 7 4 6 1 7 4 6 2 7 4 6 3 7 4 1 7 4 1 1 7 4 1 1 1 7 4 1 1 2 7 4 1 2 7 4 1 2 1 7 4 7 2 2 7 4 7 2 3 7 4 7 3 7 4 1 4 7 4 1 5 7 4 1 5 1 7 4 7 5 2 74 8 7 4 8 1 7 4 8 1 1 7 4 8 1 2 7 4 8 2 7 4 8 2 1 7 4 8 2 2 7 4 8 3 7 4 9 7 4 9 1 7 4 9 2 7 4 9 2 1 7 4 9 2 2 7 4 10 7 4 10 1 7 4 10 2 7 4 10 3 7 4 10 4 7 4 10 4 1 7 4 10 4 2 7 4 10 4 3 7 4 10 4 4 7 4 10 4 5 7 4 10 4 6 7 4 10 4 7 7 4 10 4 8 7 4 10 4 9 7 4 10 4 10 7 4 10 5 7 4 10 5 1 7 4 10 5 2 7 4 10 5 3 7 4 10 5 4 7 4 10 5 5 7 4 10 5 6 7 4 10 5 7 7 4 10 5 8 7 4 10 5 9 7 4 10 5 10 7 4 10 6 7 4 10 7 7 4 11 7 4 11 1 7 4 11 2 5 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Line specification in events notification eeesssesesseesesreessrerrssesresrerrsesrestesteetestrrtnrertestestentesreeteseeereet 78 Call dent Cation aea a a E Roe ee eels oh es a ees 79 Call identifier general requirement ee eee eeeeeeceeeceeeceseceseceaecsaecaeecaeecaeseaeseeeseeeeeeesseeeseeseeseeeas 79 Call identifier assignment on outgoing call FP to PP oe e eee eeeeeeeceeeeeeceseesensecaeeeseeseesaeaes 80 Call identifier assignment on incoming call FP to PP oo cece eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessesesecaeenaeeaes 81 Multiple lines amd ling msnnen nen a E e capes pa end sub casunentebon cvbde E ara ss 82 Multiple lines common requirements eee eeeeceescesecesecesecaecsaecsaecaeeeseseeeseeeseeesseeeseeseseaeeaessaee
150. ched value with matching option 01 H and there is no entry with Name field equal to Smi in the list exact match will fail on the first entry ranked after Smi in the list when using the alphanumerical order This entry is the so called current entry and may have e g Smith as Name field value or any other value Searched value The FP shall use the searched value as search criterion in the entry field which was used as first criterion by the FP for sorting the list this sorting field is indicated to the PP in the Start session confirm command In case a numerical value is searched the string content fields shall contain the A5 coded decimal representation of the value e g in case of searching for Line id 12 the string content is 31H 32H NOTE 3 This particular coding of numerical values does not imply anything about the underlying sorting order of the list which depends on the sorting fields defined for the session and on their types see Start session command Counter octet See the Read entries command clause 7 4 10 4 3 as the same definition applies here Possible error cases If session identifier is wrong the FP shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason invalid session number In case an unknown list entry field identifier is requested the FP shall ignore this field and continue with the next requested field 7 4 10 4 8 2 Search entries confirm command This comma
151. conditions have been met One ZAP field shall be provided per account field The PP has the right to authenticate the FP prior to the execution of ZAP suspend encryption activation FT initiated N 17 activation of the encryption process requested by FT ETSI 195 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 subscription registration procedure on air N 18 standardized procedure for loading subscription registration data into a PP in real time over the air interface link control N 19 ability to request accept maintain and release a data link for the purposes of a NWK layer procedure terminate access rights FT initiated N 20 ability of the FP to delete a subscription in the PP partial release N 21 ability to release an established or in progress Call Control CC call whilst retaining the radio resource for the purpose of accessing further services go to DTMF infinite tone length N 22 go to DTMF signalling indicating infinite DTMF tone duration go to pulse N 23 go to pulse decadic signalling signalling of display characters N 24 transmission to the PP of characters to be displayed on the user s PP display if provided display control characters N 25 characters sent to the PP to control the user s display in the PP if provided Such characters include cursor control clear screen home flash inverse video etc authentication of FT N 26 process by which the identity of a FP is checked by the PP encry
152. csecaecsaecaeeaseaeenea 46 Handling of parallel Call Secs sce eines ceneo noie neie ch reads Seas ieee E EEEE SEKENE Eee Serias 46 Parallel call common requirements ssssseseeesssseeessstreeerestteresteersserrsestentesteetssrerrsrestsstetsstesreeteserrreet 46 Control Messages nosiri eneore enre i Basch Sea aao EAE E a Ee Ghats oE an See ha ee hes 47 Codec change for parallel allS c s iersnonissi eneee seice rssi soati kes een oero i roski Et Ce ai Esos v nevn est 47 Sending negative acknowledgement 0 ee eee cee ceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesecssecsaecsaecssecseecsaeeaeseaeeeeeeeeensaes 48 Common parallel call procedures external or internal ieee cee ceeecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerensaeenea 48 Outgoing parallel call initiation external or internal eee ee cee eese cee cnee cee caeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneensees 49 Call waiting indication external or internal ee ceeeeesseceeececeeceeneecaeceeeeecsaceeeneecaeeeeaeecsaeeeeeee 51 Call tofgle external or internal sseni ann a eaest ioe iis erent ene 52 Call releaseand call release rejection nsnsi a a Ga trae ieee 53 On h ld call telase soso seveveessssGiegik vase vssepseesd S EE ened ianeeteen uidee omer aeon tebe eto 55 Call waiting acceptation from PP to FP oo eee ee snn a E A 55 Call waiting rejection irom PP to FR annn a E R tenet eee enon 56 Putting a Call on hold srn a A E bet een uae aes eons 58 Resumins a Call puton holdir R E R E A a ees 58 CLIP on Call Walt
153. ct a base in registration mode is a little bit longer but it really improves the security ETSI 134 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 FP name broadcasting is initiated by including the lt lt NETWORK Parameter gt gt information element in the CLMS FIXED message The procedure to construct a multi section CLMS FIXED message shall be performed as defined in EN 300 175 5 5 clause 8 3 PT IWU lt lt NETWORK parameter mode Device Name gt gt MS FIXED Within timer Address section F lt AP 03 gt Within timer F lt AP 01 gt MNCL _UNIT_DATA req lt lt NETWORK parameter Device Name gt gt Q _3 Access rights supported 0 Figure 46 Base station name broadcasting Table 61 Values used within the CLMS FIXED message 1St segment Information element Field within the Standard values Normative action comment lc lt A gt gt o 1 CY Addressssection Y I lt lt CLMSheader gt gt 010 Multiple seections Standard O i CFFFH Connectionless Group TPUI Discriminator gt gt pe eee ee sections to follow Table 62 Values used within the CLMS FIXED message 2 4 segment Information element Field within the Standard values Normative action comment information element within the field IE 0 _ Datasecton O E E i lt lt CLMS header gt gt ao o o Data section number 0 1st PH NETWORK parameter octet 1 Cid Any lt 20 Length octet 2 as Pp lt lt DATA SEFill
154. curred if external see note 3 value waiting call line id gt Ignored if the PP does not implement lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value waiting call id gt gt gt CC INFO user lt lt SIGNAL value call waiting tone 07 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line on which waiting call lt id type Line identifier subtype external call occurred if external see note 4 value waiting call line id gt Ignored if the PP does not implement lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value waiting call id gt gt gt Figure 6 Call waiting indication NOTE 3 The line identifier indicates to the PP on which line the waiting call occurred if external It is however ignored on PP side if the PP does not implement the Line identification feature NOTE 4 Unlike the call identifier which is a kind a session id for the waiting call and is always present the line identifier is only repeated here as a result of the CALL INFORMATION completeness principle see clause 3 1 It is however ignored if the PP does not implement the Line identification feature To accept the waiting call the Call waiting acceptation procedure shall be used see clause 7 4 3 5 6 To reject the waiting call the Call waiting rejection procedure shall be used see clause 7 4 3 5 7 If the remote party hangs up before the waiting c
155. d call transfer complete Figure 17 Use of unannounced call transfer as a way to re inject a call into the line NOTE The Call Control message sequence in figure 17 should be understood as an example The real sequences may also contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents ETSI 64 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 3 6 4 Remote party CLIP on call transfer Remote party CLIP on call transfer shall be used when a call transfer occurs between the remote parties of a double call It is defined as follows A first call between a first party A transferring party and a second party B remote party is supposed to have been completely established This first call may be external or internal A second internal call between A and a third party C the PP target of the call transfer is either already established announced call transfer or being established unannounced call transfer Remote party CLIP on call transfer shall be used on announced or unannounced call transfer Remote party CLIP on call transfer occurs in the FP after reception of the call transfer request from the transferring party The remote party CLIP of B shall be indicated by sending the lt lt Calling Party Number gt gt information element in a CC INFO message NOTE 1 Remote party CLIP on call transfer is applicable when the third party C is internal that
156. d may be subject to testing NOTE The used notation is based on the notation proposed in ISO TEC 9646 7 14 3 3 Abbreviations For the purposes of the present document the following abbreviations apply AAC Advanced Audio Coding MPEG AC Authentication Code ADPCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation AI Air Interface CC Call Control CI Common Interface DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DLC Data Link Control DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency ER Error Resilient MPEG FP Fixed Part ETSI 15 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 FT Fixed radio Termination GAP Generic Access Profile IA Implementation Alternative IE Information Element IP Internet Protocol IPUI International Portable User Identity ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network IWU InterWorking Unit LA Location Area LD Low Delay MPEG LLME Lower Layer Management Entity MAC Medium Access Control MM Mobility Management NG New Generation NG DECT New Generation DECT NWK NetWork P Public environment PARK Portable Access Rights Key PHL PHysical Layer PP Portable Part PT Portable radio Termination R B Residential Business environment RFP Radio Fixed Part S T ISDN S T Interface SARI Secondary Access Rights Identity TCLw weighted Telephone Coupling Loss TPUI Temporary Portable User Identity TRUP TRansparent UnProtected service U ISDN U Interface VoIP Voice over IP WB WideBand 4 Description of Services 4 1 Enha
157. d of audio signals e g speech and music and provides a high quality for music streaming or other multimedia applications mixing speech and music It provides an audio bandwidth of 14 kHz or more at a bitrate of 64 kbit s MPEG 4 ER AAC LD Error resilient Low Delay AAC profile is standardized as an audio profile 19 of MPEG 4 ISO IEC 14496 3 20 The frame size is 10 ms and the algorithmic delay 20 ms MPEG 4 ER AAC LD 32 kbit s wideband NG1 SC 6 as NG1 SC5 but using the 32 kbit s mode as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 5 5 2 It provides a bandwidth of 11 5 kHz or more The frame size is 20 ms and the algorithmic delay 40 ms PLC Packet Loss Concealment G 722 Appendix III amp IV NG1 SC 7 to better cope with transmission errors a Packet Loss Concealment algorithm PLC as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 5 3 2 may be optionally implemented for ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 Appendices II and IV describe packet loss concealment solutions extending the ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 decoder These PLC algorithms may be optionally implemented to improve voice quality in degraded transmission conditions where packets frames may be lost in IP network or on DECT air interface NOTE 1 Both appendices meet the same quality requirements but address two different quality complexity trade offs 1 Appendix III aims at maximizing the robustness at a price of additional complexity 2 Appendix IV proposes an optimized complex
158. d procedure s This is an integral part of the actual procedure if defined in the present document i e if a procedure is being declared to be supported the respective entity shall also support the associated procedures e g timer management in the clause following the description of the normal case c exceptional case s This is an integral part of the actual procedure if defined in the present document i e if a procedure is being declared to be supported the respective entity shall also support the exception handling defined in the clause following the description of the normal case All protocol elements listed in the following clauses are process mandatory i e the FT and PT depending on their role in the procedure shall send or shall receive and process the relevant protocol elements as listed in the respective tables if not explicitly stated as being optional The primitives used in procedure descriptions are defined only for the purpose of describing layer to layer interactions The primitives are defined as an abstract list of parameters and their concrete realization may vary between implementations No formal testing of primitives is intended The primitive definitions have no normative significance 7 1 Backward compatibility with Generic Access Profile GAP and with New Generation DECT part 1 wideband speech equipment 7 1 1 Backward compatibility with Generic Access Profile GAP Requirements for NG DECT part 3 Fixed
159. e Generic Access Profile GAP 12 and shall offer the DECT standard 32 kbit s voice service according to GAP All DECT devices claiming to be compliant with this Application Profile will offer at least the basic services defined as mandatory In addition to that optional features can be implemented to offer additional DECT services The aim of the present document is to guarantee a sufficient level of interoperability and to provide an easy route for development of DECT wideband speech applications with the features of the present document being a common fall back option available in all compliant to this profile equipment 2 References References are either specific identified by date of publication and or edition number or version number or non specific For a specific reference subsequent revisions do not apply Non specific reference may be made only to a complete document or a part thereof and only in the following cases if it is accepted that it will be possible to use all future changes of the referenced document for the purposes of the referring document for informative references Referenced documents which are not found to be publicly available in the expected location might be found at http docbox etsi org Reference For online referenced documents information sufficient to identify and locate the source shall be provided Preferably the primary source of the referenced document should be cited in
160. e Qr message At the PT the MAC layer passes the 16 bits out through the ME SAP to the management entity For the setting of the higher layer information bits see clause 7 3 9 1 of TS 102 527 1 21 7 6 3 4 Qr Extended Fixed Part capabilities The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 6 3 4 shall apply Higher layer information The management entity in the FP supplies the MAC layer with a 23 bit SDU via the Management Entity ME SAP The content of that SDU is placed in bits lt a25 gt to lt a47 gt of the Qr message At the PT the MAC layer passes the 24 bits out through the ME SAP to the management entity No higher layer information for New Generation DECT parts 1 or 3 is broadcasted in Qr Extended Fixed part capabilities 7 6 3 5 Qr Extended Fixed Part capabilities part 2 The FT shall be capable of sending and the PT shall be capable of receiving and processing the Qr message as defined in EN 300 175 3 3 clause 7 2 3 11 with the following values Table 60 Values used within Extended FP capabilities part 2 MAC message Field within the Standard values within Normative action comment the MAC Se lt lt FP capabilities gt gt lt Qh gt OO O O aeee EE ong slot j 640 Long slot j 672 if supported lt a23 gt 0 1 no emission mode preferred carrier number mode CN Setting of bit a no emission mode a 1 variable preferred CN every CN possible a 0 fixed preferred CN ETSI 128
161. e does not prevent several simultaneous calls on the same PP A line which is not multiple call for instance a PSTN line only enabling double calls is also said to be in single call mode super wideband speech voice service with enhanced quality compared to ADPCM G 726 and allowing the transmission of a maximum vocal frequency of at least 14 kHz wideband speech voice service with enhanced quality compared to ADPCM G 726 and allowing the transmission of a vocal frequency range of at least 150 Hz to 7 kHz and fulfilling the audio performance requirements described in the ITU T Recommendation P 311 1 5 3 2 Symbols For the purposes of the present document the following symbols apply M mandatory to support provision mandatory process mandatory O optional to support provision optional process mandatory I out of scope provision optional process optional not subject for testing C conditional to support process mandatory N A not applicable in the given context the specification makes it impossible to use this capability Provision mandatory process mandatory means that the indicated feature service or procedure shall be implemented as described in the present document and may be subject to testing Provision optional process mandatory means that the indicated feature service or procedure may be implemented and if implemented the feature service or procedure shall be implemented as described in the present document an
162. e eee st deel pees eet AG len Ae eee ee 118 7 4 11 3 4 Field EP IP address type es ccstsspccs ck ssendges ced ci Saeed ep eee ten E he eta eee beers pees theese 118 7 4 11 3 5 Field FP IP address value oo cece eeseecceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeceecsseceaecsaecsaecaaecnaseseseaeeseeeeeeeseseseensaesaaeeas 118 7 4 11 3 6 Field FP IP address subnet mask ee eeceecesecesecesecssecaeecaeeeaeseaeeeeeeeeeeseeseesesaeeeseseenaeeeas 119 7 4 11 3 7 Field FP IP address gateway niee ionin reien Sree reer Krn eere irea rpi peeo Ke onesna 119 7 4 11 3 8 Field FP IP address DNS serverone ire ie eanne eee ien er ie u e arosto 120 7 4 11 3 9 Field FP version Firmware Version eseeeseeesesseeessesrssreeresrerrsstrtesresresteseertnstsreerrenesreereseesreet 120 7 4 11 3 10 Field FP version Eeprom Version eseeseeeseesesseesesreerssesresesreeresrerrsserrrstesteetesrertesrereseeereseesreet 120 7 4 11 3 11 Field FP version Hardware version field ee ee ceeecesecesecnseceecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseceseensesaeeees 120 TAALA Line settings USt cidron nranti neie a dee sch cvasd subs Gola dbens Sauk dvecnsth cutie ce PRSES E E E EEAS 121 7 4 11 4 1 Field Time pame 3 22 si ses cee oeeie econo n e Ea Co ETE SENA ble E E O EE SEENE k KREEK owes 121 7 4 11 4 2 Field imei iis scretasgishis each aena e a E ah ni a Rae ance eee ands 121 7 4 11 4 3 Field Attached Handsets siriene ielesessusccvidasinte es paved asneeushavieeouniohovecbvacne
163. e following value for the lt Call class gt field of the lt lt Basic service gt gt IE Internal call setup for access to the list of internal names Normal call setup for access to the missed calls list outgoing calls list all calls list incoming call accepted list and contact list Service call setup for access to the system settings list and the line settings list If a call is already setup internal or external call the system shall continue to use the same connection for the list access session NOTE 1 Before starting the list access session the PP may put the existing call on hold see clause 7 4 3 5 8 to indicate to the FP that the speech path is suspended during the list access session ETSI 91 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Interactions with incoming or outgoing voice call When initiating a list access session when a voice call internal or external is already ongoing The PP May put the existing call on hold see clause 7 4 3 5 8 prior to list access However if the list access session is intended to establish an other voice call the PP shall either Put the first voice call on hold prior to the list access session see clause 7 4 3 5 8 Use the outgoing parallel call initiation procedure see clause 7 4 3 5 1 and access the list within this new call When initiating a voice call during a list access session If the lt Call class gt is Internal call setup and the call
164. e format is IPv6 16 bytes long The FP IP address DNS server field shall always have a length of 4 bytes IPv4 or 16 bytes IPv6 See the IP address value field for more information The length of the field shall be set to zero when the value of the field is not specified by the user The FP IP address DNS server field may be included several times in the entry main server and alternate server 7 4 11 3 9 Field FP version Firmware version The firmware version field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier FP version Firmware version 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 X x xX X X x xX 3 1 character byte 4 2 character byte 5 Characters shall be coded as defined for UTF 8 7 4 11 3 10 Field FP version Eeprom version The Eeprom version field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier FP version Eeprom version 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 X X X xX X X xX 3 1 character byte 4 2 character byte 5 7 4 11 3 11 Field FP version Hardware version field The Hardware version field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier FP version Hardware version 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 X X X xX X X X 3 1 character byte 4 2 character byte 5 Characters shall be coded as defined
165. e subtype Call identifier value assigned call id gt gt gt OR Line selected by PP for the call lt lt MULTI KEYPAD using the KEYPAD method lt Keypad info 23 3u H gt gt gt external call only CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION if PP implements NG1 N 13 lt id type subytpe Call identifier value assigned call id gt Figure 4 Outgoing parallel call initiation request with line selection by the PP Line selection If the PP implements the Line identification procedure and the new call is external it shall send the line identifier for the line it has selected for the new call see figure 4 unless it uses FP managed line selection see clause 3 1 and figure 5 NOTE 2 Instead of the sequence given above the PP might also combine 15 17H line selection and called number in two or three messages In these cases the FP will answer correspondingly in two or more messages See clauses C 3 Multiple calls diagrams and C 4 Parallel call complex or alternative diagrams for more information FP managed line selection If FP managed line selection is used see figure 5 the FP shall notify back the PP of the selected line for the call regarless of whether the PP implements the Line identification feature or not However it shall not send such a notification to a GAP PP NOTE 3 A PP not implementing the Line id
166. e taken into account Possible further requests concerning this call and coming from the same or other PPs shall be ignored ETSI 73 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP1 FP Network CC SETUP CC SETUP ACK call deflection request CC INFO lt lt KEYPAD 1C 38 15 H number gt gt if request accepted CC RELEASE CD activation if request rejected example CC CONNECT Figure 26 Call deflection invocation when the deflected to party is external PP1 FP PP2 CC SETUP CC SETUP ACK call deflection request CC INFO lt KEYPAD 1C 38 17 H number gt if request accepted CC SETUP lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER gt gt see note CC SETUP ACK CC RELEASE CC RELEASE COM SS PT if request rejected example CC CONNECT Figure 27 Call deflection invocation when the deflected to party is internal NOTE 1 The Call Control message sequences in figures 26 and 27 should be understood as examples The real sequences may also contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents NOTE 2 lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER3 gt gt is the deflected remote party calling party number It could also be sent in a CC INFO message ETSI 74 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 5 Line identification 7 4 5 1 Line identification general requirements Line identifiers are used to identify the line on which an ex
167. e used for the call 7 4 10 5 1 7 If the entry is related to all lines in the system the field Line id subtype shall be set to All lines 7 4 10 5 8 Internal names list entry fields This list contains the names of registered PPs of the complete DECT system Table 57 Internal names list entry fields Field identifier Field Normative action comment oxo Number _ Terminal identity number 7 4 10 5 1 2 see note Name of the internal party 7 4 10 5 1 3 NOTE Clause 7 4 10 5 1 2 1 speficies the coding of terminal identity numbers One and only one entry per terminal identity number shall exist in the Internal names list If a PP attempts to save an entry with an already existing Number field the FP shall reject it with negative acknowledgement with reject reason content not accepted When a PP registers to the FP the FP shall automatically add a corresponding entry in the internal names list see clause 7 4 10 5 10 7 4 10 5 9 DECT system settings list entry fields See clause 7 4 11 3 7 4 10 5 10 Line settings list entry fields See clause 7 4 11 4 7 4 10 6 Generic sequence charts for list access See clause C 1 1 for examples of sequence charts for list access 7 4 10 7 Use case examples for list access See clause C 1 2 for examples of use cases for list access 7 4 11 DECT system and line settings 7 4 11 1 DECT system and line settings considerations DECT system and line settings sh
168. eatures and services defined in TS 102 527 1 21 shall be provided NOTE 1 The FP may detect the type of PP by means of the Information Element lt Terminal Capability gt provided at registration NOTE 2 It should be noted that New Generation DECT part 1 PPs may have a more relaxed requirement of TCLw than New Generation DECT part 3 devices Note 2 of clause 7 1 1 may be also applicable this case For more information refer to EN 300 175 8 8 annex E 7 1 4 Backward compatibility with New Generation DECT part 1 Requirements for NG DECT part 3 Portable Parts PPs registered on NG DECT part 1 FPs The PP shall use the part 1 standard procedures TS 102 527 1 21 in front of NG DECT part 1 FPs 7 2 Generic Access Profile GAP procedures Unless otherwise noted all procedures defined in EN 300 444 12 GAP are automatically applicable to New Generation DECT wideband speech Therefore the present document can be considered an extension of GAP 7 3 New Generation DECT part 1 Wideband Speech procedures The present document is defined as an extension of New Generation DECT part 1 Wideband Speech 21 Unless otherwise noted all procedures defined in TS 102 527 1 21 New Generation DECT part 1 Wideband Speech are automatically applicable to New Generation DECT part 3 Extended Wideband Speech Services The clauses 7 4 to 7 10 describe the additional procedures specific for New Generation DECT part 3 Extended wideband s
169. ebapp etsi org IPR home asp Pursuant to the ETSI IPR Policy no investigation including IPR searches has been carried out by ETSI No guarantee can be given as to the existence of other IPRs not referenced in ETSI SR 000 314 or the updates on the ETSI Web server which are or may be or may become essential to the present document Foreword This Technical Specification TS has been produced by ETSI Project Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DECT The present document is based on EN 300 175 parts 1 1 to 8 8 and EN 300 444 12 General attachment requirements and speech attachment requirements are based on EN 301 406 11 replacing TBR 006 i 2 and EN 300 176 2 10 previously covered by TBR 010 i 3 Further details of the DECT system may be found in TR 101 178 i 1 The present document has been developed in accordance to the rules of documenting a profile specification as described in ISO IEC 9646 6 13 The information in the present document is believed to be correct at the time of publication However DECT standardization is a rapidly changing area and it is possible that some of the information contained in the present document may become outdated or incomplete within relatively short time scales The present document is part 3 of a multi part deliverable covering the New Generation DECT as identified below Part 1 Wideband speech Part 2 Support of transparent IP packet data Part 3 Extended
170. econd or further call on the same PP If the DECT system is busy but implicit call intrusion is enabled by configuration clause 7 4 3 8 1 shall be used instead of the Busy system or line notification procedure clause 7 4 6 3 7 4 8 2 2 Line set in multiple call mode On a multiple call line configured in multiple call mode several calls may be active simultaneously second and further calls are presented to all PPs idle or busy The following table details the procedures to be used Table 24 Line set in multiple call mode Incoming call setup Outgoing call setup On all idle PPs GAP 8 12 Incoming call request shall be used GAP 8 2 Outgoing call request shall be used attached to the line see note 1 see note 2 On all busy PPs Call waiting indication see clause 7 4 3 5 2 Outgoing parallel call initiation attached to the line shall be used see notes 3 4 and 5 clause 7 4 3 5 1 shall be used see notes 2 and 3 NOTE 1 Unless the DECT system is busy see clause 7 4 6 3 although the line was not in which case the call is not presented NOTE 2 If the DECT system is busy the Busy system or line notification procedure see clause 7 4 6 3 must be used back NOTE 3 All Common parallel calls procedures then apply for handling the parallel calls The fully parallel calls are in this case only alternatively active as for PSTN double calls NOTE 4 Ona multiple call line with VoIP interfacea
171. ed link for the purpose of transmitting the FACILITY message containing the lt lt Time Date gt gt information element to the peer entity It is the responsibility of the entity to ensure that time and date information within the peer entity is up to date If there is no existing connection when sending the FACILITY message the CLSS procedure may be used as defined in clause 10 4 2 3 of EN 300 175 5 5 with the lt lt TimeDate gt gt information element in the FACILITY message Whatever the FACILITY transport mode CLSS procedure or re use of already established link the FACILITY message shall be used with dummy transaction identifier value 6 and the protocol discriminator CISS For the values used in lt lt TIME DATE gt gt information element see table 16 Table 16 Values used within FACILITY message for date and time synchronization Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE fee eg Fl I lt Coding gt Bd 1 Time and Date kinterpretation gt O The current time date Tiedt gt AN eS o Upon reception of a FACILITY message with a content as defined in table 16 the peer entity shall set its time and date information to the received one The date and time on FP side is called DECT system date and time in the following text The FP and PP shall both support the FT initiated Date and Time synchronization procedure of clause 7 4 2
172. ed number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt Figure C 16 Second outgoing call on the line or system ETSI 162 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 4 Parallel calls complex or alternative diagrams This annex illustrates use cases of the Common parallel call procedures feature NG1 N 7 that are not described in the main part of the standard see figures of clause 7 4 3 5 but require clarification and gives guidelines for implementation More specifically it includes Alternative use cases Limit or complex use cases that may not happen so often but illustrate the philosophy of the standardized procedures NOTE Clauses C 2 and C 3 deal with Multiple lines and Multiple calls specific use cases e g not applicable in the PSTN double call case C 4 1 Call identification for outgoing parallel calls This clause shows variants of the Outgoing parallel call initiation diagrams presented in the procedure itself see clause 7 4 3 5 1 that correspond to variant use cases In all the diagrams presented the call id is sent by the FP as soon as possible and even if the line id is not known at this stage so that it can be used by the PP in all subsequent messages concerning that call for messages that use the call id when available C 4 1 1 Allin one PP message
173. eeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeseessecsaecsaecsaecaeeeeees 41 7 Procedure description nnna Gidea Sessa seeded AR LA nati A Le cede 41 7 1 Backward compatibility with Generic Access Profile GAP and with New Generation DECT part 1 wideband speech equipment se cinema a a a a sued aa aa ie Ea oa R ea aaa 41 7 1 1 Backward compatibility with Generic Access Profile GAP Requirements for NG DECT part 3 Haxed Parts BPS AAEE E A vase Sneed sd ties A eta cheeses toast E CET soon hea TVR E tet 41 ETSI 7 4 3 5 7 4 3 5 1 7 4 3 5 2 7 4 3 5 3 7 4 3 5 4 7 4 3 5 5 7 4 3 5 6 7 4 3 5 7 7 4 3 5 8 7 4 3 5 9 7 4 3 5 10 7 4 3 5 11 7 4 3 6 7 4 3 6 1 7 4 3 6 2 7 4 3 6 3 7 4 3 6 4 7 4 3 6 5 7 4 3 7 7 4 3 8 7 4 3 8 1 7 4 3 8 2 7 4 3 9 7 4 3 9 1 7 4 3 9 2 17 4 4 7 4 4 1 7 4 4 1 1 74 4 2 7 4 5 7 4 5 1 7 4 5 2 7 4 5 2 1 7 4 5 2 2 7 4 5 2 3 7 4 5 2 4 7 4 5 3 7 4 5 3 1 7 4 5 3 2 4 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Backward compatibility with Generic Access Profile GAP Requirements for NG DECT part 3 Portable Parts PPs registered on GAP compliant FPS 00 0 0 cece ecceesceseceseceseceseceecaecnaecaaecaeecaeseaeeeeeees 42 Backward compatibility with New Generation DECT part 1 Requirements for NG DECT part 3 Fixed Parts RPS ics icccce oechscbed ccd ecg ex te Sabc cave gence oe keea tes seban veo ea usu ved oh aa obeud ovo edad da Lean Se nee deeee shade tine ash eens Beebe 42 Backward compatibility with New Generation DECT part 1 R
174. eeenseensecseeaeeees 126 7 6 1 MAC Services rn ee n E A E E A E T A Salen 126 7 6 2 Frame formats and multiplexers enan a r R E E inthe 127 7 6 3 Downlink broadcast ssis Sesssstevsesses conesseebs ates cheabece sisbus es sapunsnves oysden chpedeatensbiven RES E ea TE sips EES E S E ESE 127 7 6 3 1 ING IMCS SABES E EE E E E 127 7 6 3 2 Qr Static system ANFOTMALI ON osios es EE RETE AEE E E A EAE 127 7 6 3 3 Qr Fixed Part capabilities ienen E E G T E a 127 7 6 3 4 Qr Extended Fixed Part capabilities s soere riean ai aea E i e a E REE 127 7 6 3 5 Qr Extended Fixed Part capabilities part 2 esessesseesseeseseeeseerssrerrrsestesrssterreserrrnestrnresrenresrerrseee 127 7 6 3 6 Qr SAR list contents neea ee E iid a E aa E r E rE EEE 128 7 6 4 P gijg DrOadCASE s eissistes Aasesscesshadnes vesassessavaetes copabe ch raer EEr T ooe TEES En E EES a TE EEE EE ES EEEE 128 7 6 5 NO CMUSION Mode gerir ern aa e Ere EE E ao E Eo aa Ei ESE E EE E S seein Ei 128 7 7 Physical layer PHI requirement 2 csecsiessseasoeseasssssteiseseecseesscebedes cheseeccebbiocpeaeenaciesetsepcbpesseceseesbeponnsaees 128 7 71 Modulatie rre SE EE aee E cee hau ives cases EE A Er EEEE O E 128 7 7 2 Slot type Physical packets s2cs e5 s ssyesscessnesoes copesecoesstbnes stedseceubey eer rs rE EES S EE EEES Se E EE 128 7 8 Requirements regarding the speech transSMission eee eeeeeceeeceseceecesecesecseecaeecseeeaeseeeseeeeereesseeseseseenseeees 128 7 8 1
175. eeesseensecaecsseeeneeeas 179 C 6 3 1 Use case incoming voice call during list access previous connection released eee ee eee eeeeeeteeeeee 179 C 6 3 2 Use case incoming call during list access managed as a parallel call previous session ended 180 C 6 3 3 Use case incoming voice call during list access managed as parallel call previous session not ended e in Shanta E E AE ea EA chev ihsencobebecesenducud cotehecdtussesnscpiieecouessucedentebe des eanitecvecbinies 181 C 7 DECT system settings diagrams noiire droion isvin ana iatera E ETERA EEEE E EEE EE E E ae 181 C 7 1 Generalia s55 sits sche rae nets EEE A ove T EAEE E tones deshOuncbenssdoveroannn teas stevaaateested oobebevaveseunsbexs 181 C 7 2 Moditying the PIN Cod iscsc sssesssbessiss ce ensesscevssiscescnptastossasecpeeseasdeesiates cops csdvebeysoes casbasdteabisbensayesedh Soveesgenep sheet 181 C 7 3 Resetting the bases rna nn ei an eee aioe inte ea a eae ae 183 CS LIME Sein GS diagrams essiri hctseeta betes hen da E E EE E cabaguds eaten vesegounesiasae ck 184 C 8 1 Gemetal EE E E desde ETE EEE E TEE EE vedere eden sant eee agente dates 184 C 8 2 Changing the settings OF alec siessen raene ae dave cucedsnsdhd patches R Neo EEE Se SeS EERE SSE a 184 C 8 3 Changing the name ofa Inesi cause aape ee eee aa ee aea al devs o oae Spa Sese S pen Ee ESEE ES Seo de 187 Annex D informative Services and features defined in other specifications csscss
176. een released in the mean time the call transfer shall fail but the currently active call shall still be released When implementing the Call transfer feature the FP shall set bit a3 of the Extended higher layer capabilities part 2 see EN 300 175 5 5 clause F 3 Consistently with the above description bit a3 must also be set ETSI 7 4 3 6 1 An 61 nounced call transfer procedure ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 For the Announced call transfer procedure all requirements of clause 7 4 3 6 apply Additionally if the control code is sent after the CC CONNECT allowing for a transient call with the targeted PP the transfer is defined as announced PP1 Ignored if the PP does not implement the Call identification feature Ignored if the PP does not implement the Call identification feature Line of the transferred call if external if the PP implements the Call identification feature call 1 established external or internal Try to establish parallel internal call 2 CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD 17H terminal id number gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value id for call 2 H gt gt gt ring back tone CC INFO lt lt SIGNAL value 01 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subty
177. ees 82 PRE PEQUISILES cise Series Sees ein a SB Se eet RAS I Se A Ae NS 82 Minimum requirements 20 0 0 ee cee a Ere ea a a rE e E a s 82 Terminal attachment and line settings ee ee cee eeceeeceseceseceseceeecaeecaeeeseseaeeeeesseeeseeeseeseeaeesaeesaereas 82 Initial attachment 1s6 0335 ee Shiota ee AS eS AE Se A es 83 Attachment modification i s ronpi ante cochacbouseuscnsuhe dcadsacusch subs ce chsthsesch dubuasencueessenseduees 83 TAME SEU SS isei e ern aveecuse avec AE e e Ee end dioniel ab EE etd ate aA ees 83 Incoming and outgoing external calls on a multiple line system 00 0 eee eee eeee cee cnsecnsecseeeseeeneeees 83 Internal calls in multiple line context oo lee eee ceeeceseceseceseceaecnaecaeecaeecaeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseesseeaa 83 Compatibility with non multiple line PP or FP oo eee cee cesecsecnse cee ceeecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseesseeaeeeea 84 Non multiple line PP in front of a multiple line FP oo ccc cee ceeecseecneeseecaeecaeeeaeeeeeeneensees 84 Non multiple line FP in front of a multiple line PP oo cee cee esse cree cneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeneenaees 84 Multiple call line handling 3 iss ce cesccssse ce casevees u3ece ecbaashove cased des cbesns ch evcusanes ce anne te EEEE EEE EESE ESEE 84 Multiple calls general requirements 00 0 eee eeeeeeceeeceeceseeecesecaecsaecsaecaeecaeeeaeseeeseeeeesenseenseseseeaeeeea 84 Pre requisites neisi een e eenen eoin cdtasch cus G subs O EE aK EE EE a ele a ot OGL Sea ane 85 Minim
178. eessecsaecsaecsaecaaeeaeeeeens 140 B 1 5 Event notification for Missed call notification 0 cece eseeeeeeeceeeeeeseesecesecesecscesecsecsaecsaecsaecseeseeeeeees 140 B 2 Date time synchronization diagrams ee eeeeseesecssecsseceseecseeceaecaeceseceseceseeeseeeseeseneseaeeeaeesseesaaeenaees 141 B 2 1 Date time synchronization when there is no existing CONNECTION eeeeeeeceenceceseceeneeceseeeeneeceeeeeneecetreeeneees 141 B 2 2 Date time synchronization during existing CONNECTION eeeceeeceesseceeeeceseceeneeceseeeeneecseeeeneeceeeeeaeeceteeeeaees 141 B 2 3 Date time synchronization when the PP is switched OM eee eeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeesecesecesecaecsaecsaecaeesseeeneeeneens 142 B 2 4 Date time synchronization using Call connection 0 0 0 ceeseesseceeeeeceseceeneecaececeecaecesneecsueceeaeecsaeeeeaeecnaeeeesnee 142 B 3 List access service basic sequence Ciara ceeeseeseeseecssecsseceseceseceseceseeeseeeseeseneeeaeeeseeeseeeaaeenaees 142 B 3 1 Start end session when PP is in idle mode 0 00 eeeecceeeececesssececseceececeeeeceesaececsesaececsaeeceesaececseseeeeeseseeeeneaaes 143 B 3 2 Start end session when a call is already established to PP 00 ees eeeeeeseeceseeeeseceseeecaeceseeecaeceeneecaeceeneeenaaeees 144 B 3 3 Query Supported Entry elds rrain e BEEE eds EEEE N AE enveshcdondennnasep auch utiles EENE aA 144 B 3 4 Read EA ES asics ae e ee a R a E e e ORE a En a oe oa pieni 145 B 3 5 KON E AA T AE EOE AE E RE TE
179. eiiesd subcebadencusdinheees 122 7 4 11 4 4 Field Dialling Prefix ererek renti eienen eee ee eea a nen a ea Ate ie aie 122 7 4 11 4 5 Field FP melody ones om eese aroro seh e ea e a TE ds ob he E de EEEE EENE kE KIR EKER EE 122 7 4 11 4 6 Field FP volume mosii onneen ee eee ee 122 7 4 11 4 7 Field Blocked number sitesine onon A e ani ee E E teks EEE Ee eiia een 123 7 4 11 4 8 Field Multiple calls mode can be contained several times in one entry essseesseeesrerrereerrerrrreree 123 7 4 11 4 9 Field Intrusion callern ienen eee eneee oe oE ENAKE ETE EEEE SEKERE EE EKA SSE 123 7 4 11 4 10 Field Permanent GLIR uronte eiren neie ee E EEE TEA E oa ees ee e ESEE ease 124 7 4 11 4 11 Pield Call forwardin eo s cc0 scsenscisaasceuseessevastestiegneetoihl a T E E E E 124 7 4 11 5 Virtual contact list and call list pert Inep rosisenennan n e E RE E 124 7 4 12 Calling line identity restriction CLIR sinens a R E E a 125 7 4 12 1 Considefations eioen i e E E E A EN A E E A E R E RE 125 7 4 12 2 Permanent CLIR mode all Calls cccceccsccecsssecesssececseseececseececsesaeeecseeeeecseeecseaeeecseeeeeesesueeeesenaeess 125 7 4 12 3 Temporary CLIR mode call Dy Call sicesesscsissitectcayseessecusieesceuseeah a R toate bande 126 Ta Data Link Control DLC layer procedures innsent inna e E a E E N 126 7 5 1 DEC SerVICES one A A E A E A Sleiman ae 126 7 6 Medium Access Control MAC layer procedures ec eceeccescesecesecesecesecsaecaeecseeeaeseeeeeee
180. element allows to send several identifiers of the same type and subtype Such a set of line identifiers shall only be sent if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled 1 The notification is broadcasted to all PPs and every line in the set is concerned with all of the event types notified NOTE 2 A simple way to achieve it is either to have the lt lt EVENTS NOTIFICATION gt gt information element only contain a notification for a single type of event or to have the set of lines reduced to a single line NOTE 3 This condition allows a PP to ignore a notification that does not mention a line it is not attached to Conversely if a line is mentioned all event types notified are relevant for this line A PP can therefore always alert the user for an event type before querying the corresponding event list on the FP 2 The notification is only sent to PPs attached to all lines in the set not excluding attachments to lines outside this set and every line in the set is concerned with at least one of the events notified NOTE 4 This condition ensures that a PP will never query an event list on the FP for nothing It should however query the concerned event list before alerting the user for an event type to be able to also notify the line s on which events of this type occurred ETSI 79 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP attached to any line s Ongoing call internal or external FACILITY lt lt EVENTS NOTIF
181. ement in the CC SETUP message as an addition to GAP 12 clause 8 12 Incoming call request The FP shall notify the line identifier used even if there is only one line in the system and even if the PP is attached to only one line ETSI 78 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP attached at least to line u FP Network Incoming call to line u from calling number CC SETUP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt gt gt Figure 31 Line identification for a first external incoming call 7 4 5 4 Line specification in events notification This procedure applies to the FP and a PP implementing the Generic events notification procedure of clause 7 4 1 and including clause B 1 As an addition to the Generic events notification procedure of clause 7 4 1 a FP using the present procedure shall send a set a line identifiers along with the events notification This set of line identifiers shall be sent in a lt lt CALL INFORMATIONS gt gt information element along with the lt lt EVENTS NOTIFICATION gt gt information element in the same FACILITY message For each of these line identifiers the lt Identifier type gt field shall be Line identifier and the lt Identifier subtype gt field shall be relating to NOTE 1 The lt lt CALL INFORMATIONS gt gt information
182. ending the line id NOTE 2 As Call identification is mandatory for Part 3 FPs the call identifier notification is represented although it is somehow independent of the Multiple lines feature The line identifier is repeated in the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt IE used for that notification as a result of the call information completeness principle C 2 2 2 3 Line identification by PP immediately followed by call number e g pre dialling Use case the PP selects a line on a call by call basis using here lt lt CALL INFORMATIONS gt gt IE and immediately sends the called number without waiting for the call id This use case applies when pre dialling is used when re dialling is used or when the call is placed after phone book look up NOTE Use of the lt lt CALLED PARTY NUMBER gt gt in the CC SETUP is not considered as it is not used in GAP and part 3 relies on GAP ETSI 153 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP Network CC SETUP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Use of line u for calling called number CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt
183. ent When using the present procedure a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element shall be used for conveying the line identifier information this information element shall be included in the CC SETUP message as an addition to procedure Outgoing call request of GAP 12 clause 8 2 ETSI 75 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Table 19 Values used within the CC SETUP message when the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt method is used for conveying the line identifier information Information element Field within the Standard values within the Normative action comment information element non clement element lt lt Call information gt gt lt Identifier type gt o Code for Line identifier identifier type lt ldentifier subtype gt Code for Line identifier for external calls subtype lt Identifier value gt Als Thee line identifier value itself PP FP Network attached to line u CC SETUP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt gt gt CC INFO lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Use of line u for calling called number Figure 28 Line identification for a first external outgoing call using the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt method NOTE The Call Control message sequence in figure 28 shou
184. ented to the called party The CLIR service may be provisioned in a permanent for all outgoing calls or a temporary mode call by call basis 7 4 12 2 Permanent CLIR mode all calls This procedure allows a user to enable or to disable the presentation of its calling line identification for all following outgoing calls for a specified line To enable respectively disable the permanent CLIR mode the user shall set respectively reset the Permanent CLIR field of the specified line in the Line settings list see the List access service feature NG1 N 16 When this mode is enabled respectively disabled the FP shall invoke the permanent mode by sending the permanent CLIR activation respectively deactivation request to the network for the specified line NOTE 1 The current procedure does not state anything about the availability or not of the service on Network side PP1 Permanent CLIR FP Network invocation on line u line settings start session line u settings Permanent CLIR field set to 31H line settings end session Use of line u for sending a Permanent CLIR invocation Figure 41 Permanent CLIR mode invocation When the permanent mode is deactivated it shall be always possible to use the temporary mode NOTE 2 It should be noted that the permanent mode can also be provisioned by using the temporary mode for each call When implementing the Permanent CLIR mode all calls procedure the
185. entication failed Recommended user action wait then try again Registration success state Condition of entrance protocol procedure is complete and successful Recommended user action try to make an outgoing call request The proposed user feedback with corresponding user interface allows user to check that registration on the correct FP was successful This is an additional security especially in the case of the easy pairing procedure which is less secure than the PIN code registration procedure The user should be aware that during the registration mode unwanted PP could join the FP The user should be instructed to monitor the user interface especially to check the success indication on both sides for security considerations This verification will prevent the PP from joining a FP that was not selected or to prevent an other PP from joining the selected FP Type of user interface is left free to implementers For example the user interface could be a display on the PP side and a LED on the FP side It could also be an audio tone indication or any other richer user interface displays on both sides for example 7 10 2 Handset locator On FP side a software or hardware button shall trigger this procedure The FP shall present an incoming external call to all PPs registered to the FP Incoming call used at NWK level is the GAP NWK feature N8 Incoming call The FP shall send the information element lt lt Calling Party Name
186. entification feature i e a PPs compliant with NG DECT Part 1 TS 102 527 1 21 GAP EN 300 444 12 and PPs compliant with the present document not implementing the feature or a GAP PP also implicitly uses FP managed line selection Busy tone signal If the line or the FP cannot support the additional call it shall not send any call information and send a busy tone signal instead ETSI 51 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP Ongoing call external or internal Outgoing call initiation with Line selection by the PP not FP managed Outgoing CC INFO parallel call invitation lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 15 17 H gt gt gt Call id assignement by the FP CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION possibly ignored if PP does not implement lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value assigned call id gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION if PP implements NG1 N 13 lt id type subtype Call identifier value assigned call id gt FP managed line selection CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION Repeated here as a result of the lt id type Line identifier subtype external call CALL INFO completion principle value u gt I possibly ignored if PP does not implement lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value assigned c
187. entifier gt Session identifier see note Content first byte ee eee nea Content last byte NOTE _ Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 Data packet last is used if no more data will be sent for this response Data content is structured as follows ETSI 108 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Table 50 Data content structure in the Data packet command element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt Length see note lt EntryfieldcontentO gt O T ste i ae ese lt Entry field content i gt E oaae lt Eniry field identifier 2 gt 0 255 ETS e o y O O y lt Entry field identifier n gt 0 255 o Raa te el lt Entry field length gt 0 127 Length see note lt Entry field content 0 gt te el Se ea lt Entry field content j gt ee ee e eee lt Entry identifier for 2 entry gt 1 127 Identifier of the entry see note lt Entry length gt 0 127 Length see note eS ae ree E ee Continues with further entries NOTE _ Entry identifier entry length and entry field length can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80
188. enting Line identification should always perform line selection unless it uses FP managed line selection in the purpose of simplifying the user experience If attached to a single line it can send the line id without user intervention so that the user experience cannot be simplified further ETSI 155 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 2 2 3 GAP PP C 2 2 3 1 Line identification by GAP PP with backward compatible mechanism Use case the PP selects a line using lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt IE A GAP handset will not receive any lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt element PP FP Network attached to line u e 1 9 CC SETUP CC INFO Use of line u for calling called number lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 23 3u H gt lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Figure C 7 Line identification by GAP PP with backward compatible mechanism C 2 2 3 2 No line identification by GAP PP FP managed line selection Use case the line is selected by the FP using the Attached handsets parameter of lines settings A GAP handset will not receive any lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt element PP FP Network attached to line u e 1 9 CC SETUP lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt Selects u among lines attached to PP Use of line u for calling called number Figure C 8 No line identification by GAP PP FP managed line selection C 2 2 4 NG DECT
189. equest Figure 38 Busy system or line notification for call with defined call id 3 NOTE 4 The call identifier may be sent here even if the PP did not receive it before Ignored on PP side if the PP does not implement the Call identification feature 7 4 9 PP and FP capabilities indication and broadcast 7 4 9 1 Terminal capability indication NOTE 0 This procedure description replaces clause 8 17 of EN 300 444 GAP 12 The PP shall be able to send the lt lt Terminal capability gt gt information element and the FP shall be able to receive it at least in ACCESS RIGHTS REQUEST and when location registration is supported in the LOCATE REQUEST The following text together with the associated clauses define the mandatory requirements with regard to the present document Table 25 Values used within the lt lt TERMINAL CAPABILITY gt gt information element Information Field within the Standard values within the Normative action comment element information element field information element lt lt Terminal lt Tone capability gt All capability gt gt lt Display capability gt All If PT supports feature GAP N 24 it shall indicate in this field value which is equal to or higher than 2 Echo parameters 1 2 3 See note 1 Slot type capability All Full and long 640 slots mandatory double and long 672 optional See also note 2 Ambient noise Rejection 1 2 See note 2 N REJ Adaptive volume control 1 2 3 See note 2 A VOL
190. equirements for NG DECT part 3 Portable Parts PPs registered on NG DECT part 1 FPS oo eee ec ceeeeeeeceeeceseceseceseceaecnaecaeecaeeeaeeeneees 42 Generic Access Profile GAP procedures cesccceseeeesseceseeeesseceneeenseceeeecsaeceeeecsaeceneecsaeceeeeesaeeeeatecsaeeeeees 42 New Generation DECT part 1 Wideband Speech procedures ee ee ceecesecseceeeceeesseceecaeecneeeeeseneeeeeeenees 42 Implementation examples of part 1 Wideband Speech specific procedures 0 eee eee ese eseecreeeeeeeeeees 42 Network NWK layer procedures specific for part 3 oo eee ee cesecesecssecseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseensecsecsaecsaessaeeaaeeneees 42 Generic events notification sain ee ete sheen seh ie nb ea odgub cece eons r E E r E 43 Geemeral eE och seth Sevek E E Soa deu seach gis cosas dsSus E Otebecelves 43 Voice Message waiting notification eee esscesecsseceeceecssecesceecaeceeeeecsaeceneecsaeceneecsaeceaeecsaeceeeeeenaeeess 44 Missed call otific ti ns siseosas coiere scelagenche eneo eE Ee e EEE suis co bschevech EEA CE ISEE eseki 44 List Change NOU atin siete eei ea suds ea a a a a a E A a n el 44 Date and Time synchronization eee eceeceeeccesecesecesecaecseecaeecseseneeeeeeseseaeseaeeesessseeseesecsaecsaecsaecsaeeaeeeeens 45 FT initiated Date and Time synchronization cece cesecesecseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseesecsecaecsaecaeeseesaeenaa 45 PT initiated Date and Time synchronization eee cesecese esse ceeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeecese
191. er see clause 7 4 10 5 1 1 7 4 10 5 3 Missed call list entry fields This list contains all the missed calls occurring on any line of the DECT system Table 52 Missed call list entry fields Field identifier Field _ _ Normative action comment_ Clause _ 0x04 New Indicates whether entry is shown first 7 4 10 5 1 5 time ee e eee ee received ees aoe ee ne eee ol received Number of calls Indicates amount of missed calls 7 4 10 5 1 8 Be sr enema Jee The Missed call list may include internal calls e g if allowed by configuration Clause 7 4 10 5 1 2 1 describes the coding of terminal identity numbers ETSI 113 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 10 5 4 Outgoing call list entry fields This list contains all outgoing calls occurring on any line of the DECT system Table 53 Outgoing call list entry fields Field identifier Field _ _ Normative action comment__ Clause NOTE The Outgoing call list may include internal calls e g if allowed by configuration Clause 7 4 10 5 1 2 1 describes the coding of terminal identity numbers 7 4 10 5 5 Incoming accepted call list entry fields This list contains all the accepted incoming calls occurring on any line of the DECT system Table 54 Incoming accepted call list entry fields Field identifier ___Field___ Normative action comment__ Clause Name of line on which the call was 7 4 10 5 1 6 received ld of line line u
192. er has been sent by the FP to the PP e g even before a waiting call has been answered See also clause C 4 1 5 if the PP does not implement the Call identification feature the call release request shall be interpreted by both parties as a request for releasing the active call If the PP is the releasing party and implements the Line identification feature it shall still send the line identifier of the call to be released in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element included in the same CC INFO message If the FP is the releasing party it shall still send the line and call identifiers of the active call to be released in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element included in the same CC INFO message and regardless of whether the PP implements the Line identification feature or not If the released call is the active call the speech path shall be then automatically switched to one of the remaining parties PP FP lt lt Ons calls external or oa CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 33 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line of the call to be released lt id type Line identifier subtype external call if external see note 2 value line id of call to be released gt if the PP implements the Call identification feature lt id type subtype Call identifier value id of call to be released gt If call cannot be released CC INFO
193. es implementation of the Common parallel call procedures external or internal feature In case the PP is already involved in a call active call and after a call waiting has been indicated the acceptation of the waiting call shall be done by sending the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 35H Furthermore If the PP implements the Call identification feature it shall send the call identifier of the accepted waiting call in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element included in the same CC INFO message NOTE 2 A PP implementing the Call identification feature sends the call identifier of the waiting call even if there is a single call waiting If the PP implements the Line identification feature and the waiting call is external it shall send the line identifier of the waiting call in the same lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element even if it is attached to a single line NOTE 3 Ifthe call identifier is absent the line identifier may help determine the targeted call if the call identifier is present the line identifier is only added as a result of the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt completeness principle see clause 3 1 The active call shall be automatically put on hold and the waiting call shall become active ETSI 56 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 In multiple call mode when the PP accepts the waiting call ongoing procedures for handlin
194. essage waiting indication on a specific LMC ee ee ee ceee cee ceeecacense cece caeecaeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeesenseceseesseeeas 158 C3 Multipl calls diasramsicc ctscccu siccesstscaccbartesedebestateneetesatestes chotaacdatebaassdgsensdecuabatacsednbgadidenastoaeeabbscaesaeeds 158 C 3 1 First incoming call on the line or System eee eeeeeceeeceeeceeecesecsecsaecsaecssecseecseeeaesseecaeesseeeeesecesaesneeeas 158 C 3 2 Second incoming call on the line or system se eee ceeecseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesecsecsaecsaecsaecaaecseseaeseaeeeeseeecsaeonaes 158 C 3 3 First outgoing call on the line or SYSteM en eee ceeeeeeeeceeeceeecesecseceaecsaecsaecaeecaeeeaeseeeeseeseesseceseesaeeeseeeaeeeas 160 ETSI 8 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 3 4 Second outgoing call on the line or system oo eee cece ceeeceecseeeneeeeeeeeeeseeesecssecsaecsaecsaecsaecseeeaeseaeeeasenseenas 161 C 4 Parallel calls complex or alternative diagrams 0 ces eseessecssecsseceseceseceseceseceseeeseeseneeeaeeeaeeeseeenaeenaees 162 C 4 1 Call identification for outgoing parallel Calls oo lees cee eseeceeceecaeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeecesecsecaecsaecsaecsaeseeeeeees 162 C 4 1 1 All in one PP message line identification by PP oo eee cece cesecsecseecseecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseaeenseeens 162 C 4 1 2 All in one PP message FP managed line selection 00 0 cece cee cseeseeeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseenseceseeaeeees 163 C 4 1 3 Line pre selection by PP Manual dialling
195. estessestestssrertsrertssrerresertrseesrenresreereeesrt 18 5 6 Speech coding and audio feature definitions esssessseeesseeeesesesetsrrsrterrsrertssesttsrestentesterrssertrnestentesreereseeereetes 18 5 7 Application fe tUresS cinencis woes ask echoes Gand E ao ie ebb Wee ecko Seniesa a he anos eee 18 6 Inter operability requirements eee eseecsecsseceseceseceseceseesseeeseeesaeeeaeeeseecsaecsaecsaecsaeesseceseesseeeeeeeeneesaes 18 6 1 Gemerall EE eeagea tees eect EEEE 18 6 2 New Generation DECT Speech Services support status 00 0 0 eee eeceecesecesecesecsseceecaeecseeeseseaeeseeseeeeerenseesees 19 6 3 Services to DECT feature implementation MappiNgS ee cece eeeeeeeeeeceesceeeeesecesecaecsaecsaecseecaecsaecsaeeaeeeaeees 19 6 4 N WK features oenen oiaren ag aeeb ses Sec uaces r steep i EE E OE e thon apes E E TEE 28 6 5 Data Link Control DEC Services lt lt 035 estes e r teed coos seechad oes E A ace E E E E 29 6 6 Medium Access Control MAC services sscccccsssecessssceceensececesccecessaeeecsesaececssaeessesueeecsesaececseseecesaeeecneaeeees 30 6 7 Physical layer PHL Service Sss csssssascisdsces sisane ir eeo r is aE EE EEE EE an EEE EEEE Ayes tae eevee 30 6 8 Speech coding and audio features eee eceeceescesecesecesecaecaecsaecseecseceaeseaeeeeeeeceeessecesecssecsaecsaecsaeeaaeeneees 31 6 9 Application feature Sise e e E es daveb EEEE ape EA NRAN VITS eE AETR TAN qos deepened 32 6 10 Network NWK fe
196. etsi org chaircor ETSI_ support asp Copyright Notification No part may be reproduced except as authorized by written permission The copyright and the foregoing restriction extend to reproduction in all media European Telecommunications Standards Institute 2008 All rights reserved DECT PLUGTESTS UMTS TIPHON the TIPHON logo and the ETSI logo are Trade Marks of ETSI registered for the benefit of its Members 3GPP is a Trade Mark of ETSI registered for the benefit of its Members and of the 3GPP Organizational Partners ETSI 3 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Contents Intellectual Property RightS sniur eeren a cette cane ERA Leen re See eee eee A 10 OTE WOLGsis yscisdees a eT EE Waete alee dae hs celts etn Sh E ATE el ly ann wee ees lei ot Saleen cde 10 1 SCOPC EE E E AE shes ate wound faa ead oa eat Sees T oe Gaels es 11 2 REPETEN CES feo 2r6i select ce Peta cas Beacons he Ge Maden ty ca ESCs te Salt EA E OA vets Usd cebu AAO OOA 11 2 1 Normative references 2 25 iid 8 nei Ae Rei eed nde the Ra ee a is eae 12 2 2 Informative references e ste A ae iS SABE heh ee ee ee eee ee Rie aioe ded 13 3 Definitions symbols and abbreviations 000 0 eeceeceeseseeeesseeeseeeeneesseesseecaaeceaecsaecaecsaeceseeeeeeeeeeseneesaes 13 3 1 Definitions cssebsies sce heise taisces E aspen satis peeese de ive a S ETRE otra ae EEES ese 13 3 2 SYMIBOIS ss scesscbeishss dss sstesesaes ATTE EE ea svabeate E T 14 3 3 Abbreviations s
197. etting for every entry in the Line settings list corresponding to a targeted line and performed via the List access service feature NG1 N 16 7 4 7 2 3 Line settings The FP shall support the List access service feature NG1 N 16 and the Line settings list Apart from the Attached handsets setting itself a PP shall only be able to update the settings of the lines it is attached to 7 4 7 3 Incoming and outgoing external calls on a multiple line system This procedure applies to the FP and a PP attached to one or more line s If the PP is idle or in communication on the same line no specific requirement is needed Conversely if the PP is already in communication on another line specific requirements are needed The following table details the procedures to be used Table 23 Incoming and outgoing external calls on a multiple line system Incoming call on line A Outgoing call on line A All idle PPs All PPs attached to line A in communication on line A Usual mono line requirements apply see notes 1 and 2 Usual mono line requirements apply see notes 1 and 2 All PPs attached to line A and B in communication on line B but not A parallel incoming or outgoing call on another line A see note 3 Call waiting indication external or internal clause 7 4 3 5 2 shall be used see note 1 Outgoing parallel call initiation clause 7 4 3 5 1 shall be used see note 1
198. etting s by using an Edit entry command with following parameters session identifier entry identifier 1 1 to n field identifiers PIN code For security reasons the PIN code shall never be sent over the air on a non ciphered link Moreover the FP shall prevent a non allowed PP to save a new PIN code At least when accessing the PIN code setting of the DECT system settings list with any command the connection shall be ciphered and conditioned to correct PIN keyboarding i e for Read entries confirm Search entries confirm Edit entry confirm Save entry and Save entry confirm commands that includes the PIN code field in data packets The DECT link shall be ciphered prior to the command If this not the case the FP shall answer with a negative acknowledgement reject reason procedure not allowed see clause 7 4 10 4 9 Before saving a new PIN code the PP shall perform Edit entry on the PIN code and check that the return value matches the PIN code just entered by user Only after edit the PP may save the new PIN code value ETSI 116 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Access to the DECT system settings menu on the PP may be conditioned to prior PIN code keyboarding and may be completely in ciphered mode This is left free to the implementer Initial value The DECT system settings list unique entry is at position index 1 in the DECT system list First Line settings list entry is at posi
199. f the Common parallel call procedures external or internal feature In order to put a call on hold the PP shall send the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 41H Furthermore If the PP implements the Call identification feature it shall send the identifier of the call to be put on hold in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element included in the same CC INFO message NOTE 2 A PP implementing the Call identification feature sends the call identifier of the call to be put on hold although it is always the active call If the PP implements the Line identification feature and the call to be put on hold is external it shall send the line identifier of the call to be put on hold in the same lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element even if it is attached to a single line NOTE 3 Ifthe call identifier is absent the line identifier may help determine the targeted call if the call identifier is present the line identifier is only added a result of the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt completeness principle see clause 3 1 The FP may indicate the result of the present procedure by sending an appropriate lt lt DISPLAY gt gt information element in a CC INFO message to the PP PP FP Ongoing calls external or internal CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 41 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line of the call to be put on hold lt id
200. for the conference call If additional non initiating PPs are involved in the conference call the FP shall issue a call identifier update for each of them as shown in figure 19 NOTE 1 In a 3 party conference call all PPs involved in the conference share the same call identifier for the 3 party call The FP may change the codec using the service change procedure see clause 7 4 3 3 Codec change for parallel calls When implementing the Call transfer feature the FP shall set bit a3q of the Extended higher layer capabilities part 2 see EN 300 175 5 5 clause F 3 Consistently with the above description bit a3 must also be set PP FP Calls established CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD 1CH 32H gt gt Only ifthe PP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt implements ii i itin the Call identification lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt feature lt Identifier value active call id 3 party call id H gt gt gt Figure 19 3 party conference call establishment request If the PP is involved in more than 2 calls the FP shall warn the user by sending the lt lt SIGNAL gt gt information element with the value 09H indicating negative acknowledgement tone The release by the PP of one of the parallel calls shall not be possible in a conference However the FP could send a call release according to procedure Call release and call release rejection of
201. g the call on other PPs using the present clause or EN 300 444 GAP 12 clause 8 12 Incoming call request if it is a first call for the concerned PP shall be terminated In particular idle PPs shall stop ringing If several handsets either pick up or accept the waiting call only the first action shall be taken into account The other actions shall be ignored The FP may change the audio codec for the accepted call by use of the service change procedure PP FP Ongoing call external or internal Internal or external waiting call waiting fom calling number CW tone CC INFO heared by user lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt lt lt SIGNAL value call waiting tone 07 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line on which waiting call lt id type Line identifier subtype external call occurred if external see note 4 value waiting call line id gt Ignored if the PP does not implement lt id type Call identifier the Call identification feature value waiting call id gt gt gt In multiple call mode CC INFO other handsets stop lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 35 H gt gt ringing or receiving the CW indication lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line on which waiting call lt id type Line identifier subtype external call occurred if external See note 3 value waiting call line id gt If the PP im
202. gative acknowledgement reject reason entry not available If a PP attempts to save an entry with a field content which cannot be accepted e g for a field whose contents are only allowed once in the list like line id in the Line settings list the FP shall reject the command with a negative acknowledgement with reject reason content not accepted If a PP attempts to add a new entry in a list which cannot accept an additional entry the FP shall reject the command with a negative acknowledgement with reject reason list full 7 4 10 4 5 2 Save entry confirm command This command from FP confirms the save of one entry in a list and returns the position index where the entry was saved Table 41 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Save entry confirm command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWUs gt lt Length of content gt Length of content lt Protocol Discriminator gt lt Command save entry confirm gt lt Session identifier gt lt Entry identifier gt lt Position index gt NOTE _ Session identifier position index and entry identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 The position index indicates the
203. gement reject reason invalid session number If an unknown entry identifier of the list is requested except 0 the FP shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason entry not available If the PP requests delete entry for List of supported lists or DECT system settings list the FP shall answer with negative achnowledgement reject reason procedure not allowed 7 4 10 6 1 2 Delete entry confirm command This command from FP confirms the deletion of an entry in a list Table 43 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Delete entry confirm command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment Peer Cee pene tatiana ee ee lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt confirm gt ifi S lt Session identifier gt 1 127 ession identifier see note lt Total number of available 0 127 Number of available entries in list entries gt after deletion see note NOTE Total number of available entries and session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 7 4 10 4 7 Delete list 7 4 10 4 7 1 Delete list command This command from PP requests the deletion of a complete list Table 44 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Delete list command I
204. gt field value equal to the assigned call identifier ETSI 81 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 CC INFO PP FP lt lt CALL INFORMATION CC SETUP Store call in call table and assign call id lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value 03 H gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Figure 34 Example of call identifier assignment on outgoing call with call id 3 A service call call with lt Call class gt equal to BH shall also be assigned a call identifier However this call id is intended for the first outgoing voice call placed within this service call if any e g a service call may be setup for accessing the contact list on the FP which may be followed by an outgoing call setup within the same service call 7 4 6 3 Call identifier assignment on incoming call FP to PP The purpose of this procedure is to have the FP upon incoming call external or internal assign a unique call identifier and send it to the PP NOTE 1 The Handset locator feature uses a kind of incoming call to which the FP also assigns a call identifier In case of internal call the FP shall assign a single call identifier for both PPs A Call identifier for an incoming call shall be sent from FP to PP in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element in the CC SETUP message N
205. gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id 2 content part j gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry confirm session id 2 position index entry identifier xxH gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session session identifier 1 gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session confirm session identifier 1 gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session session identifier 2 gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session confirm session identifier 2 gt gt CC RELEASE OI CC RELEASE COM gt Figure C 26 List access use case transfer number from missed call list to contact list 2 2 The second session might also be established after release of the first session FP shall be capable to handle at least two sessions independently ETSI C 5 3 172 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Use case select and call internal party arin CC Setup IE lt lt BASIC_SERVICE lt Call Class Internal call setup gt gt gt CC Call Proc IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session internal names list Sorting field identifier number gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU amp start session confirm session identifier Total number Sorting field identifier number gt gt IWU Info SRR cc IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries session id start index counter list of field identifiers gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU
206. gt gt with the lt Presentation indicator gt field set to Handset locator value On PP side the call shall be presented as an incoming call If PP has ringing capabilities enabled the PP shall ring ETSI 136 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NOTE 1 It is recommended that the FP sends a CNIP with a name related to the current procedure for example Handset locator NOTE 2 The Handset locator value of lt Presentation indicator gt field in CNIP might be used by the PP to trigger the ringing even if it is disabled or to increase the ringer volume in that particular case Table 64 Values used within the CC SETUP or CC INFO message for handset locator internal call CNIP Information Field within the Standard values within the Normative action comment element a element e element lt lt Calling party name gt gt SSSR indicator gt r locator lt Used Alphabet gt lt Screeningindicator gt AWE lt Calling party name gt Handset locator for example The procedure is stopped when incoming call is accepted by one of the PPs In this case the FP shall immediately release the call on this particular PP and stops incoming call presentation to other PPs NOTE 3 Other possible stops of the procedure are out of the scope of the current specification For example the procedure could also be stopped 7 by pressing the button again on the FP side 7 by using a timer mechanism on FP side NOTE 4 The way the
207. h A O 52 SMa M Mii M 4 Basic connections er NS O 52 MIM SM Setup of basic connection basic bearer 10 4 setup A field M M 5 Cs higher layer signaling o Z o Z o o y O 52 Ms OM mM M 6 Quality control OO MM Antenna diversity 1901 m _ O O Sliding collision detection _ __ 1012 O M M M 7 Encryption activation Oooo S g M doa Encryption process initialization and 10 13 M M M synchronization Handover encryption process 10 15 M 8 Extended frequency E A allocation Extended frequency allocation 10 16 M 9 Bearer handover intra cell m c70 C701 M 10 Bearer handover inter cell _ _ ML OC OO M 11 Connection handover intra _ m C702 C702 cell M 12 Connection handover inter FT UM OL OO CT OO cell M 13 SARI support eM ofo po C703 C703 C703 M M M M 14 Encryption deactivation Encryption mode control C701 IF service M 11 THEN O ELSE M C702 IF service M 9 THEN O ELSE M C703 IF feature N 29 OR N 28 THEN M ELSE I C704 IF feature N 17 OR N 27 THEN M ELSE ETSI 203 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 D 3 4 GAP Application feature to procedure mapping table clause 6 8 4 of EN 300 444 Table D 4 Application feature to procedure mapping table table 8 of EN 300 444 Feature Procedure mapping Feature Procedure E ee E E A1 AC to bitsting mapping TL A 2 Multiple subscription pM aA
208. h the PP does not send any line identifier to the FP NOTE PPs implementing the Line identification feature may use this mode PPs not implementing the Line identification feature PPs compliant with NG DECT Part TS 102 527 1 GAP EN 300 444 and PPs compliant with the present document not implementing the feature are also said to always implicitly use FP managed line selection ETSI 14 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 line logical channel separately accessible from the external world through a dedicated external directory entry e g telephone number uri etc NOTE These lines may be of various types for example PSTN VoIP or ISDN lines multiple call line line supporting several simultaneous external calls NOTE An example of multiple call line is a VoIP line used with the SIP protocol multiple call mode configuration mode of a multiple call line from a DECT system point of view enabling several simultaneous incoming or outgoing calls on different PPs i e this possibility is not disabled by configuration new generation DECT further development of the DECT standard introducing wideband speech improved data services new slot types and other technical enhancements single call mode configuration mode of a multiple call line from a DECT system point of view in which the possibility of making several fully parallel call is temporarily disabled NOTE This mode may be useful for a user alone in the home This mod
209. h waiting call lt id type Line identifier subtype external call occurred if external value v gt lt id type subtype Call identifier value waiting call id call id 2 gt Both calls presented to PP1 through MMI If call with call id 1 is CC CONNECT accepted by the user If call with call id 2 is CC INFO accepted by the user lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 35 H gt gt i l lt lt CALL INFORMATION 4 lt id type Line identifier subtype external call value v gt i lt id type subtype Call identifier value call id2 gt i i l CC CONNECT a ENEE SAE EAT EER CC CONNECT ACK Call with call id 2 established Figure C 23 Incoming parallel calls Two incoming calls before user answers C 4 3 Call waiting represented as first call when user hangs up Use case the PP is attached to a multi call line A call is on going from PP1 A second incoming call is presented to the line The PP hangs up and the call is represented as a first incoming call ETSI 169 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP attached to FP Network multiple call line u Call established with call id 1 external or internal Incoming call from CC INFO calling number lt lt SIGNAL value call waiting tone 07 H gt gt lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMAT
210. hall broadcast the same values of higher layer attributes see EN 300 175 5 5 annex F at any given time The PP shall be capable to read and interpret at least the following broadcast attributes codings during locking procedure In the locked state the PP may assume them as static FP and PT shall support the following values of Higher Layer capabilities information attributes ETSI 89 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 9 2 1 Higher layer information in standard FP broadcast Qh 3 The requirements of clause 7 3 9 1 of TS 102 527 1 21 shall apply 7 4 9 2 2 Extended Higher Layer capabilities part 2 The Extended Higher Layer capabilities part 2 Fixed Part Information field shall be used indicating the supported set of Wideband speech Services Table 27 Extended Higher Layer Capabilities part 2 interpretation by the PP BIT Number Attribute Vaie Nts _ _ __ _ _ _ NG DECT Wideband voice See TS 102 527 1 21 supported supported lt 839 gt NG DECT extended voice 0 1 Related procedures clause 7 4 3 6 supported sets of services Call transfer external or internal lt 431 gt NG DECT extended voice 0 1 Related procedures clause 7 4 3 5 supported sets of services Common parallel call procedures internal or external lt 439 gt NG DECT extended voice 0 1 Related procedures clause 7 4 3 7 supported sets of services Third party conference call internal or external supported
211. he line tries to place an external outgoing call on a number which is blocked this call shall not be established by the FP The FP shall release the call This field may be contained several times in line settings entry This allows to block several numbers or ranges of numbers The number of times the field is included shall be defined at line setting entry creation See clause 7 4 10 4 5 list access Save entry command procedure for details how to handle several fields of the same type in the same entry The length of the field shall be set to zero when the value of the field is not defined 7 4 11 4 8 Field Multiple calls mode can be contained several times in one entry The Multiple calls mode field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier Multiple calls mode 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 Editable x X X x x X 3 Value 4 Value shall be 30H or 31H 30H stands for Single call mode 31H for Multiple call mode This field is related to the Multiple calls feature see clause 7 4 8 and allows to configure a multiple call line in single call mode For non multiple call lines the value Single call mode shall always be used 7 4 11 4 9 Field Intrusion call The intrusion call field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier Multiple calls mode 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 Editable x X X X Xx X 3
212. he oldest call lowest index for the newest call For fields of type Line id the ascending numerical order shall be used If the lt Number of sorting fields gt is equal to 0 the FP shall use the default sorting of the list No sorting field identifier is sent in this case ETSI 96 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 10 4 1 2 Start session confirm command This command from FP to PP confirms or rejects the start of the session Table 31 Values used within IWU to IWU information element to confirm or reject the starting of a list change session Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment eee eral Pee emacs 2 el tnisinenemnE eee eee lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt lt Command start session 1H List access command confirm gt lt List identifier gt 0 FFH List identifier lt Session identifier gt 0 127 Session identifier see note 1 lt Total number of available 0 127 Number of available entries in list entries gt requested by the PP see note 1 cove eee soning he tsi twee the list towards this PP lt Sorting field identifier 1 gt 0 255 Ere a element type used for the actual sorting the list first criterion lt Sorting field identifier n gt 0 255 Field element type used for the actual sorting of the list criterion n NOTE 1 Total number of available entries and session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In
213. his feature the FP behaviour shall follow one of the possible use cases listed hereafter Please note some flexibility is allowed concerning the the CC messages For clarity of the following flowcharts the lt lt Call information gt gt IE including call identifier does not appear in the CC messages that must convey it Please note that it should not be omitted when implementing equivalent cases EXAMPLE The call identifier must be assigned by the FP after CC SETUP message B 2 1 Date time synchronization when there is no existing connection Use case FP wants to send a time and date synchronization and there is no existing connection use the CLSS procedure page the PP and setup the bearer MAC NWK NWK MAC LCE REQUEST PAGE access_request bearer_confirm FACILITY lt lt Time Date gt gt Figure B 6 Date time synchronization when there is no existing connection B 2 2 Date time synchronization during existing connection Use case FP wants to send a time and date synchronization when the PP is on communication use the existing connection C FACILITY lt lt Time Date gt gt Figure B 7 Date time synchronization during existing connection ETSI 142 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 B 2 3 Date time synchronization when the PP is switched on Use case FP has wanted to send a time and date synchronization when PP was switched off PP is switched on use the location registration connection
214. hold i CC INFO l lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 41 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line Id call id 1 gt Access contact list to find a contact within call id 1 IWU INFO lt lt IWU TO IWU lt Command start session gt lt List identifier contact list gt gt gt IWU INFO lt lt IWU TO IWU lt Command end session confirm gt lt session identifier gt gt gt Try to establish parallel external call 2 CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD 15H external number gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line Id call id 2 gt gt gt Parallel external call establish on call id2 Figure C 35 List access use case establishing a parallel call using contact list C 6 3 Incoming voice call during list access session Please note that for clarity of the flowcharts the line identifier is not mentioned However it has to be implemented and managed correctly as defined by the current standard C 6 3 1 Use case incoming voice call during list access previous connection released Use case A list access call is on going from a PP An incoming call is presented to the line The FP hangs up the list access call before presenting the incoming call ETSI 180 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP Network List access call established call id 1 List access end session i CC RELEASE Incoming call from calling number FP CC RELEASE COM hangs up FP presents incomi
215. hts supported attributes capability i e Extended Fixed part capability bit a44 1 see EN 300 444 12 annex A informative PP locking procedure for on air subscription procedure The searching mode shall be limited by the timer P lt AP 02 gt ETSI 131 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 When a FP is found in subscription mode the PP shall start the access rights procedure using the 0000 value for the authentication code If the FP rejects the access rights the PP shall prompt the user to enter the PIN code The PP shall then initiate a new access rights request with the same FP using the PIN entered value for the authentication code NOTE When performing easy pairing registration it is assumed that the PP is in close proximity to the FP and therefore the PP will receive a stronger signal from that FP The PP can use RSSI readings to speed up the search for the desired FP For example 1 Measure the RSSI level on each channel 2 Synchronize on the FP with the highest RSSI value 3 Wait for the a44 bit to check if it is set 4a If a44 is set start the access rights procedure 4b If a44 is not set put the RFPI on a barred list and go to step 2 or 1 to find other FP PP NWK PP MAC FP MAC FP NWK Push button Within timer Use 0000 value F lt AP 01 gt as authentication code ian ACCESS RIGHTS REQ aoc P aummeouesr O Qy_g Access rights supported 0 Qu_c Easy pairing supp
216. i list access IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session session identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session confirm session identifier gt gt CC RELEASE CC RELEASE COM Figure B 10 List access start end session when PP is in idle mode ETSI 144 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 B 3 2 Start end session when a call is already established to PP i call established IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session list identifier sorting field identifiers gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWUE amp start session confirm session identifier Total number sorting field identifiers gt gt i list access IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session session identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session confirm session identifier gt gt Figure B 11 List access start end session when a call is already established to PP NOTE See also diagrams in clause C 6 for examples on list access and voice calls flowcharts B 3 3 Query supported entry fields i list access session setup i IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU query supported entry fields session identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU query supported entry fields confirm session identifier list of supported entry field identifiers gt gt Figure B 12 List access query supported entry fields ETSI 145 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 B 3 4 Read entries i
217. ield Call forwarding The Call forwarding field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier Call forwarding 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1__ Editable x X X x x X 3 CF type 4 1 digit 2 digit CF type shall be 30H 31H or 32H 30H stands for CFU Call forwarding unconditional 31H for CFB Call forwarding busy and 32H for CFNR Call forwarding on non response The digits represent the call forwarding target number The length of the field shall be set to zero when the value of the field is not defined by the user If a PP sets or resets the field the FP shall activate or deactivate the corresponding Call forwarding in the network for specified type of calls received and on the specified line This field may be contained several times in the line settings entry This allows to define several call forwarding types for the line The number of times the field is included shall be defined at line setting entry creation See clauses 7 4 10 4 5 list access Save entry command procedure for details on how to handle several identical fields in the same entry Default value length 0 no call forwarding defined 7 4 11 5 Virtual contact list and call list per line The default behaviour of the List access service feature is to share all lists between all registered PPs independently of the line attachments of the PPs The current procedure allows to share virtually contact or call lists missed calls
218. in advance on which line a call is received through display However such a PP still cannot propose a menu with the set of attached lines presented and to choose from If the PP now implements the List access feature in addition to the Line identification feature it has got virtually anything it needs to implement the Multiple lines feature and implenting it at this stage is only a matter of MMI implementation C 2 1 Attaching a new PP to one or several lines Use case the user hast just registered a new PP then the user is invited to select the line s to which the new PP is attached to PP managed attachment This use case can also be used later to change the handsets attachment to the lines We assume that the new registered PP is the terminal number m ETSI 150 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP ACCESS RIGHTS REQUEST ACCESS RIGHTS ACCEPT LOCATE REQUEST LOCATE ACCEPT TEMPORARY IDENDITY ASSIGN ACK lt TPUI IdN m gt Line settings start session Total number of entries N lines o l Update Attached handsets field of each line for the new registered PP IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries session id start index n counte r forward 1 list of field identifiers Line Id id Line name id Attached handsets id gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries confirm session id counter 1 gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content
219. ine settings list attached handsets field lt lt Events notification gt gt information element shall be filled with the values specified in table 14 Table 14 Values used within FACILITY message for voice message waiting indication activation Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element _ the field IE lt lt Events notification gt gt O OOOO O O zae a OO lt Event sub type gt Vice U e lt Event multiplicity gt 1 127 Number of messages Upon reception of a FACILITY message with a content as defined in table 14 the PP shall activate the Voice MWI status to the receiving user Voice message waiting deactivation i e when voice mail box was consulted shall be achieved in a similar way to activation except that lt Event multiplicity gt argument is set to zero 7 4 1 3 Missed call notification When an incoming call is not answered on any PP attached to a line the FP shall send to each PP attached to this line a missed call notification If the list change notification procedure is implemented for missed call list in the FP FP shall send the list change notification concerning the missed calls list in the same generic events notification lt lt Events notification gt gt information element shall be filled with the values given in table 15 Table 15 Values used within FACILITY message for missed call notification Information eleme
220. information element even if it is attached to a single line NOTE 3 Ifthe call identifier is absent the line identifier may help determine the targeted call if the call identifier is present the line identifier is only added as a result of the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt completeness principle see clause 3 1 The FP may indicate the result of the present procedure by sending an appropriate lt lt DISPLAY gt gt information element in a CC INFO message to the PP PP FP Ongoing calls external or internal CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 42 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line of the call to be resumed lt id type Line identifier subtype external call if external see note 3 value targeted call line id u gt If the PP implements lt id type Call identifier the Call identification feature value targeted call id gt gt gt Figure 12 Resuming a call put on hold 7 4 3 5 10 CLIP on call waiting This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in a call on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal If the Multiple call feature is implemented on a line the line may be configured in single call mode or in multiple call mode CLIP on call waiting shall be indicated by the FP to the PP This indication shall be done by sending in a CC INFO message the information element l
221. ing Line Identity Restriction CLIR NG1 N 17 ability for the user to hide the identity of his line i e Calling Line Identity Presentation to the called party 5 3 Data Link Control DLC service definitions For the purposes of the present document all definitions of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 5 3 and EN 300 444 12 clause 5 1 shall apply ETSI 18 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 5 4 Medium Access Control MAC service definitions For the purposes of the present document all definitions of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 5 4 and EN 300 444 12 clause 5 2 plus the following shall apply no emission mode NG1 M 5 ability to deactivate all radio transmissions in a DECT FP when it does not handle any call Power down is negotiated and an algorithm is provided that guarantees a short resynchronization time if an RF connection is required by any of the peers 5 5 Physical Layer PHL service definitions For the purposes of the present document all definitions of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 5 5 shall apply 5 6 Speech coding and audio feature definitions For the purposes of the present document all definitions of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 5 6 shall apply 5 7 Application features For the purposes of the present document all definitions of EN 300 444 12 clause 4 2 plus the following shall apply Easy PIN code registration NG1 A 1 ability to invite the user to register a PP that is not registered to a FP The access
222. ion On hold call release all waiting acceptation from PP to FP all waiting rejection from PP to FP 7 4 3 5 7 M Putting a call on hold 7 4 3 5 8 O Resuming a call put on hold 7 4 3 5 9 O LIP on call waiting indication 7 4 3 5 10 NIP on call waiting indication 7 4 3 5 11 5 2 NG1 N 2 Codec Switching odec Change lot type modification MAC layer advanced connection slot type modification MAC layer connection type modification basic to from advanced a NG1 N 3 Missed call notification z Generic events notification general Missed call notification z NG1 N 4 Voice message waiting notification Generic events notification general Voice message waiting notification NG1 N 5 Date and Time synchronization Date and Time synchronization NG1 N 6 Parallel Calls NI P N gjz z zZjz z z oO oO NG1 N 8 Call transfer external or internal Announced call transfer 7 4 3 6 1 nannounced call transfer 7 4 3 6 2 Call re injection to the line external or 7 4 3 6 3 internal 7 4 3 6 4 Remote party CLIP on call transfer 7 4 3 6 5 Remote party CNIP on call transfer NG1 N 9 3 party conference call 52 O external or internal 3 party Conference with established 7 4 3 7 M internal and external calls fap za M O M m o M O o o ETSI 34 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Feature Procedure mapping NG1
223. ion identifier see note NOTE _ Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 This command may be sent by PP and FP to request end of session The session s between a PP and FP shall at latest be terminated with call release Remaining locked entries see edit procedure shall be unlocked with the end session command Possible error cases If session identifier is wrong the command should be ignored by the receiver 7 4 10 4 1 4 End session confirm command This command from PP or FP confirms the ending of the specified session Table 33 Values used within IWU to IWU information element to confirm the end of a list change session Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt lt Length of content gt Length of content List access ooo lt Protocol Discriminator gt List access lt Command end session 3H List access command confirm gt lt Session identifier gt 1 127 Session identifier see note NOTE _ Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x
224. is registered to the same PP as the transferring party A NOTE 2 C successively receives the usual CLIP of A and the Remote party CLIP on call transfer of B 7 4 3 6 5 Remote party CNIP on call transfer The Remote party CLIP on call transfer procedure applies unchanged except that CLIP is replaced everywhere with CNIP NOTE 1 In case both CLIP and CNIP are sent to the PP it is sufficient to display one of them It is optional to display both ETSI 65 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 A FP B C internal or external internal call 1 established establish parallel internal call 2 CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 17 H number gt gt CC SETUP see note 4 lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER gt gt of A lt lt CALLING PARTY NAME gt gt of A CC SETUP ACK ring back tone CC INFO lt lt SIGNAL value 01 H gt gt call transfer request CC INFO if unannounced call transfer lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 34 H gt gt CC CONNECT Call if announced call transfer Call CC CONNECT pick up pick up Remote party CLIP on call transfer CC INFO see note 4 lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER gt gt of B lt lt CALLING PARTY NAME gt gt of B if unannounced call transfer CC CONNECT Call te er pick up Figure 18 Remote party CLIP and CNIP on call transfer NOTE 2 The Call Control message sequence in figure 18 should be understood as an example The real sequences may a
225. is a first call dialled digits shall be used for placing an internal call If the call is a parallel call the NG1 N 7 Common parallel calls procedures feature shall be used instead If the lt Call class gt is Normal call setup and the call is a first call dialled digits shall be used for placing an external call If the call is a parallel call the NG1 N 7 Common parallel calls procedures feature shall be used instead If the lt Call class gt is Service call setup dialled digits are for external call unless the 17H Internal call control code is send before the dialled digits There will be an implicit change of the call class the system will act as if the call class had changed from Service call setup to Normal call setup or to Internal call setup as appropriate for the voice call being initiated When receiving an incoming voice call during a list access session the FP may either Close the list access session release the list access call and then present the incoming call as a first call using a new connection Close the list access session and manage the incoming call as a parallel incoming call or waiting call see NGI N 6 Parallel Calls and related NG1 N 7 Common parallel calls procedures features Leave the list access session open in the current state and manage the incoming call as a parallel incoming call NOTE 2 When a connection has been setup for a list access session a waiting
226. is included corresponds to an internal call the line id field shall be present but empty length set to 0 Identifier subtype values For all call related lists the subtype shall be set to Line identifier for external call call is external For the Contact list subtype shall be set to Relating to or All lines depending on the contact For the Line settings list and for any other list the subtype shall be set to Relating to ETSI 111 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 10 5 1 8 Field Number of calls Bits 8 7 6 so ae 8 le 1 Field identifier Number of calls Length L 0 1 editable x x x x value For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x for future use 7 4 10 5 1 9 Field Call type Bits 8 7 6 i 5 4 3 2 1 Field identifier T i Octet kOoOND the value is reserved For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x the value is reserved for future use 7 4 10 5 1 10 Field First name Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 271 Field identifier First name Length L X character byte 2 character byte 15 For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x for future use Characters shall be coded as defined for UTF 8
227. is nare E E E E E EE Dee ashen shee E Eare see E E REEE E EEEE R EES 14 4 Description OF Services tess menene pan a ra BaP Adee aR adn ean Ran ee 15 4 1 Enhanced wideband speech isiin mienen on cases veces nnee a o EESE EEES EEE EEE EEEE S eS EEES EEs 15 4 1 1 Back compatibility with GAP sesiis eeren onee ooe oE EE EEEE SEENE EEEE EER EE EEES 15 4 1 2 Further enhancement in audio performance requirements esesssesesreeseereeresrseteresteerssreressesreeresreeresreerese 15 4 2 Wideband Speech SCOMALIOS 1 5 004 isre eens sa a p eiaa e chee toads ad seseo e apei espeor Ipsa 16 4 3 Extended wideband speech services defined in the present document sesesesssesesreesestrerssesrrerrsreeresreersseees 16 5 Service and feature defonse deteee eiie eE E E iee E EO ERA E het E AE 17 5 1 New Generation DECT Speech Services eesesereeessesereresrseerersreeesserereresersersrerensrueeererererusterersrerereesersreressenses 17 5 2 Network NWK feat teSn aeiee cose cevetsetecs ecb coeeu ech cot eabes cavec peliees edi Sees ea EEEn ER eE dabebcas cvbdecaecisehecs Rtina oeat 17 5 3 Data Link Control DLC service definitions ccccccceseceessececeecceceesececsenaececseeecsssueeecseceecesueeessesueeecseaaaeens 17 5 4 Medium Access Control MAC service definitions ccececcecesssecesssececeessececseececesaeeecseaaececseeeeessaeeecneaaeeees 18 5 5 Physical Layer PHL service definitions sseeseeeeeseseseeeseseeereseerrsserrrss
228. is not to be used in in New Generation DECT equipment Instead of it FP type 1b should be used in NG DECT FPs with ISDN or digital circuit switch interfaces PP echo canceller for FP narrowband 3 1 kHz service NG1 SC 24 Auxiliary feature for FPs consisting on echo canceller for handling the echo generated by PPs type la As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 4 2 Only narrowband echo cancellation capability is required for this feature PP echo supressor for FP narrowband 3 1 kHz service NG1 SC 25 Auxiliary feature for FPs consisting on echo supressor for handling the echo generated by PPs type la As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 4 3 Only narrowband capability is required for this feature FP audio type 2 analog PSTN 3 1 kHz NG1 SC 26 Audio specification for a DECT FP supporting narrowband service and providing an analog 2 wire PSTN interface As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 4 FP audio type 3 VoIP 3 1 kHz NG1 SC 27 Audio specification for a DECT FP supporting narrowband service and providing a VoIP interface with codecs G 711 typically or G 726 on top of it As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 5 FP Audio type 4 ISDN wideband NG1 SC 28 Audio specification for a DECT FP supporting wideband service and providing a digital 64 kbit s interface typically but not necessarily an ISDN connection with a wideband codec such as G 722 MPEG etc As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 6
229. it can be done before NOTE 3 For security purposes it is recommended to use a PIN value different from default 0000 value In this case it could be convenient to indicate the device PIN value with a sticker on the FP It could also be recommended to change the PIN value in the user manual ETSI 130 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP NWK PP MAC FP MAC FP NWK Registration Access rights supported 1 mode foe aoe ee ee eS Use entered gt PIN code as authentication code ACCESS RIGHTS ACCEPT Qu_3 Access rights supported 0 Figure 43 Easy PIN code registration mode 7 10 1 2 Easy pairing registration 7 10 1 2 1 Easy pairing registration description Easy pairing feature simplifies the registration process by not requesting any PIN code to the user when the PIN code is set to default 0000 value When feature is implemented related procedures shall be valid at first power ON of a non registered handset and at any additional further registrations The PP will systematically try to register with the default 0000 PIN code In case of failure the PP will automatically switch back to the easy PIN code registration feature process and corresponding procedures From security point of view successful easy pairing is equivalent to default 0000 PIN code registration which is less secure than any non 0000 PIN code registration As a consequence for easy pairing registration the user should be inst
230. iting call occurred if external see note 4 Ignored if the PP does not implement the Call identification feature gt gt In multiple call mode other handsets continue ringing or receiving the CW indication CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 36 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type Line identifier subtype external call value selected line id gt lt id type Call identifier value waiting call id gt Line on which waiting call occurred if external see note 3 if the PP implements the Call identification feature gt gt for this PP only CC INFO lt lt SIGNAL value Tones off 3F H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line on which waiting call occurred if external see note 3 Ignored if the PP does not implement the Call identification feature lt id type Line identifier subtype external call value waiting call line id gt lt id type Call identifier value waiting call id gt gt gt Figure 10 Call waiting rejection NOTE 4 The line identifier indicates to the PP on which line the waiting call occurred if external It is however ignored on PP side if the PP does not implement the Line identification feature NOTE 5 Ona multiple call line configured in multiple call mode call waiting rejection does not necessarily imply that the call is rejected by the DECT system
231. ition to the primary Access Rights Identity ARI secondary ARIs that the FT broadcasts less frequently than PARIs These may be used to reflect an inter operators agreement allowing a portable to access more than one operator or services through FT encryption deactivation M 14 service providing means for disabling the encryption whereby on demand the process of transmitting higher layer data including speech across the AI in encrypted form is to be cancelled a connection release automatically disables ciphering D 3 GAP Feature service to procedure mapping tables The following informative annex shows the features service to procedure mapping tables as defined in EN 300 444 12 GAP that are reused in the present document unless other specification is given This list is informative and shows the status in EN 300 444 12 In case of changes or divergences the original tables at EN 300 444 12 GAP shall rule ETSI 199 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 D 3 1 GAP NWK feature to procedure mapping table clause 6 8 1 of EN 300 444 Table D 1 NWK feature to procedure mapping table 5 of EN 300 444 Feature Procedure mapping Reference Oooo MR RB P N 1 Outgoing call Outgoing call request Overlap sending 83 m of o Outgoing call proceeding 84 m O O Outgoing call confirmation 85 Mm o O Outgoing call connection sce Mm M M Sending keypad information N 2 Off Hook ee ee
232. ity quality trade off with almost no additional complexity compared with ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 normal decoding 0 07 WMOPS Since ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 does not incorporate any mechanism to cope with lost frames packets the use of a PLC algorithm is strongly recommended to avoid annoying effects in case of packet frame losses NOTE 2 ITU T Recommendation G 729 1 18 already incorporates a packet loss concealment mechanism Detection of Modem fax tone NG1 SC 8 detection of the 1 100 Hz 1 300 Hz and 2 100 Hz standard tones indicating a fax modem transmission and answering as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 5 2 2 The main utility of this function is the switching of codecs to transparent PCM ITU T Recommendation G 711 16 in order to facilitate modem fax transmission The tone detection can also be used to de activate echo suppression if present Codec selection and switching NG1 SC 9 to handle several codecs at least ITU T Recommendation G 726 15 and ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 New Generation DECT will support a codec selection and switching mechanism This may consequently allow the use of other codecs that could be specified in next releases as additional optional codecs according to future application or interoperability needs PP Audio type 1a classic GAP handset NG1 SC 10 Audio specification for a general purpose 3 1 kHz telephony handset as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 3 ETSI
233. ive acknowledgement from the FP with reject reason procedure not allowed see clause 7 4 10 4 9 Saving a new line setting entry or deleting a line setting entry is allowed when creating or removing a line for the DECT system Please refer to clause 7 4 11 2 Interactions between registration attachment of handsets and lists for impacts Only one entry per line identifier shall exist in the Line settings list In other words two distinct entries shall never have the same line id see clause 7 4 11 3 for details Settings Some DECT system or line settings are mandatory and shall be supported both by the FP and the PP Please refer to table 1 for status of each setting When a setting is mandatory in the table all related fields are mandatory The PP may use the Query supported entry fields procedure see clause 7 4 10 4 2 to know which settings are supported by the FP The FP shall answer with mandatory and optional settings implemented in the FP This way the PP will be able to give proper indication to the user when accessing to the settings menus for example All settings shall have default value set when product is manufactured All these settings may be reset to default value with the Base reset setting For variable length settings if the value is not defined by the user the length of the field shall be set to zero EXAMPLE If no dialling prefix is set length of this field shall be zero The PP may modify 1 to n s
234. kbit s 7 kHz wideband codec NG1 SC 7 Packet loss Concealment PLC for ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 NG1 SC 9 Codec selection and switching NG1 SC 14 PP Audio type 2a ITU T Recommendation P 311 i 5 7 kHz handset NG1 SC 15 PP Audio type 2b HATS 7 kHz handset NG1 SC 16 PP Audio type 2c HATS 7 kHz improved handset NG1 SC 19 PP Audio type 4a HATS 7 kHz handsfree NG1 SC 20 PP Audio type 4b HATS 7 kHz improved handsfree NG1 SC 28 FP Audio type 4 ISDN wideband NG1 SC 29 FP Audio type 5 VoIP wideband NG1 SC 30 NG1 SC 24 PP echo canceller for FP wideband NG1 SC 31 NG1 SC 24 PP echo supressor for FP wideband NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal call NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal conference FT T e EE DECT feature service Reference Ft Fa EA 5 5 21 EEH MM 5 5 21 5 4 21 M M M 5 4 21 ee 5 3 21 5 6 21 5 6 PRI note 2 KoA EAEN E e ea Hdl ot ald 5 6 21 NA 5 6 21 NG1 SC 34 Adaptive volume control 5 6 21 NA o Oo ETSI 24 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Service DECT Feature mapping FT D aaa ia ECT feature service Reference Pr He Joo o ooo y y y aafo NG1 3 Wideband 7 kHz G 722 Co o 64 kbit s voice service NG1 P 1 2 level GFSK modulation 5 5 21 NG1 P 3 Physical Packet P67 5 5 21 NG1 M 3 Ipq_error_detection symmetric 5 4 21 M M M MAC service type NG1 M 4 Advanced Connections 5 4 21 NG1 D 1 DLC Service LU1 TRUP
235. l mode line the DECT system will try to make an outgoing call 7 4 3 8 2 Explicit call intrusion This procedure applies to the FP and an idle PP on a line implementing the Multiple calls feature and configured in multiple call mode or in single call mode In this case the PP intrudes a call by using a specific control code for call intrusion while initiating the setup of an external call ETSI proccc ccc crc f 1 69 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP2 PP1 in a call intruding PP intruded PP FP attached to line u attached to line u The PP sets up the call and selects the line to be used line of the call to be intruded Targeted handset optional Ignored if the PP does not implement the Call identification feature See also note 2 CC SETUP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt gt gt 1 CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Id type Line identifier subtype external value u gt lt Id type subtype Call identifier value call id 2 gt CC INFO lt Keypad info 1C 40 H gt gt gt lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info targeted terninal id number gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt
236. l deflection Call identification and Line identification features CLIR feature Multiple calls and multiple lines features Mutualised parallel calls New system settings and line settings Informative annexes with more examples of flowcharts including system settings multiple calls and parallel calls The new extended services take in to account the additional scenarios possible in DECT systems connected to the network via VoIP interfaces ETSI 17 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 5 Service and feature definitions 5 1 New Generation DECT Speech Services For the purposes of the present document the definitions of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 5 1 shall apply 5 2 Network NWk features For the purposes of the present document all definitions of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 5 2 and EN 300 444 12 clause 4 1 plus the following shall apply Missed call notification NG1 N 3 ability to inform a user that a call has been missed Voice message waiting notification NG1 N 4 ability to inform a user that a voice message has been left in the voice mailbox to which the user has access Date and time synchronization NG1 N 5 ability to synchronize the date and time on the DECT system From FP to all registered PP or from one registered PP to the FP Parallel calls NG1 N 6 ability to handle in the DECT system two or more simultaneous calls originated or terminated in the same PP Common parallel call
237. ld be understood as an example The real sequences may also contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents 7 4 5 2 3 Line identification for a first external outgoing call using lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt This procedures applies to the FP and a PP effectively sending a line identifier for a first external outgoing call using a lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt information element When using the present procedure a lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt information element shall be used for conveying the line identifier information This information element shall be included either in the CC SETUP message as an addition to procedure Outgoing call request of GAP 12 clause 8 2 or in a CC INFO message as described in procedure Sending keypad information of GAP 12 clause 8 10 In both cases the following table shall be considered NOTE Inthe latter case the lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt information element used may contain partial or complete called party number information Table 20 Values used within the CC SETUP or a CC INFO message when the lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt method is used for conveying the line identifier information Information Field within the Standard values within the Normative action comment element information element field information element lt lt Multi keypad gt gt lt Keypad info gt 23H Code for the pound ke
238. lement the same one if the call identifier is also sent even if it is attached to a single line NOTE 3 If the call identifier is absent the line identifier may help determine the targeted call if the call identifier is present the line identifier is only added as a result of the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt completeness principle see clause 3 1 The FP may change the codec using the service change procedure see clause 7 4 3 3 Codec change for parallel calls The FP may indicate the connected party by sending the lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER gt gt information element or by sending an appropriate lt lt DISPLAY gt gt information element in a CC INFO message to the PP PP FP Ongoing calls external or internal CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 31 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line of the targeted call lt id type Line identifier subtype external call if external see note 3 value targeted call line id u gt If the PP implements lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value targeted call id gt gt gt Figure 7 Call toggle request 7 4 3 5 4 Call release and call release rejection This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in at least two calls on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal NOTE 1 Implementation of the Multiple call fea
239. line identification by PP Use case The PP sends all parallel call initiation information in a single CC INFO message e g the user used the phone book before placing a parallel call A single message sent by the PP with 15 17H line id called number PP FP Ongoing call external or internal Outgoing call initiation including line selection by the PP not FP managed CC INFO initiation lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 15 17 H gt gt gt Line selected by PP for the call lt lt CALL INFORMATION using the CALL INFO method lt id type Line identifier subtype external call if external value u gt gt gt Line selected by PP for the call using the KEYPAD method if external lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 23 3u H gt gt gt lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Call id assignement by the FP CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION Repeated here as a result of the lt id type Line identifier subtype external call CALL INFO completion principle value u gt I Possibly ignored if PP does not implement lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value assigned call id gt Figure C 17 Outgoing parallel calls all in one PP message line identification by PP ETSI 163 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 4 1 2 Allin one PP message FP managed line selection Use case The PP send
240. list it shall also implement the corresponding service related to this list entry or field The PP shall display as many fields as possible For example if a FP declares a contact list the FP shall fill it correctly and support all mandatory requests from all PPs The PP shall provide access to this contact to the user and not re create a local copy of the list Of course the FP shall update automatically missed calls outgoing call all call list by adding locally corresponding entries in the lists Initial values First possible session identifier assigned by FP shall be 1 Value 0 is a reserved return value used by the FP when a problem occurs First possible list identifier shall be 0 see clause 7 4 10 3 for list identifier coding First possible entry identifier assigned by FP shall be 1 First possible field identifier shall be 1 ETSI 93 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 First possible Start index parameter value in read read confirm search entries search entries confirm commands shall be 1 Value 0 points to the last entry First possible position index parameter value in save save confirm commands shall be 1 first entry Value 0 points to the last entry Sessions The FP shall be able to handle 2 started sessions initiated from a single PP at the same time All sessions between a PP and FP are ended at the latest at call release The number of entries allowed within a list
241. list towards this PP lt Number of sorting fields gt be used by the FP see note lt Sorting field identifier 1 gt 0 255 Suggested field element type used for sorting the list first criterion e ee lt Sorting field identifier n gt 0 255 Suggested field element type used for sorting the list to be used when field 1 field n 1 of both compared entries are equal criterion n NOTE Itis recommended to limit the number of requested sorting fields to two n 2 The submitted sorting field identifiers suggest entry fields which should be used by the FP to sort the requested list towards this PP in the given session This suggests to sort the list by sorting field 1 as first criterion and then by sorting field 2 as second criterion when field 1 of both compared entries are equal and so on For each field type a sorting order is defined which applies independently of the position of the field in the sorting process i e whether used as first criterion criterion 2 etc The defined sortings are as follows For fields of type Number including terminal id numbers Name Line name First name or Contact number the alphanumerical order shall be used NOTE The alphanumerical order can only be defined on a subset of the UTF 8 encoded characters This subset and the associated order depend on the locale used For fields of type Date and time the ante chronological order shall be used highest index for t
242. ll identification feature if one of the remote parties hangs up To release the last parallel call the PP shall not use this procedure but use a CC RELEASE message instead A CC RELEASE message shall not convey any call identifier even if the PP implements the Call identification feature NOTE 5 To release all parallel calls the PP may also send a single CC RELEASE to the FP ETSI 55 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 3 5 5 On hold call release This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in at least two calls on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal This procedure is provided as an addition to the Call release procedure for the case the PP does not implement the Call identification feature In that case it shall be used by both parties A On hold call release request may be sent either by the PP or by the FP In case at least two parallel calls are established with a PP not implementing the Call identification feature and in order to release the on hold call the releasing party either the PP or the FP shall send the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 37H Additionally If the releasing party implements the Line identification feature and the call to be released is external it shall send the line identifier of the call to be released in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt informa
243. ll never use the already assigned call id ETSI 92 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Moreover the use of the Cp channel is recommended in case both parties support it indicated in FP capabilities bit a26 If there was an existing call when the list access session is started the PP shall first put the existing call on hold see clause 7 4 3 5 8 before using the Cp channel Access to a list is encapsulated in a session Each session is linked to exactly one list access and is used by the FP to grant access to a list to handle accesses to multiple lists from one PP Typical sequences of commands between start and end of a session are the following Read entries or search entries for just reading entries Read entries or Search entries followed by Edit entry and Save entry for updating an existing entry if an Edit entry has been issued but the list entry is left unchanged a Save entry command shall still be used to unlock the entry Save entry with entry id equal to 0 for creating a new entry in the list Entry identifier Each entry in a list is unambiguously identified within the FP for a dedicated list by an entry id This entry id has to be referenced in case of writing access and is used by the FP to reject multiple write accesses from several PPs Field identifier Each entry of a list may contain several fields Each field has a unique identifier which is list dependent see clause 7 4 10 5
244. lso contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents NOTE 3 On figure 18 three possible positions for the CC CONNECT message are shown NOTE 4 CNIP for internal handsets is handled according to the provisions of GAP Internal Call CNIP procedure GAP clause 8 44 NOTE 5 CNIP and CLIP might not fit in a single message in that case one or more additional CC INFO message s are used 7 4 3 7 3 party conference with established external and or internal calls The 3 party conference takes place either between 3 PPs on the same FP based on 2 internal calls or between 2 PPs and one remote party based on one internal one external calls or between 1 PP and 2 remote parties based on 2 external calls If the Multiple lines feature is implemented the calls may be on two different lines In case two parallel calls are established or a waiting call was indicated in order to establish a conference the PP shall send the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 32H Furthermore If the PP implements the Call identification feature it shall send the call identifier of the current active call in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element included in the same CC INFO message ETSI 66 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 The FP shall use this active call id even if the PP did not send it as the call id
245. ltiple call line Busy system or line notification 7 4 8 3 ETSI 35 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Feature NG1 N 16 List access service NG1 N 17 Calling line identity restriction Feature Procedure mapping Procedure General considerations List change notification Start end session Query supported entry fields Read entries Edit entry Save entr Delete entry Delete list Search entries Negative acknowledgement Data packet Last data packet DECT system and line settings considerations Interactions between registration attachment of handsets and lists Fields description Supported lists Supported list query Missed calls list Outgoing calls list Incoming accepted calls list All calls list Contact list Internal names list DECT system settings list Line settings list Virtual contact list and call list per line Supported DECT system settings PIN code Clock master Base reset FP IP address type FP IP address value FP IP address subnet mask FP IP address gatewa FP IP address DNS server FP version Firmware version FP version EEprom version FP version Hardware version Supported line settings Line name Line id Attached handsets Dialling prefix FP melody FP volume Blocked number Multiple calls mode single multiple Intrusion call Permanent CLIR Call forwarding Considerations Permanent CLIR mode all calls nv Reference 5 2 7 4 10 1 7 4 10 2 O 7
246. ly 7 10 1 1 Easy PIN code registration 7 10 1 1 1 Searching mode and PIN code requests The access rights procedure triggered by the user on the PP causes it to actively search for a FP broadcasting Access Rights supported attributes capability i e Extended Fixed part capability bit a44 1 see EN 300 444 12 annex A informative PP locking procedure for on air subscription procedure The searching mode shall be limited by the timer P lt AP 02 gt When a FP is found in subscription mode the PP shall prompt the user to enter the PIN code After PIN entering the PP shall start the access rights procedure using the PIN code value for the authentication code NOTE1 When performing easy PIN code registration it is assumed that the PP is in close proximity to the FP and therefore the PP will receive a stronger signal from that FP The PP can use RSSI readings to speed up the search for the desired FP For example 1 Measure the RSSI level on each channel 2 Synchronize on the FP with the highest RSSI value 3 Wait for the a44 bit to check if it is set 4a If a44 is set start the access rights procedure 4b If a44 is not set put the RFPI on a barred list and go to step 2 or 1 to find other FP NOTE 2 It is recommended to request the PIN code entering after locking to a FP in subscription mode because this procedure may be common with easy pairing search mode request procedure see clause 7 10 4 Nevertheless
247. m command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt List access NOTE _ Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 7 4 10 4 8 Search entries 7 4 10 4 8 1 Search entries command This command from PP requests to read a range of consecutive entries in the list beginning with an entry matching a search criterion The list here shall be understood as the list resulting from the initial sorting of the list as specified by the FP in the Start session confirm command ETSI 105 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Table 46 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Search entries command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment eerste eal ere eee nee eee meres lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt lt Matching option gt OOH to 07H First part of the search criterion lt Searched value gt Second part of the search criterion Always coded as a string lt String length gt 1 255 Rise eee ie oes ee el lt String content 0 gt UTF 8 coded characters hen as oes al ee ae a lt String content n gt UTF 8 coded characters 1 255 Number of requested entries lt List entry field identifier 1 gt 0
248. m r eq irementS ss isieeseeoev onient aeres vae Eea eE ea o AOE E Ka EEEo Seia ne 85 Incoming and outgoing external calls on a multiple call line eee ee cee ceecnee cee cneeeneeseecaeeeneeaes 86 Line set mii singleicall MOC cisiscssssoseseseess ene a E E usa E N hii 86 Line set mi multiple Call modesina a E E E T A A ESN 86 B sysystemor line nottata a N ER E E E R 86 PP and FP capabilities indication and broadcast sseeesseeseseeeseeeesssesresrsresrsserresserrreresrenreserrrsrenresreerssee 87 Lermminal capability Indication iesean esi E E R E E deate erent 87 Higher layer information FP broadcast ssseesseeeesseeseseseseerseeerssrerssesrenresreerssrerrnsesrenesrenresreetssererent 88 Higher layer information in standard FP broadcast Qh 3 ssssssesseessesssesssesesesrssrrserssressresseseeesees 89 Extended Higher Layer capabilities part 2 essssesseseeeseresrsessssresrssesrrsestenrssrerteserrenertssrerrsrerseereeet 89 Eistacc ss SELVICE sissies a a a e a A E EN S E R E A E A E 89 Generali CONnSIGErAatlOns Semois n E A A a E R A A S 89 Tastichan ge nottic ation eos a R a N nities E R A aS 93 List identifier cCodiNgS veire seron ires oseere ree eere aeS EREE OSPE E caeassusesneedea heebsedssubsoensayesetees 94 List Access Commands isinsin iesse re eer EEES EE E S EEE EEEE ESKE E ER E S EEEE sap T SEE i 94 Start and end Sessions lt steses cosesscbbesastes r a Eep EEEE OSSEE EE EAEE EEE ES EEOSE n r E TEs EEEE oS 95
249. m the MAC layer at the receiving side on demand and with minimum delay Used for speech but may be used for more general data purposes encryption deactivation D 9 transporting the NWK layer encryption deactivation request to the MAC layer thereby disabling the encryption process in the MAC layer ETSI 198 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 D 2 5 GAP MAC service definitions clause 5 2 of EN 300 444 general M 1 set of basic requirements regarding data formats multiplexing CRC usage scanning and locking which are prerequisites to communication between peer MAC entities continuous broadcast M 2 simplex service from FT to PT whereby the FT maintains at least one bearer with continuous transmissions The PT can use the information carried in this bearer to lock to the FT and to obtain knowledge about the FT paging broadcast M 3 service whereby the identities of specific PTs can be broadcast by the FT This service is normally used by the FT to request a specific PT to set up a link to the FT basic connection M 4 service providing connection between FT and PT consisting of one full slot duplex bearer supporting the In_minimum_delay data service i e speech Only one basic connection may exist between a FT and particular PT except during connection handover The service includes the means for setting up and releasing the required bearer s Cs higher layer signalling M 5 low rate connection oriented data service
250. n IWU to IWU information element for Read entries command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWUs gt lt Length of content gt Length of content lt Protocol Discriminator gt lt Command read entries gt eee Se ee ee a ree ee ee lt List entry field identifier n gt 0 255 Requested field element type NOTE 1 Session identifier and start index can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 NOTE 2 List entry field identifier values are defined for each list separately Start index The start index is the first index of the range of requested entries Bits 7654321 Meaning 0000000 last entry other values list entry Counter octet Bits 87654321 Meaning Oxxxxxxx forward in ascending list index order 1xxxxxxx backward in descending list index order The response contains data packets with list entries in order of ascending list index regardless of whether counter indicated forward or backwards and always includes the entry with list index start index EXAMPLE In case 2 entries are requested backwards with start index 5 the data packets shall include the entries with indices 4 and 5 with entry 4 transmitted first Possible erro
251. n a as on air subscription procedure is successful Base station name broadcasting timer 160 ms Not used Base station name broadcasting occurrence Higher layer capabilities FP broadcast sent The first segment of the FP name is sent ETSI 138 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Annex B normative Procedure diagrams The following diagrams depict basic sequences that illustrate the text of present document The Call Control message sequences in the following diagrams shall be understood as examples The sequences may also contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents EXAMPLE CC ALERTING and CC CALL PROCEEDING are sometimes not mentioned although they are allowed in the sequences B 1 Events notification diagrams The following flowcharts are very basic sequences See also annex C especially clauses C 2 4 and C 2 5 for more complete examples of notifications For clarity of the following flowcharts lt lt Call information gt gt IE including call identifiers and line identifiers does not appear in some of the CC messages that must convey it Please note that they should not be omitted when implementing equivalent cases B 1 1 Event notification when there is no existing connection Use case FP wants to send an event notification and there is no existing connection use the CLSS procedure page the PP and setup the bearer aa NWK
252. nam ofo IF service GAP M 11 THEN O ELSE M IF service GAP M 9 THEN O ELSE M IF service NG1 4 OR NG1 5 OR NG1 6 OR NG1 2 IA II OR NG1 2 IA III THEN M ELSE O IF multiple connection between the same PT FT pair THEN M ELSE O ETSI 40 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 6 13 Application feature to procedure mapping The Application feature to procedure mapping of EN 300 444 12 GAP clause 6 8 3 with the following changes shall apply Table 12 Application feature to procedure mapping Feature Procedure mapping Status Pr r Referen O eae O peene e Fa T NG1 A 1 Easy PIN code M N A registration Registration mode automatic access M N A Searching mode and PIN code requests M N A Base station name selection O N A Registration user feedback M N A NG1 A 2 Easy pairing registration M N A Easy pairing description M N A Registration mode automatic access M N A Base station limited registration mode N A N A Searching mode request M N A Base station name selection O N A Registration user feedback M N A NG1 A 3 Handset locator M Handset locator GAPATACtobitstingmappng O o Tena ae C501 v AC to bitstring mapping 14 2 12 M m M GAP A 2 Multiple subscription y aeng Mm wa NA registration GAP A 3 Manual entry of the PARK Manual entry of the PARK GAP A 4 Terminal identity number assignment in mono cell
253. nce in a previous session for example But this is not the most usual behaviour as the PP may probably show the current value of the setting before enabling the user to modify it For clarity of the following flowcharts the lt lt Call information gt gt IE including call identifier does not appear in the CC messages that must convey it Please note that it should not be omitted when implementing equivalent cases For example the call identifier must be assigned by the FP after CC SETUP message C 7 2 Modifying the PIN code Use case FP without keyboard the user modifies the system PIN code from the PP ETSI bs Encrypted IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session confirm session identifier Total number 1 gt Read old PIN code IWU INFO 182 PP Enter old PIN code CC SETUP lt lt BASIC SERVICE lt Call Class Service call setuo gt gt gt CC CALL PROC IWU INFO ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 FP IEl lt lt IWU to IWU start session DECT system settings list Number of sorting fields 0 gt gt CIPHER REQUEST IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries session id start index 1 counter 01H list of field identifiers FP registration mode PIN code IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries confirm session id start index counter 1 gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content
254. nced wideband speech The present document is defined as an extension of New Generation DECT part 1 wideband speech TS 102 527 1 21 All devices compliant with the present document shall implement wideband 150 Hz to 7 kHz audio with 16 kHz frequency sampling and shall implement at least the speech coding format according to ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 In addition to that other wideband and superwideband audio codecs providing even better audio quality may be implemented See TS 102 527 1 21 clause 4 1 for description about wideband speech 4 1 1 Back compatibility with GAP The present document is backcompatible with Generic Access Profile GAP EN 300 444 12 All devices compliant with the present document shall implement ADPCM narrowband speech service according to ITU T recommendation G 726 15 with automatic detection of the capabilities of the other peer 4 1 2 Further enhancement in audio performance requirements The present document implements a further enhancement in acustic wideband performance compared to TS 102 527 1 21 The more demanding audio speciifications PP types 2b and 2c see EN 300 175 8 8 shall be mandatory after a transition time With this extra requirement the acustic performance of the wideband speech service will be even better than the ITU standard for wideband audio ITU T Recommendation P 311 1 5 See also TS 102 527 1 21 clause 4 1 1 ETSI 16 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 200
255. nd from the FP specifies the start index of the range of entries found as a result of the Search entries command and the number of returned entries Corresponding entry entries are sent along in data packets Table 47 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Search entries confirm command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment Fae a n lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt Length of content List access lt Command search entries ist access command confirm gt Session identifier see note lt Start index gt 1 entries See note Number of returned entries NOTE _ Session identifier and start index can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 127 Start index of the range of returned Start index and counter return the index of the first returned list entry and the number of returned list entries Content of list entry entries is transmitted in data packets Particular cases If no entry is found that matches the search criterion the lt counter gt field value shall be set to zero No data packet shall be sent 7 4 10 4 9 Negative Acknowledgement This command from FP rejects the previous command with a reject reason ETSI 107 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Table 48 Values used within
256. ne external number 1 VoIP line 1 Residential use external number 2 VoIP line 2 Home Office 2 PP h he s attached to the external number 3 VolP line 2 Home Office Figure 36 Example of a multiple line configuration with 3 lines with attachments PPs attached to several lines are hatched When implementing the Multiple lines feature the PP shall set the corresponding terminal capability bit The FP shall set bit azg of the Extended higher layer capabilities part 2 see EN 300 175 5 5 clause F 3 7 4 7 1 1 Pre requisites The following pre requisites for implementation of the Multiple lines feature shall be taken into account A FP implementing the Multiple lines feature shall implement the Line identification feature as a pre requisite A PP implementing the Multiple lines feature should implement the Line identification feature as well A PP or FP implementing the Multiple lines feature shall implement the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures of clause 7 4 3 5 as a pre requisite so that a new call on a different line can be placed or received on an already in use handset 7 4 7 1 2 Minimum requirements An implementation of the Multiple lines feature on a DECT system shall comply with the following minimum requirements The Maximum number of simultaneous calls supported by a FP implementing the Multiple lines feature shall be at least equal to 2 This includes
257. nformation element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment fore epee eee AE ee lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt NOTE _ Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 ETSI 104 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Delete list means deletion of all entries The list itself is still available Delete list is not allowed for List of supported lists Line settings list nor for DECT system settings list Possible error cases If session identifier is wrong the FP shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason invalid session number If an unknown list identifier is requested including list of supported list the FP shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason procedure not allowed In case the FP rejects the delete list command it shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason procedure not allowed If the PP requests delete list for List of supported lists or DECT system settings list the FP shall answer with negative achnowledgement reject reason procedure not allowed 7 4 10 4 7 2 Delete list confirm command This command from FP confirms the deletion of a complete list Table 45 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Delete list confir
258. ng call uses Call id1 which is free CC SETUP Incoming call presentation lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld call id 1 gt gt Figure C 36 List access use case incoming voice call during list access previous connection released NOTE The first list access may have or not a call id assigned by the FP Depending mainly on the service type used to setup the list access call C 6 3 2 Use case incoming call during list access managed as a parallel call previous session ended Use case A list access call is on going from a PP An incoming call is presented to the line The FP closes the list access session before presenting the incoming call PP FP Network List access call established call id 1 Incoming call from calling number List access end session i CC INFO Incoming call presentation lt lt SIGNAL value call waiting tone 07 H gt gt lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld call id 2 gt gt Figure C 37 List access use case incoming voice call during list access previous connection released NOTE The first list access may have or not a call id assigned by the FP Depending mainly on the service type used to setup the list access call ETSI 181 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 6 3 3 Use ca
259. ng keypad information 8 10 zZ N o O ro a n F T Pari Sendi r Sending keypad information 8 10 N 24 Signalling of display E ee Display o ooo l gde N 25 Display control characters Ooo O ii N 27 Encryption activation PT 4 Stori 4 eoo ee ee alin SANS ipher switching initiated by PT toring the DCK TLE o A A dF a a a e 2 N 30 Calling Line Identification O eses s i a O O Presentation CLIP M N 31 Internal call o eo eo om Internal call keypad 819 m of o Internal call CLIP ss o o Internal call CNIP i S em ofofo N 32 Service call ES O EO EO Servicecallkeypad 81 m of o N 33 Enhanced U plane Oooo S oai i S oJ of o connection N 34 Calling Name Identification Ci ai i S ofj oj o Presentation CNIP Calling Name Identification Presentation 8 42 M M CNIP Indication 32 z 2 9 pPpr N N O EN SO og Sm gt g 8 z o ojl z oO 5 oO fet A O O 2 TT Ho gt Cc 5 oO i O fed fal eo 5 O o 2 4 N 28 Encryption deactivation F 3 D D a N 29 Encryption deactivation P 5 D Ah D a a a a a a a a a a a a a 1 ETSI 201 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 D 3 2 GAP DLC service to procedure mapping table clause 6 8 2 of EN 300 444 Table D 2 DLC service to procedure mapping table 6 of EN 300 444 Service Procedure mapping Pro
260. ngth L 2 0 1 Editable x x X x X X 3 1 digit 4 2 digit 8 digit Each digit shall be out of 2AH and interval 30H 39H The PIN code field shall respect the following rules Each decimal digit entered by the user is translated into one octet ASCII coded The PT shall be capable to accept any PIN between 0 and 8 decimal digits limits included The PIN shall always have a length of 8 digits the resulting string of octets is padded with a number of leading octets to achieve a total of 8 octets for example if the PIN code is only 4 digits For example a value of 1091 4 decimal digits entered via keypad is translated into a pin code of the following value 1091 and coded as shown in figure 40 2AH 2AH 2AH 2AH 31H 30H 39H 31H Figure 40 Example of PIN code coding 7 4 11 3 2 Field Clock master The Clock master field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier clock master 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 Editable x x x x x X 3 Value 4 Value shall be 30H or 31H 30H stands for FP 31H stands for PP The behaviour of the PP and FP according to Clock master field setting shall be consistent with the Date and Time synchronization feature described in clause 7 4 2 ETSI 118 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 11 3 3 Field Base reset The Base reset field shall be coded as follows
261. nt Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment ana the field IE lt lt Events notifcation gt gt OOOO O O lt Event type gt p Missed call lt Event sub type gt t Voice lt Event multiplicity gt 1 127 Number of missed call lt Event type gt List change indication lt Event sub type gt Missed calls list lt Event multiplicity gt Total number of elements in the list Upon reception of a FACILITY message with a content as defined in table 15 the PP shall indicate the missed call to the receiving user The PP may use the previous calling party information provided with the last incoming call presentation After user intervention the PP shall access the missed call list via the list access Read entries command see clause 7 4 10 4 3 1 feature The FP shall then send a Missed call deactivation notification i e when call log was consulted This shall be achieved in a similar way to activation except that lt Event multiplicity gt argument is set to zero 7 4 1 4 List change notification See List access service list change notification procedure clause 7 4 10 2 for the detailed behaviour ETSI 45 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 2 Date and Time synchronization Equipment supporting New Generation DECT wideband voice shall support the Date and Time synchronization feature as described in the present clause The DECT entity shall use an already establish
262. ntifiers For a complete diagram see for example clause C 2 2 2 1 ETSI 161 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 3 4 Second outgoing call on the line or system Use case the PPs are attached to a multi call line A call is going on on PP1 A second external call is initiated For conciseness of the diagram line identification is not represented which corresponds to the case of an internal outgoing call PP2 PP1 FP Network attached to line u attached to line u Call established with call id 1 external or internal CC SETUP CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt Use of line u if external for calling called number lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 15 H gt gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 2 gt gt gt CC INFO Use of line u if external for calling called number lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info call
263. oding and audio features clause 4 2 of EN 300 444 For the purposes of the present document the following definitions shall apply G 726 32 kbit s ADPCM SC 1 ITU T Recommendation G 726 15 narrow band codec as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 5 1 PP audio type 1a classic GAP handset SC 2 Audio specification for a general purpose 3 1 kHz telephony handset as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 3 PP audio type 1b improved GAP handset SC 3 Audio specification for a general purpose 3 1 kHz telephony handset with improved TCLw as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 4 It is compatible with VoIP and long delay networks ETSI 196 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP audio type 1c HATS tested 3 1 kHz handset SC 4 Audio specification for a general purpose 3 1 kHz telephony handset based on the new HATS methodology as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 5 It includes strong echo suppression TCLw requirements and is compatible with VoIP and long delay networks PP audio type 1d HATS tested 3 1 kHz improved handset SC 5 Audio specification for a general purpose 3 1 kHz telephony handset based on the new HATS methodology with improved quality as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 6 It includes strong echo suppression TCLw requirements and is compatible with VoIP and long delay networks This type has a more demanding acoustic specification providing superior subjective quality In practi
264. of called number eee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseenaeenes 163 C 4 1 4 FP managed line selection Manual dialling of called numbe eee eee eeceeeeceseceeeceseceeeeseeeseenseenes 164 C 4 1 5 Unsupported new outgoing parallel Call 0 ee eee eeceeecesecesecesecsecseecseecseseaeseeeseeeseeeeeeeseesseeeseesseeens 164 C 4 2 Incoming parallel Calls ica si scesccs Sassveustientean teagan sorsenbetia ety othew tots Seasea even tebe patti geen a eee 166 C 4 2 1 Two simultaneous incoming calls on two different lines eee eee cee ceeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeseeeseeaeeees 166 C 4 2 2 FP release of waiting call when remote party hangs Up cece cee eeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseceseenseeees 167 C 4 2 3 Two incoming calls before user ANSWETS 00 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeceeeceseceseceaecsaecaeecaeecseeeseseaeeeeeeseeeseseseeeseceseesseeeas 167 C 4 3 Call waiting represented as first call when user hangs up ceecesecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesenseceseesaeeeas 168 Ci5 List access Service Use case examples ozs sc yecatesssyecesssasces cote peenstedenbueeplees eaaa RAAE TE EERE E 169 C 5 1 Ea Te e ses seve aches thes A teed va elec Aap aces sates EEE E EE E aawtohs eabeedenebee tay 169 C 5 2 Use case transfer number from missed call list to contact List eee eee eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeensecesecesecaesaeeees 170 C 5 3 Use case select and call internal party cece eeceesceseceecesecaecsaecaeecseseeeseeesseeeeseeeeeeeereesecesee
265. of the PP to accept a manual entry of the PARK for ensuring attachment to the right FP in a physical area covered by many providers terminal identity number assignment in mono cell system A 4 Ability to assign to each PT a terminal identity number D 2 4 DLC service definitions clause 5 1 of EN 300 444 LAPC class A service and Lc D 1 single frame acknowledged C plane data link service providing a single data link between one FT and one PT The higher layer information is segmented if necessary and transmitted in numbered frames The Lc provides frame delimiting transparency and frame synchronization Cs channel fragmentation and recombination D 2 Lc service providing channel dependant fragmentation by means of dividing a LAPC data unit into more than one service data units for delivery to the MAC layer Cs logical channel and recombination by means of joining several service units received from the MAC layer Cs logical channel into a LAPC data unit broadcast Lb service D 3 simplex point to multipoint transmission using simple fixed length DLC frames providing a restricted broadcast service in direction FP to PP s intra cell voluntary connection handover D 4 internal handover process provided and initiated by the DLC layer e g as a result of continued poor quality of service from the MAC layer whereby one set of DLC entities C plane and U plane can re route data from one MAC connection to a second new MAC connection
266. onnections 5 4 21 NG1 D 1 DLC Service LU1 TRUP Class 5 3 21 M M 0 min_delay G 711 16 64 kbit s PCM codec a EA tone i switching NG1 SC 10 PP Audio type 1a classic 5 6 21 N A N A GAP handset NG1 SC 11 PP Audio type 1b N A improved GAP handset note 1 NG1 SC 12 PP Audio type 1c HATS N A 3 1 kHz handset NG1 SC 13 PP Audio type 1d HATS N A 3 1 kHz improved handset NG1 SC 17 PP Audio type 3a HATS EEAS N A 3 1 kHz handsfree NG1 SC 18 PP Audio type 3b HATS RAE N A 3 1 kHz improved handsfree NG1 SC 23 FP Audio type 1b new 5 6 21 N A C706 C706 ISDN 3 1 kHz AA narrowband NG1 SC 25 PP echo supressor for FP N A C707 C707 narrowband NG1 SC 26 FP Audio type 2 analog 5 6 21 N A C706 C706 PSTN 3 1 kHz NG1 SC 27 FP Audio type 3 VoIP 5 6 21 C706 C706 3 1 kHz NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal 5 6 21 M call NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal 5 6 21 Raka O conference NG1 SC 34 Adaptive volume control for 5 6 21 N A O O FP O Zgjz zg z zZjzj zjo ETSI 22 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NG1 2 Narrow band PCM G 711 64 kbit s voice service Service DECT Feature mapping NG1 P 1 2 level GFSK modulation NG1 P 5 Physical Packet P80 NG1 M 2 In_normal_delay symmetric MAC service type NG1 M 4 Advanced Connections NG1 D 3 DLC service LU7 64 kbit s protected bearer service NG1 D 6 DLC frame FU7 NG1 SC 2 ITU T Recommendation G 711 16 64 kbi
267. ontrol messages or send them transparently to the network Numbering plan id field of CLIP IE is set to private numbering plan for internal calls any other type for external calls as specified in TS 102 527 1 21 The definition of the new C0 control code 1C is proposed for use as described in table 17 The new DECT codes may need a translation into network control messages on FP side These messages are network operator dependent Network control messages may be sent directly by the user as keypad information The FP should send them transparently to the network Codec change for parallel calls In case the parallel calls use different codecs the standard codec change procedure shall be used see TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 3 4 and annex D ETSI 48 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 j Call established l lt lt MULTI KEYPAD 17H 15H gt gt i CC INFO l lt lt MULTI KEYPAD number digits gt gt PP FP CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD number digits gt gt CC SERVICE CHANGE lt lt CODEC LIST gt gt CC SERVICE ACCEPT IWU INFO lt lt CODEC LIST gt gt IWU INFO lt lt CODEC LIST gt gt Figure 3 Codec change procedure example for outgoing call initiation 7 4 3 4 Sending negative acknowledgement When the FP fails to fulfil a service requested by the PP the FP shall warn the user by sending the lt lt SIGNAL gt gt information element with the value 09H indicating nega
268. or line 3 entry in line settings list IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry session id entry identifier gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part line 3 content IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry confirm session id entry identifier start index gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session session identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session confirm session identifier gt gt ne FACILITY attached to the line lt lt EVENTS NOTIFICATIONS lt List change indication Line settings N gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld gt gt CC RELEASE CC RELEASE COM Figure C 43 Changing the name of a line ETSI 189 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Annex D informative Services and features defined in other specifications D 1 Services and features defined in TS 102 527 1 New Generation DECT part 1 The following informative annex shows the features and MAC DLC services defined in TS 102 527 1 21 New Generation DECT part 1 many of them are reused in the present document This list is informative and shows the status in TS 102 527 1 21 V1 2 1 In case of changes or divergences the original definitions at TS 102 527 1 21 shall rule D 1 1 New Generation DECT part 1 Speech Services clause 5 1 of TS 102 527 1 Narrow band ADPCM G 726 voice service NG1 1 ITU T Recommendation G 726 15 narrow band codec NG1
269. or NG DECT PPs that do not implement the Multiple lines feature Part 1 PPs or Part 3 PPs not implementing the feature However such PPs could ignore the line id received C 2 2 2 5 No line identification by PP and permanent FP managed line selection Use case the PP always uses the same line for outgoing call e g the line is selected by configuration In this case the FP may send the line id as soon as possible i e together with the call id PP FP Outgoing CC SETUP parallel call initiation CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line selected for the call lt Identifier type Line identifier gt if external lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for external calls gt lt Identifier value u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt gt gt Figure C 6 No line identification by PP and permanent FP managed line selection NOTE This use case does not apply to a PPs attached to a single line as a rule a PP implem
270. orted 0 Figure 44 Easy pairing when PIN is set to default 0000 value ETSI authentication code 132 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP NWK PP MAC FP MAC FP NW Q _3 Access rights supported 1 Push button Qu_c Easy pairing supported 1 Within timer Use 0000 F lt AP 01 gt value as ACCESS RIGHTS REQ authentication code KEY ALLOCATE AUTH REQUEST Enter Pin Code Use entered gt PIN code as Quy_3 Access rights supported 0 Figure 45 Easy pairing when PIN is not set to default 0000 value switching back to PIN entry Backward compatibility management when a PP is in front of a FP without easy pairing capability here are three possible behaviours of the PP among several others and left free to implementer 1 2 3 The PP uses the easy pairing feature in case of failure requests the PIN code exactly as in front of a FP with easy pairing The PP does not take into account the capability bit This means easy pairing feature is always used on the PP independently of the FP type The PP uses the easy pairing feature but in case of easy pairing failure the PP uses the capability bit to warn the user that re triggering of the FP registration button might be necessary before using the easy PIN code registration feature This deals with the case where the FP might not remain in registration mode in case the PP easy pairing attempt fails could occur on some GAP FP for example
271. ould be understood as an example The real sequences may also contain different Call Control messages or Call Control messages in another order or Call Control messages with other contents NOTE 2 On a single call mode line PP2 is always idle On a multiple call mode line PP2 may be idle or busy If busy PP2 would receive a call waiting indication instead of a CC SETUP and would send a Call waiting acceptation instead of a CC CONNECT NOTE 3 tone signal which will terminate the procedure NOTE 4 A multiple call line may not support the additional internal call In that case PP will receive back a busy In figure 15 the second call is established using the Outgoing parallel call initiation procedure of clause 7 4 3 5 1 however any procedure leading to two parallel calls may precede the call transfer procedure ETSI 62 7 4 3 6 2 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Unannounced call transfer procedure For the Unannounced call transfer procedure all requirements of clause 7 4 3 6 apply Additionally if the control code is sent after reception of the ring back tone but before the CC CONNECT pick up time the transfer is defined as unannounced PP1 call 1 established external or internal Try to establish parallel internal call 2 CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD 17H terminal id number gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier
272. part n entry content gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry session id entry identifier entry id n list of field identifiers Line Id id Line name id Attached handsets id gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry confirm session id start index n gt gt IWU INFO iE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part nt entry content gt user may update the Attached handsets field for nt line in line settings list to attach the new registered PP to the nt line IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save entry session id entry identifier entry id n gt gt IWU INFO for ne 1 N IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part n entry updated gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU save e ntry confirm session id entry identifier entry id n start index gt gt FP notifie s list change notification to all PPs attached to the line n line settings end session Figure C 1 Attaching a new PP to one or several lines NOTE 1 The above diagram assumes that only one data packet command is necessary for reading one entry content i e the data packet last command is received directly NOTE 2 As an alternative all entries in the Line settings list could be read all at once with one read entries command ETSI 151 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 2 2 Outgoing first call on a line For each use case two sub use cases at leas
273. pe Call identifier gt lt Identifier value id for call 2 H gt gt gt Call transfer request CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 34 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype external call gt lt Identifier value transferred call line id u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value id for call 1 H gt gt gt CC RELEASE CC RELEASE COM FP PP2 CC SETUP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value id for call 2 H gt gt gt CC SETUP ACK CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype external call gt lt Identifier value transferred call line id u gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier lt Identifier value id for call 2 H gt lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Updated call id gt lt Identifier value id for call 1 H gt gt gt Figure 15 Announced call transfer example with internal target PP2 call transfer request after CC CONNECT NOTE 1 The Call Control message sequence in figure 15 sh
274. peech services 7 3 1 Implementation examples of part 1 Wideband Speech specific procedures For detailed examples of Wideband speech specific procedures please refer to the informative annex D of TS 102 527 1 21 7 4 Network NWK layer procedures specific for part 3 This clause specifies the additional NWK layer procedures messages and information elements required in New Generation DECT Extended Wideband Speech Services not described in TS 102 527 1 21 or in EN 300 444 12 GAP or incorporating modifications to the description given in these specifications ETSI 43 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 This profile does not prevent any PT or FT from transmitting or receiving and processing any other NWK layer message or information element not specified in the profile A PT or FT receiving an unsupported NWK layer message or information element which it does not recognize shall ignore it as specified in EN 300 175 5 5 clause 17 7 4 1 Generic events notification 7 4 1 1 General Equipment supporting New Generation DECT wideband voice shall support the generic events notifications as described in this clause If there is no existing connection when sending an events notification the CLSS procedure shall be used as defined in clause 10 4 2 3 of EN 300 175 5 5 with the lt lt Event notifications gt gt information element in the FACILITY message FP shall use an already established link for the purpose of transmi
275. plements lt id type Call identifier the Call identification feature value waiting call id gt gt gt Figure 9 Call waiting acceptation NOTE 4 The line identifier indicates to the PP on which line the waiting call occurred if external It is however ignored on PP side if the PP does not implement the Line identification feature If the remote party hangs up before the waiting call has been accepted or rejected the FP shall send a call release to the PP using Call release and call release rejection of clause 7 4 3 5 4 if the PP implements the Call identification feature or using On hold call release otherwise 7 4 3 5 7 Call waiting rejection from PP to FP This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in a call on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal If the Multiple call feature is implemented on a line the line may be configured in single call mode or in multiple call mode NOTE 1 Implementation of the Multiple call feature or of the Multiple line feature implies implementation of the Common parallel call procedures external or internal feature In case the PP is already involved in a call active call and after a call waiting has been indicated the rejection of the waiting call shall be done by sending the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 36H Furthermore If the
276. procedures see clause 7 4 3 5 Common parallel call procedures external or internal Even for PPs with only 2 call instances call identifiers allow to properly handle asynchronous messages for example a call toggle from the PP crossing a call release from the FP Call identifiers are assigned by the FP and are uniquely defined DECT system wide In other words call identifiers shall NOT be PP specific i e there shall never be two equal call identifiers even for 2 different PPs nor line specific ETSI 80 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 pp call id 4 external Pp call id 1 internal line 1 external number 1 line 2 external number 2 call id 2 external Figure 33 Calls identifiers are assigned by the FP and unique for the DECT System A call identifier is assigned each time a call is setup In order to be usable for parallel multiple calls a call identifier shall be assigned also for the first call of a PP The call identifier is freed at call release i e available for a further new call Typically a FP will assign call identifiers by taking them in the 0 n interval where n 1 represents the maximum number of simultaneous calls the FP can handle To assign a call identifier to a new call it will use the smallest free number in this interval free numbers being defined as not yet assigned numbers or numbers that were assigned but for which the call has been terminated
277. ption activation PT initiated N 27 activation of the encryption process suggested by PT The real time start of ciphering is done in the MAC layer and is always initiated by the PT encryption deactivation FT initiated N 28 deactivation of the encryption process requested by FT The real time stop of ciphering is done in the MAC layer and is always initiated by the PT encryption deactivation PT initiated N 29 deactivation of the encryption process suggested by PT The real time stop of ciphering is done in the MAC layer and is always initiated by the PT Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP N 30 ability to provide the calling party number to the called party before accepting the call internal call N 31 call between 2 users that does not make use of the local network resources This is typically useful in residential environments service call N 32 call initiated by a DECT PT for entering of FT related service and adjustment procedures in a transparent way After having sent the service call indication the PT behaves according to the rules of a normal call Enhanced U plane connection N 33 ability of the FT to initiate connection of the U plane during call establishment or release e g to facilitate the provision of in band tones or announcements Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP N 34 ability to provide the calling party name to the called party before accepting the call D 2 2 GAP Speech c
278. quality version as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 8 This type applies to handsfree devices operating with an open loudspeaker and microphone The type applies to either 1 specific PPs designed to operate in handsfree mode 2 standard handset implementing types la 1b 1c or 1d but with the option to operate in handsfree mode and 3 handsfree accessory devices connected to a handset by any wired or wireless technology It provides 300 Hz 3 4 kHz frequency range and it is defined based on HATS methodology This type has a more demanding acoustic specification providing superior subjective quality In practice this means better electro acoustic components speaker microphone electronics and signal processing PP Audio type 4a HATS 7 kHz handsfree NG1 SC 19 Wideband 7 kHz handsfree device as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 2 12 This type applies to handsfree devices operating with an open loudspeaker and microphone The profile applies to either 1 specific PPs designed to operate in handsfree mode 2 standard wideband handset implementing profiles 2a 2b or 2c but with the option to operate in handsfree mode and 3 handsfree accessory devices connected to a handset by any wired or wireless technology It provides 150 Hz 7 kHz frequency range and it is defined based on HATS methodology ETSI 193 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP Audio type 4b HATS 7 kHz improved handsfree NG1 SC 20
279. r can be handled at FP level otherwise the success of the transfer is network dependent Implementation of the Common parallel calls procedures feature is a pre requisite on PP and FP sides for implementation of the Call transfer feature The call transfer may be announced or unannounced depending on when the call transfer control message is sent by the PP In order to transfer a call the PP shall first establish a parallel call with the call transfer target and then send the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 34H Furthermore If the PP implements the Call identification feature it shall send the identifier of the call to be transferred in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element included in the same CC INFO message e If the PP implements the Line identification feature and the call to be transferred is external it shall send the line identifier of the targeted call in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element the same one if the call identifier is also sent even if it is attached to a single line The FP shall understand a call tranfer request as a request for transferring the previously active call to the currently active call It shall issue a call identifier update for the PP target of the call transfer as shown in figures 13 and 14 indicating the call identifier of the transferred call as updated call identifier If the previously active call has b
280. r cases If session identifier is wrong the FP shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason invalid session number In case the start index is invalid the FP shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason invalid start index This includes the case where the list is empty In case the index range given with counter is invalid the FP shall return the existing elements in the range In case an unknown list entry field identifier is requested the FP shall ignore this field and continue with the next requested field 7 4 10 4 3 2 Read entries confirm command This command from FP confirms the read command with the corresponding entry entries with one or several specified fields Corresponding entry entries are sent along in data packets ETSI 100 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Table 37 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Read entries confirm command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment errr Peay eaten INS ROTATE lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt Length of content lt Protocol Discriminator gt List access lt Command read entries ist access command confirm gt tart index see note lt Session identifier gt 1 127 ession identifier see note 0 255 Number of delivered entries NOTE _ Start index and Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is
281. re dialling of the called number ETSI 164 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP Ongoing call external or internal Outgoing call initiation with Line selection by the PP not FP managed Outgoing parallel call initiation CC INFO lt Keypad info 15 17 H gt gt gt lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type Line identifier subtype external call Line selected by PP for the call using the CALL INFO method if external value u gt gt gt OR Line selected by PP for the call lt lt MULTI KEYPAD using the KEYPAD method lt Keypad info 23 3u H gt gt gt if external lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type Line identifier subtype external call Call id assignement by the FP Repeated here as a result of the CALL INFO completion principle value u gt possibly ignored if PP does not implement lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value assigned call id gt CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id type Line identifier subtype external call value u gt lt id type subtype Call identifier value assigned call id gt Figure C 19 Outgoing parallel calls line pre selection by PP Manual dialling of called number
282. rights procedure is triggered by PIN entering Easy pairing registration NG1 A 2 ability to register a PP that is not registered to a FP by pressing a physical or logical button on the PP and on the FP Handset locator NG1 A 3 ability to locate physically handsets have them ring by pressing a physical or logical button on the FP 6 Inter operability requirements 6 1 General The tables listed in this clause define the status of all protocol elements i e features services and procedures which can be mandatory optional conditional under the provision of another protocol element outside the scope of the present document or not applicable The status is identified by the status column designations defined in clause 3 2 and is described separately for FT and PT In the case of FT the status can be different for products intended for the Residential Business R B market or for the Public market segment All optional elements shall be process mandatory according to the procedures described in the present document Protocol elements defined as mandatory optional or conditional in this clause are further defined in the referenced DECT specification or if needed in clause 7 of the present document New Generation DECT wideband speech is defined as a backcompatible enhancement of EN 300 444 12 Generic Access Profile GAP All procedures not specific of the New Generation DECT are referenced to their original description in E
283. roviding superior subjective quality In practice this means better electro acoustic components speaker microphone electronics and signal processing FP audio type 1a classic ISDN 3 1 kHz SC 8 Audio specification for a DECT FP supporting narrowband service and providing a digital 64 kbit s G 711 interface typically but not necessarily an ISDN connection classic specification as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 2 It is recommended to use FP type 1b instead of type 1a FP audio type 1b new ISDN 3 1 kHz SC 9 Audio specification for a DECT FP supporting narrowband service and providing a digital 64 kbit s G 711 interface typically but not necessarily an ISDN connection new specification as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 3 3 It is recommended to use FP type 1b instead of type 1a PP echo canceller for FP SC 10 Auxiliary feature for FPs consisting on echo canceller for handling the echo generated by PPs type la As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 4 2 Only narrowband echo cancellation capability is required PP echo supressor for FP SC 11 Auxiliary feature for FPs consisting on echo supressor for handling the echo generated by PPs type la As defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 7 4 3 Only narrowband capability is required FP audio type 2 analog PSTN 3 1 kHz SC 12 Audio specification for a DECT FP supporting narrowband service and providing an analog 2 wire PSTN interface As defined by EN 300 17
284. ructed to monitor the registration user feedback see clause 7 10 6 As additional security and for user convenience it is recommended to use the Base station name selection clause 7 10 7 This allows checking that registration of a PP is ongoing on the correct FP The Easy pairing feature support capability bit shall be correctly managed by the FP This allows to make the difference between an easy pairing capable FP and other FPs 7 10 1 2 2 Base station limited registration mode The FP shall have a physical or a logical button to trigger the access rights procedure When the button is pressed on the FP the FP shall set its broadcasting Access Rights supported attributes capability bit to enable the on air subscription see clause 7 4 9 1 Higher layer information in FP broadcast and EN 300 444 12 clause 13 6 Broadcast attributes management At the same time the FP shall set the Easy pairing registration supported capability bit see clause 7 6 3 5 Qr Extended Fixed Part capabilities part 2 These bits shall be set during timer F lt AP 01 gt When the access rights procedure is successfully completed these bits shall be cleared For security reasons the FP shall perform no more than one successful access rights procedure during the subscription mode 7 10 1 2 3 Searching mode request The access rights procedure triggering by the user on the PP causes it to actively search for a FP broadcasting Access Rig
285. s list This handset is no longer reachable from external lines This temporary state may arise especially when removing and creating new lines NOTE 1 This mechanism makes it possible to register unregister any handset to from the DECT system and to attach detach it to from a line in two separate steps NOTE 2 As specified in the Multiple lines feature NG1 N 14 attachment may be PP managed for example the user chooses the line at registration or FP managed for example the handset is attached by default to a line If the Base reset influences the Internal names list or the Line settings list attached handsets the corresponding handsets de attachments and un registrations shall be correctly handled 7 4 11 3 DECT system settings list The following entry fields are defined for the singular DECT system list entry Table 58 Entry fields for the singular DECT system list entry Field Field Default Base Normative action comment Clause identifier value reset impacted 0x01 PIN code YES MD MD Allows modification of the PIN code 7 4 11 3 1 0x02 Clock master MD MD Defines the entity which sets date an 7 4 11 3 2 time for the DECT system PP or FP 0x03 Base reset YES YES Sets settings back to default factory 7 4 11 3 3 values 0x04 FP IP address type MD MD DHCP or static 7 4 11 3 4 0x05 FP IP address value MD MD Editable only for static IP address 7 4 11 3 5 0x06 FP IP
286. s all parallel call initiation information in a single CC INFO message e g the user used the phone book before placing a parallel call However FP managed line selection is used A single message sent by the PP with 15 17H called number but without line id PP FP Ongoing call external or internal Outgoing call initiation with FP managed line selection Outgoing CC INFO parallel call initiation lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 15 17 H gt gt gt lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Call id assignement and CC INFO line selection by the FP lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line selection performed lt id type Line identifier subtype external call by the FP value u gt I possibly ignored if PP does not implement lt id type subtype Call identifier the Call identification feature value assigned call id gt Figure C 18 Outgoing parallel calls all in one PP message FP managed line selection C 4 1 3 Line pre selection by PP Manual dialling of called number Use case The PP sends initiates a parallel call with 15 17H line id in a single CC INFO message e g the user pre selected or pre dialled k the line to use unless the PP is attached to only one line in which case the user does not have to do so but the present use case still applies before manually dialling the called number The FP replies with the call id as soon as it received the first message and befo
287. s ienee a E R E A A N E 59 CNIP on call waiting indication 2 s scssesstevesces sheessepstnestee shenbsevnsobsnes caesssuseenesoenchenssereavisoensyase TEs 60 Call tram ster seen riser orrn rear T Biseh vette E Hasast a Apap O E EE A E E ETE atest 60 Announced call transfer procedure ee ee cee cesecesecsseceeeeeeceseeeeeeecesecssecsaecsaecsaecaeecseeeseseaeeesseeesaes 61 Unannounced call transfer procedure 0 0 eee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceseceaecsaecsaecsaecaeecseeeseseaeenseeeeesees 62 Call re injection to the line external or internal 0 0 0 cece eeeceeeeeeseceeeeeceseceeeeeceaeceeaeecsaeeeeneeceaeeeeees 63 Remote party CLIP on call tramsten isinir cece she sestsscevbsesees sipssce reeeo EEr Tse Tenai EE A Eas 64 Remote party CNIP on call tramsfets s s csccsscccceesssessceesobsteesssesscessou rees r EEr Teei rio E Ei ios 64 3 party conference with established external and or internal calls ssessesseeseseseseeesesteerssreereserreserees 65 Call intrusion from PP to EP erennere a a a E alae E 67 Implicit call intrusion into a line in single call mode o oo eee eee eee ceeceee cee caeecaeeeseeeeeeneeeseensees 67 Explicit call INtr SION seiis spiri rie orrs so rea eo EEr ooe EE E ssh sees E E EE ATE TEES EE A EEE 68 Int rnal call codec Priority ssnipe checss es uaseepoapessepsaeesyg e ET ESEA E EE EE EEE ETES E R Tr EE a a 70 Description aca ssthe aed EE EEA EE ET 70 Exception CASES ai eiecisss cdoaacescedeteseneehaaac
288. s keypad code 15 hex NOTE 5 The FT is not mandated to receive and understand the register recall DECT character However if a FT supports it there may be no corresponding action that the FT can take with the local network as a result of this function 6 5 Data Link Control DLC services New Generation DECT part 3 Extended wideband speech services devices shall support the following DLC services Table 4 DLC services status Service supported 3 T a NG1 D 1 LU1 Transparent UnProtected service TRUP Class 0 5 3 21 M M M minimum_delay TRUP C401 M F NG1 D 2 LU1 Transparent UnProtected service TRUP Class 0 C401 C401 NG1 D 3 C401 NG1 D 4 C401 NG1 D 5 M NG1 D 6 C401 NG1 D 7 C401 GAP D 1 GAP D 2 M M M GAP D 40 GAP D GAP D GAP D 403 Status defined by clause 6 3 table 2 C402 IF service GAP M 9 THEN O ELSE M C403 IF feature GAP N 29 OR GAP N 28 THEN M ELSE I C404 IF feature GAP N 17 OR GAP N 27 THEN M ELSE NOTE The PT is required to be able to support handover between RFPs The invocation of the feature is however optional to the operator 2 GAP D O M O K 2 ojola A oo K X ETSI 30 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 6 6 Medium Access Control MAC services New Generation DECT part 3 Extended wideband speech services devices shall support the following MAC layer services Table 5 MAC services status Service supported Name of service Reference T
289. s with low complexity and very low delay G 729 1 32 kbit s wideband NG1 SC 4 ITU T Recommendation G 729 1 wideband codec 18 as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 5 4 ITU T Recommendation G 729 1 18 codec is optional for New Generation DECT in order to provide even higher wideband quality and better robustness to packets frames losses than ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 at half the bit rate of ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 This allows a better transport efficiency on the network side and over the DECT air interface one full slot In addition it is seamless interoperable with largely deployed ITU T Recommendation G 729 1 6 based VoIP networks and terminals ITU T Recommendation G 729 1 18 encodes signals in frames of 20 ms It is a scalable codec operating at bitrates of 8 kbit s and from 12 kbit s to 32 kbit s per steps of 2 kbit s in narrow band or in wideband from 14 kbit s ITU T Recommendation G 729 1 18 already incorporates a high efficiency packet loss concealment mechanism MPEG 4 ER AAC LD 64 kbit s super wideband NG1 SC 5 MPEG 4 ER AAC LD codec 19 20 as defined by EN 300 175 8 8 clause 5 5 1 MPEG 4 ER AAC LD is optional for New Generation DECT in order to provide higher quality than G 722 by further extending the bandwidth to superwideband 50 Hz to 14 kHz and even further up to full audio bandwidth 20 Hz to 20 kHz MPEG 4 ER AAC LD is designed for high quality communication applications including all kin
290. saeesseeeaeeeas 172 C 5 4 Use case select and call number from contact list 00 eee cee ceeecseecseeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeseeeseesseenseesseeaeseseeegs 173 C 5 5 Use case save entry with invalid format ee eeeeeceeeceeecesecesecesecaecsaecseecaeecseseaeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseesseesseeees 174 C 5 6 Use case te d invalid start andexs ssc sesh ssocseecssesgevsnsavoepsupsvechcosads eau E EE E a EEEa a a E peed dee 174 C 5 7 Use case modify a PP intemal nameti sceseseesds sapevecbeesevsee augue aea e aE E e IRE Era a aia Ea re eR 175 C 6 List access service with voice calls additional use cases and procedure diagrams seeseeeees 176 C 6 1 General EE aie Sees eee eek et a Ss oh EN E Se os a ee 176 C 6 2 List access when a voice call is already Ongoing 0 0 ee ee ee cete cee ceee cee caeecaeeeseeeeeeseesaeseaeeeeeeeeeasenseesseesaeeeas 176 C 6 2 1 Use case Consult a list during a voice Calle ieee eecesecesecssecseeceecseeceeeeeeeseecseseaeeeeeseeeeeseseeesesesaeenaeeas 176 C 6 2 2 Use case call transfer using internal names list first call explicitly put on hold eee eee 177 C 6 2 3 Use case call transfer using internal names list first call implicitly put on hold by internal call 177 C 6 2 4 Use case establishing a parallel call using contact list ee ee ceeecesecesecnsecseecaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesrenseeenaes 179 C 6 3 Incoming voice call during list access Session 00 ee ee eeecesecesecesecsecsecsaecseecaeecaeseaeeeeeeee
291. se incoming voice call during list access managed as parallel call previous session not ended Use case A list access call is on going from a PP An incoming call is presented to the line The FP manages it as a parallel call NOTE The first list access may have or not a call id assigned by the FP Depending mainly on the service type used to setup the list access call PP FP List access call established with call id 1 Network Incoming call from calling number CC INFO Incoming call presentation lt lt SIGNAL value call waiting tone 07 H gt gt lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER lt Calling Party Address calling number gt gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Lineld call id 2 gt gt Figure C 38 List access use case incoming voice call during list access managed as parallel call previous session not ended C 7 DECT system settings diagrams C 7 1 General In the following flowcharts we assume that N lines are defined i e Total number of entries N in line settings list before starting lines settings session The total number of registered PPs is M i e Total number of entries M in internal names list before starting internal names session Only one data packet command is necessary to read one entry content i e data packet last command is received directly NOTE In the following flowcharts the read entries or search entries might be done prior to the seque
292. sed for the call 7 4 10 5 1 7 NOTE The Incoming accepted call list may include internal calls e g if allowed by configuration Clause 7 4 10 5 1 2 1 describes the coding of terminal identity numbers 7 4 10 5 6 All call list entry fields This list contains all calls missed outgoing incoming accepted occurring on any line of the DECT system Table 55 All call list entry fields Field identifier Field Normative action comment 0x01 Call type Coding of the list 7 4 10 5 1 9 missed accepted outgoing Number of the calling called party 7 4 10 5 1 2 see note Name of calling called party 7 4 10 5 1 3 Date and Time Date and Time of the missed call 7 4 10 5 1 4 0x05 Line name Name of line on which the call was 7 4 10 5 1 6 received passed Id of line line used for the call 7 4 10 5 1 7 NOTE The All call list may include internal calls e g if allowed by configuration Clause 7 4 10 5 1 2 1 describes the coding of terminal identity numbers ETSI 114 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 10 5 7 Contact list entry fields This list contains the contact list or phone book for the complete DECT system Table 56 Contact list entry fields Field identifier Normative action comment Name of the contact last name 7 4 10 5 1 3 First name of the contact 7 4 10 5 1 10 Contact number Number of the contact 7 4 10 5 1 11 10x04 Associated melody Ringing melody used for the contact 7 4 10 5 1 12 Id of lin
293. senees 132 7 10 1 3 1 Registration mode automatic ACCESS ssesesseeseseeeseeteresreseetestertsstrttststentsstertnserrtnestenesreeteseesrent 132 7 10 1 3 2 Base station name Selection cesceeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeceseceaeceaecaaecaeecseseaeseeeeeeesecseesesesesseeeseesseeeas 133 ETSI 7 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 10 1 3 3 Registration user feedback eee en re e Sn a AS o E EEK SEE ES S Ar neS 135 7 10 2 Handset locators ii3 an eG ee Ae Bh ae E EA R RE R 135 Annex A normative System PALAMELETS 6 scciccassossscessocsecesessasssestsesesvesadeessesdedeons doassoessoedesossansseeese 137 AVAL ZA pplication UMTS eonen eee the tactile E EE cela ds AE E E A E E aE cetecty a ai 137 Annex B normative Pr o ed re Cia Gras ssnccsscssscsscssessessseccscsessstecvcseecessensessevessesacsesaessoseesventesstecs 138 Bi Events notification diagrams occ eeii eE EE A E EEEL A EE a iee eri 138 B 1 1 Event notification when there is no existing Connection sseessereesesresssreereresteeresteetesrertsserrreestsetesreeresrestt 138 B 1 2 Event notification during existing Connection eseeseseseseeeresresesreeesteetsserrteestentestertrsrertssertretesteetesrerrenrenrt 139 B 1 3 Event notification when the PP is switched On ssseesseseeseesssresrsreessreersserrresestesresrenresrerrnentrnesrenresreereeresre 139 B 1 4 Event notification using call connection eee ee ee este ceecesecesecsecseecaeecaeeeaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesa
294. service UNF Class 0 NG1 D 5 FU1 DLC frame NG1 D 6 FU7 DLC frame NG1 D 7 FU12 DLC frame with adaptation for codec G 729 1 Service Procedure mapping Procedure Reference are a r leet cl al TRUP operation Class 0 No Lu retransmission or Paracel sequencing Class 0 procedures 14 3 2 4 Minimum delay speech operation 14 2 3 4 LLME U plane establishment 9 9 1 12 5 3 21 LU1 Transparent UnProtected service 11 2 4 TRUP operation Class 0 No Lux retransmission or 14 2 3 1 4 M M sequencing po 53 21 C401 C401 C401 Po o agna caoi C401 C401 LU12 UNprotected Framed service UNF 11 14 4 M M operation Class 0 No Lu retransmission or 14 2 3 1 4 M M M sequencing Doo FC m m m pO S spa C401 c4o1 C401 po 5812 C401 c4o1 C401 ETSI 38 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 6 12 Medium Access Control MAC service to procedure mapping The MAC service to procedure mapping of EN 300 444 GAP 12 clause 6 8 2 with the following changes and additional services shall apply Table 11 MAC service to procedure mapping Service Procedure mapping NG1M 1 In_minimum delay 5 4 21 symmetric MAC service type 7 9 1 21 5 6 3 5 6 1 1 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6 2 1 3 nv PT M M M M M NG1 M 2 In_normal delay 5 4 21 symmetric MAC service type 7 9 1 21 i i i 5 6 3 5 6 1 1 3 5 6 1 2 3 6 2 1 3 M M M M M NG1 M 3 Ipq_error_detection 5
295. ses because FP management is not needed in that case although it may send it without requesting the user to explicitly having to select the line NOTE 3 A PP not implementing the Line identification feature PPs compliant with NG DECT Part 1 TS 102 527 1 21 GAP EN 300 444 12 and PPs compliant with the present document not implementing the feature also implicitly uses FP managed line selection but is out of scope of the present procedure If the PP does not send any line identifier for a given outgoing call the FP shall always notify back the PP of the used line identifier even if there is only one line in the DECT system This applies for the following types of PPs a PP implementing the present procedure an NG DECT PP not implementing the current procedure a Part 1 PP or possibly a Part 3 PP A GAP PP however shall not receive any line identifier The notified line identifier information shall be sent included in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element sent in a CC INFO message ETSI 77 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP attached at least to line u FP Network CC SETUP CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Selects u among lines attached to PP Use of line u for calling called number CC INFO lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Line identifier for
296. sets of services Intrusion call supported sets of services Call deflection 1 1 lt ag5 gt no emission mode support 0 1 Related procedures see NG1 M 5 in clause 6 12 lt a36 gt List access service feature 0 1 Related procedures clause 7 4 10 support lt a37 gt Easy pairing feature support 0 1 Related procedures clauses 7 10 1 2 1 7 10 1 3 1 7 10 1 2 2 7 10 1 2 3 7 10 1 3 2 and 7 10 1 3 3 If supported for security reasons it shall be set to 1 and unset at the same time as a44 Multiple lines Go all Related procedures clause 7 4 7 Multiple calls il Related procedures clause 7 4 8 Permanent CLIR Ps Related procedures clause 7 4 12 7 4 10 List access service 7 4 10 1 General considerations Equipment supporting New Generation DECT Part 3 shall support the List access service feature as described in the present clause The lists managed by this feature are structured as represented in figure 39 ETSI 90 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Contact Internal names DECT system Line setinde list list settings list 9 FP registra tion mode name number PIN code Line id first name name clock master Line name contact Line name Base reset attached PP number Line id etc FP IP dialling prefix associated address FP melody melody FP version FP volume blocked nb multiple calls n entries n entries 1 entry m entries 1 entry per line A bh eFfeFSS
297. sfree NG1 SC 28 FP Audio type 4 ISDN Ea wideband NG1 SC 29 FP Audio type 5 VoIP wideband NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal ee call NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal conference N M M M M M A 08 08 A A 08 08 N A N C708 C7 C708 C7 O M M M M M M M M N A N N A C708 C7 C708 C7 M N A N A N A N A N A N A M A N NG1 SC 34 Adaptive volume control for N A FP 5 6 21 ETSI ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 27 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Service DECT Feature mapping 2 EE DECT feature service Reference PT oat 5 1 21 O O O NG1 P 1 2 level GFSK modulation 5 5 21 5 5 21 M M M NG1 M 2 In_normal_delay symmetric 5 4 21 M M i 5 4 21 M 5 421 M 5 321 M NG1 SC 9 Codec selection and NG1 SC 14 PP Audio type 2a C703 ITU T Recommendation P 311 i 5 note 2 7 kHz handset NG1 SC 15 PP Audio type 2b HATS 7 kHz handset NG1 SC 16 PP Audio type 2c HATS 7 kHz improved handset NG1 SC 19 PP Audio type 4a HATS 7 kHz handsfree M M M_ Kana NG1 SC 20 PP Audio type 4b HATS 5 6 21 N A 7 kHz improved handsfree NG1 SC 28 FP Audio type 4 ISDN 5 6 21 C708 wideband NA O NG1 6 Wideband 11 kHz MPEG 4 ER AAC LD 32 kbit s voice service z z Z Z Z Q O Q O gt N QIV Vl o a Ols Olalla lt a POO HIs o Z I ale 8 DOS le 5 M2158 2 M2
298. single list entry via entry identifier FP shall prevent other PPs from changing the requested list entry negative acknowledgement with reject reason temporarily not possible until PP has sent the save entry command or the session is terminated List entry field identifier values are defined for each list separately Possible error cases If session identifier is wrong the FP shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason invalid session number In case an unknown entry identifier is requested the FP shall answer with negative acknowledgement reject reason entry not available In case an unknown list entry field identifier is requested the FP shall ignore this field and continue with the next requested field ETSI 101 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 10 4 4 2 Edit entry confirm command This command from FP confirms the edit command with the corresponding entry with one or several specified fields and locks this entry against access from other PPs Corresponding entry is sent along in data packets Table 39 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for edit entry confirm command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment eee eevee eee emetee 2 A lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt NOTE _ Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highby
299. sopg m Mm M Terminal Capability indication 7 4 91 Mm M M GAP N 19 Link control O A a e a Indirect FT initiated link establishment__ 7 3 8 21 M M M Direct PT initiated link establishment 8 36112 M M M Link release normal 8 3703 M M Mm Link release abnormal 8 3813 M M M Link release maintain _ 8sspa m M Mm GAP N 24 Signalling of display aae a characters Dispay ee M M M_ Terminal capability indication 7 4 91 M M M GAP N 25 Display control a EEE characters Display y y y eaenga OM M M Terminal capability indication 7 4 91 M M Mm gZ gZ gZ Z Z Z Z Z Z zZ GAP N 31 Internal Call O A Internal call setup sd 73 6 21 m m M Internal call keypad sd BT9TIZA m O O IF NG1 N 13 THEN O ELSE M IF NG1 N 14 THEN O ELSE I IF NG1 N 15 THEN M ELSE I IF NG1 N 17 THEN M ELSE I ETSI 6 11 Data Link Co 37 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 ntrol DLC Service to procedure mapping The DLC service to procedure mapping of EN 300 444 12 GAP clause 6 8 1 with the following changes and additional services shall apply Table 10 DLC service to procedure mapping Service NG1 D 1 LU1 Transparent UnProtected service TRUP Class 0 minimum_delay NG1 D 2 LU1 Transparent UnProtected service TRUP Class 0 NG1 D 3 LU7 64 kbit s protected bearer service NG1 D 4 LU12 LU 12 Unprotected Framed
300. sseeees 189 D 1 Services and features defined in TS 102 527 1 New Generation DECT part 1 leesne 189 D 1 1 New Generation DECT part 1 Speech Services clause 5 1 of TS 102 527 1 eee ee eeeesecesecesecneeeeeees 189 D 1 2 New Generation DECT part 1 Network NWK features clause 5 2 of TS 102 527 1 eee eeeceeeeeeeneeees 189 D 1 3 New Generation DECT part 1 Data Link Control DLC services clause 5 3 of TS 102 527 1 189 D 1 4 New Generation DECT part 1 Medium Access Control MAC services clause 5 4 of TS 102 527 1 190 D 1 5 New Generation DECT part 1 Physical Layer PHL services clause 5 5 of TS 102 527 1 eeeeeeeeeee 190 D 1 6 New Generation DECT part 1 Speech coding and audio features clause 5 6 of TS 102 527 1 190 D 2 Services and features defined in EN 300 444 GAP oo eee eesecssecsseceseceseceeeeseesseessneseaeeeaeeeaeeenaeenaees 194 D 2 1 GAP Network NWK features clause 4 1 of EN 300 444 ooo ecccccecccsssececseseeceesneeecsesaeceeseeeeenssseeeensnaees 194 D 2 2 GAP Speech coding and audio features clause 4 2 of EN 300 444 ooo ceeceeeeeeeeeeceecesecnsecssesaeeaee 195 D 2 3 GAP Application features clause 4 3 of EN 300 444 eeesecssecssecneecseecaeeeeeeeeeeseesesessecssessaeeaesaeeegs 197 D 2 4 DLC service definitions clause 5 1 of EN 300 444 cecceccccsssseceessececseseececeseeeeeesseeecsesaeeecseseeessneeeeneenaes 197 D 2 5 GAP MAC service definitions clause 5 2 of EN 300 444 ccccccccssscce
301. sssececseseeceesseeecsesaececseeeeeesseeecneaaaes 198 D 3 GAP Feature service to procedure mapping tables 0 cee ceeceeceseceseceseeeeeeeeneeeseeseeeeeneeeseeeseeenaeenaees 198 ETSI 9 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 D 3 1 GAP NWK feature to procedure mapping table clause 6 8 1 of EN 300 444 ooo eecetecssecsseeneeeneeees 199 D 3 2 GAP DLC service to procedure mapping table clause 6 8 2 of EN 300 444 oe eesecese esse tseeereeeneeees 201 D 3 3 GAP MAC service to procedure mapping table clause 6 8 3 of EN 300 444 oe eeccesecssecseeeneeeseeees 202 D 3 4 GAP Application feature to procedure mapping table clause 6 8 4 of EN 300 444 ee eeeeeseereeees 203 Annex E informative Bibliography sisisesiccesscdssvesscsocssonescncsoesctesvseassocssoocscocsesesdeveseddescssecsseseseoss seas secs 204 FHiStO tr cekelv aie tere vabents E tele a e A EA AOE ts Gel tudes Dene E E E laden Sous A A 205 ETSI 10 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Intellectual Property Rights IPRs essential or potentially essential to the present document may have been declared to ETSI The information pertaining to these essential IPRs if any is publicly available for ETSI members and non members and can be found in ETSI SR 000 314 Intellectual Property Rights IPRs Essential or potentially Essential IPRs notified to ETSI in respect of ETSI standards which is available from the ETSI Secretariat Latest updates are available on the ETSI Web server http w
302. st access use case modify a PP internal name ETSI 176 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 6 List access service with voice calls additional use cases and procedure diagrams C 6 1 General In the following clauses several procedure diagrams for list access service combined with voice calls are depicted It has to be noted that the sequences are only examples it cannot be mandatory that the message flows shall always be exactly in the described way However it is recommended to follow the examples where possible in order to ensure interoperability C 6 2 List access when a voice call is already ongoing Please note that for clarity of the flowcharts the line identifier is not mentioned However it has to be implemented and managed correctly as defined by the present document C 6 2 1_ Use case Consult a list during a voice call Use case Look for the number of a contact while you are in voice call and then come back to the voice call PP FP Ongoing call 1 external or internal with call id 1 Put call 1 on hold mandatory only if Cf channel used for list access optional otherwise Fey a ad E EE E EAE EE a rg es ae E E ENE sh E E EE E EN N EE ac E Ne CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 41 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION Line ld call id 1 gt Access contact list within call 1 IWU INFO lt lt IWU TO IWU lt Command start session gt lt List identifier contact list gt gt gt IWU INFO
303. st call ETSI 110 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 10 5 1 5 Field New Bits 8 7 6 Ss 4a 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier New 1 Length L 2 0 1 Jjeditable new x x x x x 3 For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x the value is reserved for future use When a new entry is created the bit new shall be set by the FP The FP shall reset the bit upon reading of the entry from any PP 7 4 10 5 1 6 Field Line name Bits 8 7 6 5 47 3 2 Octet Field identifier Line name Length L po tength Ly gt Eef 1 character byte 2 character byte ee y ORONS For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x the value is reserved for future use Characters shall be coded as defined for UTF 8 7 4 10 5 1 7 Field Line id Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier Line id 1 0 1 Length L 2 3 Identifier subtype 0 1 Identifier value 0 1 Identifier value For octet 3 each bit indicates whether a property of the field is given 1 or not 0 In case of x the value is reserved for future use The structure of the Line id field aligns to the structure of IE lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt line identifier type see EN 300 175 5 5 clause 7 7 56 For all call related lists if the entry where the field
304. subnet mask for IPv6 shall always have a length of 16 bytes EXAMPLE 2 A subnet mask corresponding to a 59 bit prefix is translated into an IP address subnet mask field with the following bytes FFFF FFFF FFFF FFEO 0000 0000 0000 0000 H The length of the field shall be set to zero when the value of the field is not specified by the user 7 4 11 3 7 Field FP IP address gateway The FP IP address gateway field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier FP IP address gateway 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 _ Editable IPv4 6 X X x X X 3 1 byte 4 2 byte 3 byte IPv4 6 if set to 0 the format is IPv4 4 bytes long if set to 1 the format is IPv6 16 bytes long The FP IP address gateway field shall always have a length of 4 bytes IPv4 or 16 bytes IPv6 See the IP address value field for more information The length of the field shall be set to zero when the value of the field is not specified by the user ETSI 120 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 11 3 8 Field FP IP address DNS server The DNS server field shall be coded as follows Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octet Field identifier FP IP address DNS server 1 0 1 Length L 2 0 1 Editable IPV4 6 x xX xX X X 3 1 byte 4 2 byte 3 byte IPv4 6 if set to 0 the format is IPv4 4 bytes long if set to 1 th
305. subtype Call identifier value call id2 gt gt gt Access internal names list to find call transfer target within call id 2 IWU INFO lt lt IWU TO IWU lt Command start session gt lt List identifier internal names list gt gt gt IWU INFO lt lt IWU TO IWU lt Command end session confirm gt lt session identifier gt gt gt Una CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD Called nb terminal id number gt gt CC INFO ooo lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt id_ type subtype Call identifier value callid2 gt gt gt Establish parallel internal call 2 IOU Call transfer request CC INFO lt lt MULTI KEYPAD info 1C 34 H gt gt lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Call identifier gt lt Identifier subtype Call identifier gt lt Identifier value call id 1 gt gt gt Only if the PP implements the Call identification feature Figure C 34 List access use case call transfer using internal names list first call explicitly put on hold ETSI 179 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 6 2 4 Use case establishing a parallel call using contact list Use case During an ongoing call the user establishes a parallel external call using the contact list In this case there is no need for an additional call id for the list access it is done within existing call PP FP Ongoing call external or internal on call id1 Put call 1 on
306. support of as many simultaneous call contexts 7 4 7 2 Terminal attachment and line settings All registered PPs shall be attached to at least one line A PP may be attached to one or more lines For example a given PP can be attached to a PSTN line and a VoIP line at the same time ETSI 7 4 7 2 83 Initial attachment ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 The FP shall provide at least one of the following two possible attachment modes FP managed attachment After subscription registration the PP is attached by the FP to one or several lines with no specific user intervention In case of FP managed attachment and in order to know the set of lines it is attached to the PP may read the Attached handsets setting of all Line settings entries via the List access service feature NG1 N 16 PP managed attachment Attachment is initiated by the PP during or just after subscription registration An initial PP managed attachment shall be implemented as an update of the Attached handsets setting for every entry in the Line settings list corresponding to a targeted line and performed via the List access service feature NGI N 16 TAF 262 Attachment modification The PP should be able to change the initial attachment add or remove lines during or after location registration If supported the PP shall initiate the procedure An attachment modification shall be implemented as an update of the Attached handsets s
307. sy tone signal received back 7 4 3 9 Internal call codec priority 7 4 3 9 1 Description When performing an internal call between two wideband enabled PPs the FP shall arrange that the call is finally established in a wideband codec rather than in a narrow band codec Respectively in a super wideband codec rather than in a wideband or narrowband codec As a consequence in the particular case where both PPs present G 722 with highest priority the internal call shall finally be established in ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 Exception cases to this procedure are listed in clause 7 4 3 9 2 This procedure has been added to guarantee that the internal call will be established in the highest audio quality supported by both handsets involved in the internal call at least when no other call is established at the same time in the DECT system Two examples of support of this procedure are given hereafter EXAMPLE 1 When the lt lt Codec List gt gt information element is only specified at subscription registration and location registration phases EXAMPLE 2 When the lt lt Codec List gt gt information element is specified at call setup phase Figure 24 shows an example example 1 with an internal call sequence where no codec list is specified at call setup and both PP s support wideband same codec list re used as at location registration phase ETSI 71 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP1 FP PP2 ACCESS_RI
308. t Figure B 18 List access search entries ETSI 149 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Annex C informative Recommended implementation of procedures C 1 General In the following clauses several examples for generic sequence charts are depicted It has to be noted that the sequences are only examples it cannot be mandatory that the message flows shall always be exactly in the described way However it is recommended to follow the examples where possible in order to ensure interoperability C 2 Multiple lines diagrams The diagrams of this clause document the Multiple lines feature This feature can be used when at least the FP implements it For the PP implementing this feature means that it is aware of multiple attachments and proposes an adapted MMI However a PP may be attached to several lines without being aware of it i e not implementing the Multiple lines feature Such a PP would use e g FP managed line selection for outgoing calls and would receive calls from these lines at the price for the user of not knowing from which line an incoming call arrives unless asking the calling user The Line identification feature is an independent feature on PP side but a pre requisite on FP side Implementing it on PP side recommended however allows the user to place a call on line k by keyboarding k before the called number or by introducing the k value through a dedicated MMI It also allows the user to know
309. t lt Calling Party Number gt gt If the waiting call is an internal call the information element lt lt Calling Party Number gt gt shall indicate a private numbering plan PP FP Call established lt lt SIGNAL value 07H gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALLING PARTY NUMBER gt gt Figure 13 CLIP on call waiting ETSI 60 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 4 3 5 11 CNIP on call waiting indication This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in a call on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal If the Multiple call feature is implemented on a line the line may be configured in single call mode or in multiple call mode CNIP on call waiting shall be indicated by the FP to the PP This indication shall be done by sending in a CC INFO message the information element lt lt Calling Party Name gt gt PP FP Call established lt lt SIGNAL value 07H gt gt CC INFO lt lt CALLING PARTY NAME gt gt Figure 14 CNIP on call waiting NOTE In case both CLIP and CNIP are sent to the PP it is sufficient to display one of them It is optional to display both 7 4 3 6 Call transfer Call transfer is used by the user of a PP involved in two parallel calls to connect the remote parties together before ending the existing calls If one of the remote parties is a handset registered to the same FP the transfe
310. t Keying GFSK modulation as defined by EN 300 175 2 2 clause 5 7 7 2 Slot type Physical packets The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 7 2 shall apply 7 8 Requirements regarding the speech transmission 7 8 1 General The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 8 1 shall apply ETSI 129 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 7 8 2 Speech codecs The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 8 2 shall apply 7 8 3 Audio performance requirements The requirements of TS 102 527 1 21 clause 7 8 3 shall apply The status of each feature shall be as defined by tables 8 clause 6 8 and 2 clause 6 3 of the present document 7 9 Management procedures All procedures described in GAP EN 300 444 12 clause 13 shall be supported Higher layer capability FP broadcast shall be set as described in clause 7 4 9 2 of the present document 7 10 Application procedures This clause specifies the additional application layer procedures messages and information elements required in New Generation DECT Extended Wideband Speech Services not described in TS 102 527 1 21 or in EN 300 444 12 GAP or incorporating modifications to the description given in these specifications 7 10 1 Easy PIN code and easy pairing registration The Easy PIN code registration and Easy pairing registration features use common procedures see clause 7 10 1 3 and specific procedures see clauses 7 10 1 1 and 7 10 1 2 respective
311. t are handled Line identification by PP or FP managed line selection C 2 2 1 PP attached to 1 line C 2 2 1 1 Line identification by mono line PP See below clauses C 2 2 2 1 C 2 2 2 2 and C 2 2 2 3 as there is no difference from the case when a PP is attached to several lines the only line id still must be sent at call setup by a PP attached to only one line C 2 2 1 2 No line identification by mono line PP not relevant FP managed line selection is not recommended for a PP attached to only one line which must systematically send the line id C 2 2 2 PP attached to several lines Clauses C 2 2 2 1 C 2 2 2 2 and C 2 2 2 3 implement variants of the same use case the PP implements the Line identification feature and sends the line id when setting up the call Clause C 2 2 2 3 in addition presents the case where the PP sends the called number before the call id is received pre dialling and similar use cases Clause C 2 2 2 4 documents call by call FP managed line selection and clause C 2 2 2 5 permanent FP managed line selection useful for example for the case a PP although attached to several lines always uses the same line for outgoing calls C 2 2 2 1 Line identification by PP using lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt Use case 1 the PP selects a line on a call by call basis using lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt IE PP FP Network CC SETUP lt lt CALL INFORMATION lt Identifier type Line identifier
312. t index returned if exact match fails 000001xx case sensitive search required all other values reserved If 00 H matching option is used the FP shall only succeed if it finds an entry in the list with first sorting field value equal to the searched value and shall return an error otherwise see possible error cases NOTE 1 This option is especially useful for the PP to retrieve a specific entry with no human intervention If 01 H matching option is used the FP shall only succeed if either the exact match succeeds as with option 00H or if the end of the list was not reached when the exact match failed The current entry index shall be returned as start index of the returned range If the end of the list was reached when the exact match failed there is no current entry anymore the FP shall return an error see possible error cases If 02 H matching option is used the FP shall only succeed if either the exact match succeeds as with option 00H or if the current entry when the exact match failed was not the first entry of the list The previous index current entry index 1 shall be returned as start index of the returned range If the current entry when the exact match failed was the first entry of the list the FP shall return an error see possible error cases ETSI 106 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NOTE 2 Options 01 H and 02 H are especially useful for searching the contact list For example if Smi is the sear
313. t s PCM codec NG1 SC 8 Detection of Fax modem tone NG1 SC 9 Codec selection and switching NG1 SC 10 PP Audio type 1a classic GAP handset NG1 SC 11 PP Audio type 1b improved GAP handset NG1 SC 12 PP Audio type 1c HATS 3 1 kHz handset NG1 SC 13 PP Audio type 1d HATS 3 1 kHz improved handset NG1 SC 17 PP Audio type 3a HATS 3 1 kHz handsfree NG1 SC 18 PP Audio type 3b HATS 3 1 kHz improved handsfree NG1 SC 23 FP Audio type 1b new ISDN 3 1 kHz NG1 SC 24 PP echo canceller for FP narrowband narrowband NG1 SC 26 FP Audio type 2 analog PSTN 3 1 kHz NG1 SC 27 FP Audio type 3 VoIP 3 1 kHz NG1 SC 25 PP echo supressor for FP NG1 SC 32 FP Audio type 6a internal FT DECT f O ET p eere oee go 5 5 21 e OME 5 5 21 5 4 21 M M M 5 4 21 5 3 21 M M M 5 3 21 5 6 21 KERAK 5 6 21 N A N A note 1 er o a Beat all len fee ea 5 6 21 FP call NG1 SC 33 FP Audio type 6b internal 5 6 21 N A conference NG1 SC 34 Adaptive volume control for 5 6 21 N A O O ETSI 23 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NG1 3 Wideband 7 kHz G 722 64 kbit s voice service Service DECT Feature mapping AOCP EEC P 1 2 level GFSK modulation NG1 P 3 Physical Packet P64 NG1 M 1 In minimum delay symmetric MAC service type NG1 M 4 Advanced Connections NG1 D 1 DLC Service LU1 TRUP Class 0 min_delay NG1 D 5 DLC frame FU1 NG1 SC 3 ITU T Recommendation G 722 17 64
314. t value of the setting before enabling the user to modify it For clarity of the following flowcharts the lt lt Call information gt gt IE including call identifier does not appear in the CC messages that must convey it Please note that it should not be omitted when implementing equivalent cases For example the call identifier must be assigned by the FP after CC SETUP message C 8 2 Changing the settings of a line Use case 1 The user edit the line settings of the line number i Read only the selected entry ETSI 185 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP CC SETUP lt lt BASIC_SERVICE lt Call Class Service call setup gt gt gt CC CALL PROC IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session lines settings Number of sorting fields 0 gt gt IWU INFO E lt lt IWU to IWU start session confirm session identifier total number N gt gt Line i selected by the user i e 1 N IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries session id start index i counter 01H list of field identifiers Line id id Line name id Multiple calls mode id gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries confirm session id start index counter 1 gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part for i entry gt gt IWU INFO IE lt lt IWU to IWU edit entry session id entry identifier list of field identifiers Line id id Line name id Multiple calls mode id gt gt I
315. te shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 Content of list entry is transmitted in data packets 7 4 10 4 5 Save entry 7 4 10 4 5 1 Save entry command This command from PP requests to save the entry in the list identified by the specified entry identifier or to add a new entry to the list Corresponding entry is sent along in data packets The list entries which are saved shall have been requested via edit before in the same session except for creation of a new entry The save transaction shall contain all fields or a subset of the fields which were submitted in the edit transaction If a new entry is created the PP shall indicate this by using the entry identifier OOH In this case FP shall assign a new entry identifier for the entry and submit it in the following save entry confirm Table 40 Values used within IWU to IWU information element for Save entry command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment element within the field IE lt lt IWU to IWUs gt lt Length of content gt Length of content lt Protocol Discriminator gt AH Li I lt Command saveentry gt AH __Listaccesscommand __ Entry identifier see note NOTE _ Session identifier and entry identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be
316. ted entry fields confirm command Information element Field within the information Standard values Normative action comment eee ah E e e ae E lt lt IWU to IWU gt gt entry fields confirm gt S lt number of editable entry fields gt 0 255 Number of editable entry fields lt List entry field identifier 1 gt 0 255 Supported field element type beo ae SO lt List entry field identifier n gt 0 255 Supported field element type lt number of non editable entry 0 255 Number of non editable entry fields fields gt lt List entry field identifier 1 gt 0 255 Supported field element type e E a ee a a a a l lt List entry field identifier n gt 0 255 Supported field element type NOTE Session identifier can be extended using the most significant bit up to 16383 In case more than one byte is used for the value the highbyte shall be send before the lowbyte e g 1 is coded as 0x81 128 is coded as 0x01 0x80 For list entry field identifiers see clause 7 4 10 5 1 7 4 10 4 3 Read entries 7 4 10 4 3 1 Read entries command This command from PP requests to read a range of consecutive entries in the list or only a subset of the fields of these entries The list here shall be understood as the list resulting from the initial sorting of the list as specified by the FP in the Start session confirm command NOTE 1 Range can be limited to one entry ETSI 99 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 Table 36 Values used withi
317. ternal call incoming or outgoing is made When the Multiple line feature is also implemented line identifiers allow to enhance the handling of parallel calls in the Common parallel call procedures feature However when the Line identification feature is implemented line identifiers shall be sent even if there is only one line in the system Furthermore if there are several lines in the system meaning that the Multiple line feature is also implemented the line identifiers shall be used also for PPs attached to only one line A party PP or FP shall send the line identifier in case it implements the Line identification feature regardless of whether the other party implements the feature or not If the other party does not implement the feature it shall ignore the received line identifier However a PP implementing the feature may not send any line identifier if it uses the FP managed line selection procedure Typically a FP would use line identifiers in the 0 n interval where n 1 represents the number of lines it handles Several procedures outside of the Line identification feature itself also use line identifiers conditionally to the implementation of the Line identification feature This includes procedures defined for the feature entitled Common parallel calls procedures A DECT system shall use the CALL INFORMATION completeness principle see clause 3 1 7 4 5 2 Line identification for external outgoing calls
318. tion element even if the PP is attached to a single line NOTE 1 As no call identifier is send for this procedure the line identifier may help the other party determine which call is to be released In some cases when the request is sent by the PP the FP might not be able to fulfil it for instance when the call to be released is external In that case the FP shall warn the user by sending the information element lt lt SIGNAL gt gt with the value 09H indicating negative acknowledgement tone The FP may change the codec using the service change procedure see clause 7 4 3 3 Codec change for parallel calls The release by the PP of a parallel call shall not be possible in a conference However the FP shall send a call release according to present procedure to the PP if it initiated a 3 party conference call and if the remote party that was on hold when the conference call was initiated hangs up NOTE 2 In order to release all parallel calls the PP sends a CC RELEASE to the FP 7 4 3 5 6 Call waiting acceptation from PP to FP This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in a call on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal If the Multiple call feature is implemented on a line the line may be configured in single call mode or in multiple call mode NOTE 1 Implementation of the Multiple call feature or of the Multiple line feature impli
319. tion element Field within the Standard values within the Normative action comment information element feld information element lt lt Terminal capability gt gt lt Echo parameters gt Minimum Telephone Coupling Loss TCL gt 34 dB lt N REJ gt Po Noise rejection lt A VOL gt 1 No PP adaptive volume control lt Slot type capability gt xxx1x1x B Full slot and Long slot j 640 supported No echoing of characters is allowed in the FT and therefore the PT would be responsible for displaying dialled digits All display information from the FT would be assumed to be additional information that the PT shall display in addition The PT shall logically separate display information originating at the FT and PT This could be achieved for example by one physical display and two logical displays or two physical displays and two logical displays The key point is that display characters from the PT and FT shall not be simultaneously interleaved mixed on the same physical display 7 4 9 2 Higher layer information FP broadcast The FP and PT shall support the broadcast of Higher Layer capabilities as part of Qr MAC broadcast messages see clauses 7 6 3 7 6 4 and 7 6 5 The broadcast attributes are a small set of NWK layer and DLC layer capabilities jointly known as higher layer capabilities that shall be broadcast regularly as part of the MAC layer broadcast service See EN 300 175 5 5 annex F RFPs belonging to the same LA s
320. tion index in the line settings list 7 4 11 2 Interactions between registration attachments of handsets and lists Internal names list fully reflects the registered PPs At registration of a handset the FP shall add a new entry in the Internal names list with a default name For example DECT n where n stands for the terminal identity number in decimal representation Attached handsets setting in the corresponding line setting s shall also automatically be updated by the FP with corresponding bit Attachment may be initiated by the PP or done on FP side default attachment or e g through a web to FP interface Except during temporary period modifications creations delete of lines a registered handset shall always be attached to at least one line the PP shall appear at least in one attached handset field of one line setting It may appear in several line settings if it is attached to several lines Deleting an entry in the Internal names list shall result in de registration of the corresponding handset Attached handsets field in the line setting s list shall also be automatically updated by the FP Deleting one entry one line of the line settings list shall result in the de attachment of the corresponding handsets from the line If as a consequence of a delete entry command on the line settings list a handset is no longer attached to any line anymore it shall however remain registered and available in the Internal name
321. tion to the clause 7 4 3 9 No requirement applies in the following cases 1 Case of internal call transfer In this case the PP requesting the transfer may specify any order for the codecs in the lt lt Codec List gt gt information element For example the codec used in the initial ongoing external call to be transferred may be given the highest priority in the lt lt Codec List gt gt information element sent by the PP for the parallel call This could avoid two codec switching one for each PP involved in the transfer 2 Cases of multiple calls handled by the FP at the same time if critical for FP hardware resources 3 Specific implementations of PPs that have to support narrow band headsets 4 Specific implementations of PPs where battery autonomy is very critical 7 4 4 Handling of single call services 7 4 4 1 Control messages The following control codes shall be transmitted as keypad information in CC INFO messages and shall trigger the corresponding actions in the FP 7 4 4 1 1 Call deflection control messages Table 18 Control messages for control of single call services Procedure Control message Direction PP Status Call deflection internal 1CH 38H 17H number PP to FP M Call deflection external 1CH 38H 15H number PP to FP M Call deflection procedure for internal and external calls is detailed in clause 7 4 4 2 7 4 4 2 Call deflection The call deflection service enables the user
322. tive acknowledgement tone NOTE 1 A possible cause of failure may be unsuccessful interaction of the FP with the network NOTE 2 Examples of use of this procedure are the Call release and call release rejection clause 7 4 3 5 4 On hold call release clause 7 4 3 5 5 and Explicit call intrusion clause 7 4 3 8 2 procedures NOTE 3 In the special case where the requested service cannot be fulfilled because it would exceed the DECT system or line capacity the Busy system or line notification procedure of clause 7 4 8 3 is used instead The main identified use case is in the context of multiple call lines clause 7 4 8 but other parallel call use cases are relevant e g in the context of a multiple lines DECT system See also NG1 N 6 in clause 6 10 7 4 3 5 Common parallel call procedures external or internal This clause details the procedures of a feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal This feature is a set of common procedures for handling PSTN double calls VoIP multiple calls on a single line as well as parallel call situations occurring in a multiple line DECT system and especially for PPs attached to multiple lines in such a system These procedures apply to the FP and a PP already involved in at least one call on a line in a DECT system If the Multiple call feature is implemented on a line this line may be configured in single call mode or in multiple call mode see clause 3 1
323. to IWU read entries confirm session id counter gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part 1 gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet last session id content part m gt gt IWU Info hh IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session session identifier gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU end session confirm session identifier gt gt CC Info _qe ooo IE lt lt MULTI KEYPAD int key number digits gt gt Figure C 27 List access use case select and call internal party The int key is necessary at least in case basic service is not internal call ETSI 173 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 C 5 4 Use case select and call number from contact list A Direct PT initiated link establishment l CC Setup IE lt lt BASIC_SERVICE lt Call Class Normal call setup gt gt gt CC Call Proc IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU start session contact list Nb sorting field identifier 0 gt gt IWU Info E lt lt IWU to IWU start session confirm session identifier Total number Sorting field identifier1 name Sorting field identifier2 first name gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries session id start index counter list of field identifiers gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU read entries confirm session id counter gt gt IWU Info IE lt lt IWU to IWU data packet session id content part 1 gt gt IWU Info IE lt
324. to respond to an incoming call by requesting redirection of this call to another number specified in the response The call deflection service can only be requested before the connection is established by the user i e in response to the incoming call during the period that the user is being alerted of the call see TS 122 072 22 In order to deflect a call in the CALL RECEIVED CC state the PP shall send the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 38H and by the deflected to telephone number Deflected to telephone number may be internal or external NOTE 0 Deflection to an internal telephone number only makes sense if ringing groups have been defined and if the deflected to terminal belongs to a different ringing group for example in a multi line context It is recommended that the deflected to telephone number is pre configured in the handset before using this service The PP related procedures to pre program and display the deflected to number is out of the scope of this procedure If a user requests the call deflection service and the deflected to telephone number is external the FP shall relay the service request to the network If the service can be provided the FP shall notify the PP by releasing the incoming call If the service cannot be provided the FP shall not release the incoming call and should proceed further with it On the FP side only the first call deflection request shall b
325. tting the FACILITY message containing the lt lt Events Notification gt gt information element to the PP If link is not available the FP shall initiate indirect link establishment Direct FP initiated link establishment is out of the scope of the present document The following requirements apply for the FP and the PP The FP shall send the Event type and Event sub type argument to indicate the kind of event The PP shall support the Event multiplicity argument which should be used to indicate how many unconsulted events of the specific type are waiting regardless of any previous notification The PP shall be capable of handling values up to 127 The PP shall ignore events of unknown types or sub types It is the responsibility of the FP to ensure that Event status information within the PP is up to date Optionally more than one event notification can be included by using the extension bit Whatever the FACILITY transport mode CLSS procedure or re use of already established link the FACILITY message shall be used with dummy transaction identifier value 6 and the protocol discriminator CISS The notification shall be consistent with the procedure Line specification in events notification defined in clause 7 4 5 4 If this procedure is implemented the notification shall include the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element with the line identifier even if one line only is implemented in the DECT system Table
326. ture NG DECT Part 1 PP or FP GAP PP or FP NOTE Fora PP not implementing the Multiple lines feature does not necessarily mean that the PP is attached to only one line is only means that the PP is not aware of possible multiple attachments 7 4 7 5 1 Non multiple line PP in front of a multiple line FP Attachment A non multiple line PP shall use FP managed attachment and is not aware of the lines it is attached to only the user is NOTE A FP should not attach a PP to more than one line if the PP does not implement the Multiple line feature but however implements the List access service feature NG1 N16 and the Line settings list Outgoing calls A non multiple line PP may Either use FP managed line selection in that case if the PP is a non GAP PP and implements the Line identification feature it should use the line identifier notification received to notify the user of the line used Or use the key based line selection mechanism of clause 7 4 5 2 3 Line identification for a first external outgoing call using lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt In that case the user must manually enter the line identifier after the key Incoming calls A non multiple line PP shall receive all incoming calls arriving on one of the lines it is attached to if the PP is a non GAP PP and implements the Line identification feature it should however use the line identifier received to notify the user of the line used 7 4 7
327. ture or of the Multiple line feature implies implementation of the Common parallel call procedures external or internal feature A Call release message may be sent either by the PP or by the FP In case at least two parallel calls are established with one PP and in order to release one of these calls the releasing party either the PP or the FP shall send the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 33H Additionally If the PP implements the Call identification feature the releasing party shall send the identifier of the call to be released in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt information element included in the same CC INFO message Furthermore if the releasing party also implements the Line identification feature i e always if the releasing party is the FP and the call to be released is external it shall send the line identifier of the call to be released in the same lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element NOTE 2 As the call identifier is unique within the DECT system both parties already know in the above case which line is used for the call to be released The line identifier is therefore present here as a result of the lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt completeness principle see clause 3 1 ETSI 54 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NOTE 3 If the PP implements the Call identification feature a call release can be sent in any direction as soon as a call identifi
328. type Line identifier subtype external call if external see note 3 value targeted call line id u gt If the PP implements i lt id type Call identifier the Call identification feature value targeted call id gt Figure 11 Putting a call on hold 7 4 3 5 9 Resuming a call put on hold This procedure applies to the FP and a PP already involved in a call on a DECT system implementing the feature entitled Common parallel call procedures external or internal NOTE 1 Implementation of the Multiple call feature or of the Multiple line feature implies implementation of the Common parallel call procedures external or internal feature In order to resume a call that was put on hold the PP shall send the control code 1CH as keypad information in a CC INFO message followed by 42H Furthermore If the PP implements the Call identification feature it shall send the identifier of the call to be resumed in a lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt information element included in the same CC INFO message ETSI 59 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 NOTE 2 A PP implementing the Call identification feature sends the call identifier of the call to be resumed even if there is only one call on hold If the PP implements the Line identification feature and the call to be resumed is external it shall send the line identifier of the call to be resumed in the same lt lt CALL INFORMATION gt gt
329. wideband speech services Part 4 Software Update Over The Air SUOTA and Content Download ETSI 11 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 1 Scope The present document specifies a set of functionalities of the New Generation DECT The New Generation DECT provides the following basic new functionalities Wideband speech service part 1 Packet mode data service supporting Internet Protocol with efficient spectrum usage and high data rates part 2 Extended wideband speech services part 3 All New Generation DECT devices will offer at least one or several of these services The present document describes the part 3 Extended wideband speech services For the description of the wideband speech service see TS 102 527 1 21 For the description of the support of transparent IP packet data see TS 102 527 2 i 4 The part 3 Extended wideband speech services is defined as an extension of part 1 Wideband speech service All devices compliant to part 3 specification the present document shall implement at least all mandatory features and may implement the optional features defined in part 1 wideband speech In addition to that the present document defines additional mandatory or optional features The part 1 and therefore part 3 are also defined as extensions of the Generic Access Profile GAP 12 All DECT devices offering Wideband speech services part 1 or part 1 plus part 3 shall also be compliant with th
330. with ARQ using the Cs channel to transfer higher layer signalling data quality control M 6 provides means for monitoring and controlling the radio link quality encryption activation M 7 service providing means for enabling the encryption whereby on demand all higher layer data including speech is transferred across the AI in an encrypted form Always initiated by the PT extended frequency allocation M 8 service which allows a FT to support frequencies in addition to the standard DECT frequencies bearer handover intra cell M 9 internal MAC process whereby data transfer C channel and I channel is switched from one duplex bearer to another in the domain of the same cell while maintaining the service to the DLC layer bearer handover inter cell M 10 internal MAC process whereby data transfer C channel and I channel is switched from one duplex bearer to another not in the domain of the same cell while maintaining the service to the DLC layer connection handover intra cell M 11 in the MAC layer it is the process enabling setting up a new basic connection in the domain of the same cell to support connection handover at the DLC layer connection handover inter cell M 12 in the MAC layer it is the process enabling setting up a new basic connection not in the domain of the same cell to support connection handover at the DLC layer Secondary Access Rights Identity SARI support M 13 ability to support in add
331. y used for introducing the line identifier 30H 39H The line identifier itself ETSI 76 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 PP FP Network attached to line u e 1 9 if CC SETUP is used CC SETUP lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 23 3u H gt gt gt if CC INFO is used CC SETUP lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info 23 3u H gt gt gt lt lt MULTI KEYPAD lt Keypad info called number gt gt gt Use of line u for calling called number Figure 29 Line identification for a first external outgoing call using the lt lt MULTI KEYPAD gt gt method 7 4 5 2 4 FP managed line selection for a first external outgoing call This procedures applies to the FP and a PP making a first external outgoing call It allows the PP not to send any line identifier for this new call For a given call it shall always be possible for a PP implementing the current procedure not to send any line identifier In that case the line selection is said to be FP managed A FP implementing this procedure shall therefore always be prepared to possibly select a line on behalf of the PP NOTE 1 The PP can therefore allow its user not to select any line either on a call by call basis or permanently by configuration NOTE 2 If the PP is attached to only one line e g registered to a FP with only one line it should not use the present procedure and send the line identifier in all ca
332. ype 1b shall become I for PP instead of C702 after 31 December 2009 Feature NG1 SC 14 type 2a shall become I for PP instead of C703 after 31 December 2009 The transition dates given in notes 1 and 2 are linked to the product development and test dates based on corresponding ETSI test specification EN 300 176 2 10 Example for note 1 For PPs developed and tested before 31 December 2009 the feature NG1 SC 11 is C702 For PPs developed and tested after 31 December 2009 this feature is ETSI 28 ETSI TS 102 527 3 V1 1 1 2008 06 6 4 NWK features New Generation DECT part 3 Extended wideband speech services devices shall support the following Network layer features Table 3 NWK features status Reference 5 2 21 M M 5 2 21 5 2 5 2 Feature supported Tl Name of feature D D NG1 N 1 NG1 N 2 NG1 N 3 NG1 N 4 odec Negotiation odec Switching Missed call notification Voice message waiting notification NG1 N 5 Date and Time synchronization 5 2 NG1 N 6 Parallel calls 5 2 NG1 N 7 Common parallel call procedures external or internal 5 2 NG1 N 8 Call transfer external or internal 5 2 NG1 N 9 3 party conference with established external and or internal 5 2 calls NG1 N 10 Intrusion call 5 2 NG1 N 11 Call deflection external or internal 5 2 NG1 N 12 5 2 NG1 N 13 Call identification 5 2 NG1 N 14 Multiple Lines 5 2 Call identification CS Multiple Lines ooo y y NG1 N

TS 102 527-3 - V1.1.1 - Digital Enhanced Cordless

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents